Home

EV5000 User Manual

1. 5 Pounds It is used to select the line width the number indicates the pounds of the line width System toolbar LH itt Compile neverse compile Download Direct on line Simulation Off line Simulatio ndirect on line Simulation Compile Compiles the current project and checks whether there is any error Projects have to be compiled before download or simulation or the download and simulation tools are disabled Download Downloads a project to the HMI panel Offline Simulation Used for offline simulation of a project Indirect Online Simulation Used for indirect online simulation of a project Direct Online Simulation Used for direct online simulation of a project Code editing toolbar A Variable Edit Add Bookmark Window Next EM Delete Bookmark Privous Bookmar 53 Chapter 3 Description of the eV5000 Software Add Bookmark Creates a new bookmark Next Bookmark Shows the next bookmark Previous Bookmark Shows the previous bookmark Delete Bookmark Deletes a bookmark Variable Edit Window Opens or closes the variable edit window U8 OBB YNGNZ Il m emex 2 It is used to select various filling effect shapes The filling patterns above can be used for shapes like rectangle ellipse and sector The background of configuration window can also be filled with these patterns To fill the current window double click the window to show the properties win
2. TF 255 255 255 255 l PORT 21845 wa System Operate Serial HO HULL Sat Upload Section Upload LOGO Upload Recipe Click the button Upload User Data it ejects a window for parameters to select The HMI information can be blank or not as user want Then select the data you care Click the button OK then you can get a file with the suffix pkg At the version 1 2 3 this pkg file can not be uncompiled It is used for re download to other HMls The file suffixed with logo is a picture which showed at the start 3 seconds of HMI The third file suffixed with rcp is a recipe database file which user configured for special application The following graphic shows the selection of User Data uploadin g 3 EVManager Communication Set E Download Operate E Communication Type Hettork Cc occ Pep 29 289 eee PORT 21845 SSI System Operate Serial H0 MULL l aut Get Version Upload Section Upload User Data Upload Recipe Upload Set La HMI Information a i User Tatalmust choose Ll Logo File L Recipe File Click the button OK then the save as window is ejected Please input the name and select a right address where you want to save this file Here we select desktop 331 Chapter 12 Security Level Project Save Path My Documents H My Computer My Recent El My Network Places Documents GJENG May Computer 3 My Hetwork Places Proje
3. 3 Add an alarm bar in window 0 Set the Moving Step and Moving Rate parameters like the following figure Alarm Bar Component Attribution Alarm Bar Position Moving Step Piel Moving Rate 10 100 Miltecond Description ABO 4 Add two bit state toggle switches and two bit lamp to control and display the ON OFF state of the LB1 and LB2 The ON OFF state directly triggers the display of alarm messages on the alarm bar 209 Chapter 6 Components 5 Save and compile the project and then perform online offline simulation or downloading The operation effect is shown in the figure below iin em FILB2 is of f LBI is on LB i O amp Since the LB1 is set to ON and LB2 is set to OFF both alarm conditions are met The two alarm information is displayed on the defined alarm bar area The colors are different for two alarms that make them more easy to be distinguished from each other 6 25 Oscilloscope zs Oscill h e The Oscilloscope component has similar functions with the Trend Graph component The difference is that when the current window containing the trend graph closes the background data acquisition continues therefore when a user switches back to the trend graph at any time 210 Chapter 6 Components the user can obtain the sampling information before the switchover However the data acquisition of the oscilloscope is only valid on the current page in other words after each s
4. HM HMIO 0 Addr Type LW Add 0 Addr Type UW Addr 0 Code Type BIN Format DDDDD Code Type BIN Format DDDDD WordNo 5 Use Addr Tag WordNo P Use Addr Tag 163 Chapter 6 Components Text Input Component Attribution Basic Attribution Trigger Address Font Graphics Position HMI T PLE Mo O i Addr Type LB ka Address 4000 Format DOODO The project wizard has a default numeric keyboard on window 3 for numeric value input On Window 1 which is the default common window there are two direct widnow components They will popup window 3 when there is a touch event on numeric text input component To use a customized keyboard other than the default window 3 please delete the two direct window components If you want all the numeric text input components to use the same keyboard put the direct window component on Common window 1 and make the DW part call the customized keyboard window If you want the input components on different windows to have their own keyboard put DW part on the window where the input component is a SE 1 Frame Q o 9 5 T EELEE I NZNZ Ill iil The two DW parts on window 1 They will pop up default window 3 when an input component is pressed Delete them if you want to use customized keyboard 2 Compute the size of the keyboard In this example we will create a keyboard with 10 digit keys all 26 letter keys and four function keys Clear Backspace Esc and Enter
5. Figure 2 shows the functions related to Text Select operation Start select and Finish Select Start select After activate and move the cursor to the start of the text you want to select touching this function key will confirm the start of the text being selected Finish select After touching Start select move the cursor to the end of the text content you want to select then touch this function key to complete the select operation Function Eey Component Attribution X Function Key Trigger Addr Taz Graphics Position C Switch Window Change 0 Framed gt Excute Marco r ir Keyboard Func Ted ope d C Map Keyboard Mapping Key r C Message Board Paste M Text Tool Pen Soe z E Indicator Trend Graphics All Bitmap a f Eurent Horizontal Pen Width 1 H All VectorGraph Clear Newt Vertical Background Figure 3 shows the functions related to text operation Copy Cut and Paste Copy The selected text will be copy to the memory for future paste operation Cut The selected text will be cut to the memory for future paste operation Paste If there is any text stored in the memory it will be pasted from the current cursor position If the text exceeds the limit of the textbook exceeding part will be truncated 259 Chapter 6 Components The following figure shows a project screen using a textbook component 194 79256 7456556 f Attributions of Textbook Com
6. Foreground or alarm 4 Click OK and adjust the position and size of the bar graph component 6 15 Meter A sel nee The Meter displays PLC register data as an angular indicator in proportion to its value as defined by the maximum value and minimum value setting A traditional meter may be composed of three parts gt Procedure to add a Meter 1 Click the meter component icon and drag it to the window the basic attribution tab of the component attribution dialogbox appears Meter Component Attribution Basic Attribution Meter Component Position Pricrity Input Address Output Address HMI HIO PLC HMI PLC Addr Type Lw Addr Addr Type Addr Code Type BIN FomatDODDOD Code Type Format DODD Ward 1 jd wordo E Description MTO Priority Reserved function not used for the time being HMI If your project contains two or more HMls select which HMI it belongs to in this list In 172 Chapter 6 Components this way you can directly operate the local address or the address of the connected PLC of any HMI in the same project Input Address The PLC word register address of the value displayed by the component PLC Select a PLC If this HMI is connected with more than one PLC select the PLC corresponding to the input address Address Type Select the address type corresponding to the meter that is the monitored address type The address type varies with PLC type Alternatively yo
7. Note C200HW COM communication module supports only the C200H ALPHA series of CPUs Pay attention to the settings of DIP switches For hardware settings refer to the technical manuals provided by OMRON Operable address range of CJ series of PLCs 352 i Folding relay Chapter 14 Connection of eView MT5000 4000 with Common PLCs Timer node p00 Comer rose DDD Workspace register Sy ey amp Ja aal Ai CTE Mitsubishi Electric Connection of MITSUBISHI FX Series PLC with eView MT5000 4000 Touch Screen EV5000 software setting Recommended Optional Setting Precaution Setting MITSUBISHI Select corresponding PLC type PLC Type MITSUBISHI FX2n FX2n to different PLCs COM COMO0 COM1 RS232 RS485 Must be the same as the E Data Bits Tor8 port settings of the PLC Must be the same as the COM port settings of the PLC Bits per o 9600 19200 38400 5760 Must be the same as the COM Second 0 115200 port settings of the PLC Even parity odd Must be the same as the COM Parity Even parity parity none port settings of the PLC PLC Station noes Must be the same as the COM No port settings of the PLC Note MITSUBISHI FX2n is applicable only to FX2n series of PLCs and MITSUBISHI FXOn FX2 is applicable to such models as FXOn FX1N FX2 MITSUBISHI FXOn FX2 FX2n COM is applicable only to the circumstance where the connection is made through the extended Stop Bits 1 or 2 communication BD It suppo
8. 10FF 2OFF Normal working mode 10N 2O FF Firmware update and basic parameter setting mode 1OFF 2ON Touch screen calibrate mode available after updating kernel and file systems 1 ON 2 ON System setting Adjusting brightness contrast date and so on e System Setting Mode In this mode the touch screen will start a built in system setting interface where the user can set such parameters as IP address brightness contrast and buzzer e Touch Screen Calibrate Mode In this mode when you touch the screen the screen will display a sign through which you can calibrate the touch accuracy of the screen e Firmware Update and Basic Parameter Setting Mode In this mode the user can update firmware set IP address and perform other lower level operations In general do not use this mode e Application Online Operation Mode This is the normal working mode of MT5000 series touch screens The screen will display the starting picture of the downloaded project 1 Set DIP switches 1 and 2 on the back of the touch screen to ON and press the Reset key 430 Chapter 16 Use of Setup The Setup interface for the eView MT4000 and MT5000 series appears Startup Window No Startup window O by default Modify the parameter only when necessary After modification re download or reset the touch screen and the modified window will appear Backlight Saver Time Screen saver time in the unit of minute The default value is 10
9. AAAAAAAA 0 Group 1 RW5 RW9 BBBBBBBB 1111 Group 2 RW10 rw14 CCCCCCCC 2222 Group 3 RW15 RW19 DDDDDDDD 3333 Group4 RW20 RW24 EEEEEEEE 4444 Group 5 RW25 RW29 FFFFFFFF 5555 Group 6 RW30 RW34 GGGGGGGG 6666 Group 7 RW35 RW39 HHHHHHHH 7777 Group 8 RW40 RW44 IMH 8888 Group 9 RW45 RW49 JJJJJJJJ 9999 It is expected that each group of recipe in the above figure can conveniently conduct data exchange with PLC equipment register 4x100 through project design Firstly lets take a look at a completed project shown in the figure below to gain an overall concept In the project RWIO and RWI4 show the recipe data of group 0 Click Download to download the recipe data to 4x100 Click Upload to upload the 4x100 data to the recipe memory Click the Up direction key on the right to query previous recipe data so that the user can modify and transfer recipe data Click the Down direction key on the right to query next recipe data 282 Recipe Card Group 8 Recipe Data RHIO RHI4 O Chapter 8 Recipe Data LU9900 Subtraction rla Ove This gives us a rough idea on the design purpose of the project The following section will detail the preparation process of the project Firstly create a new project and select MODBUS RTU for the PLC Type Create a text input component to display and modify the each group of recipe name Set the Word No to 4 Text Input Component Attribution Basic Attribution
10. Description Format QODOD oe Output Address Htl Addr Type EH 3000 Code Type BIN FomatDOODO wordo 1 Use dd 285 Chapter 8 Recipe Data i Word Setting Component Attribution Basic Attribution Multi State Setting Tag Graphics Position Settinghlode Pinty Inc value Upper Limit 45 l Word Setting Component Attribution Basic Attribution Multi State Setting Tag Graphics Position SettingMode Sub value i Dec value Baothorn The button for querying the next recipe is also a multi state setting component Each time when you press this button the system will add 5 to the value of LW9000 because each group of recipe data consists of five words Press this button once and the RWIO can display the data of the next recipe The upper limit for this parameter is 45 10 groups of recipes How to know which group the current recipe is What controls the value displayed by LW0 We can make two more multi state setting components with the address of LWO both One is for deduction and the other is for addition without the need of any shapes as shown in the figures below 286 Chapter 8 Recipe Data Word Setting Component Attribution Basic Attribution hulti State Setting Tag Graphics Position Friority Mormmal laput Address 2 Quit put Address Htl HMIO PLC 0 Htl HMIO PLC 0 Addr Type Lw Addr U Addr Type E 0 Code Type BIN Format DOOD Code Type BIN FomatDODOOD
11. PLE No Pop Window Data Type i write Data Add Type HMI PLE No Address Addr Type Address Format OD DOD Attibution Event T rigging Cond Print M On Trig Return to Moral Open Text Library Open Address Tag Labrary Ok Cancel If the Bit option is selected in the Data Type drop down list box as shown in the above figure 308 Chapter 10 Print and when the Print when triggered check box is selected the system will print out the contents when the LBO changes to ON When the Print when resumed check box is selected the system will print out the contents when LBO returns to OFF If the Word option is selected in the Data Type drop down list box the following window appears Address HMI E PLE Mo 0 Data Type Word k Trig Function Execute Macrocode W Pop Window O Framel Write Data Add Type LW Hbl PLE Ho Address U Addr Type Address Format ODOL BIN im Attribution Event T rigging r m ER lt mi Frin M On Trig Return to Normal Font 24 k aa Text Color Open Text Library Open Address Tag Labrary Ok Cancel When the Print when triggered check box is selected the system will print out the contents when the value of LWO is less than 0 When the Print when resumed check box is selected the system will print out the contents when LBO resumes normal that is greater than or equal to 0 10 5 Printing Failure Pri
12. Taskbar If a pop up window has such function keys as Window Bar and Minimize Window whenever a window is popped up an icon will appears on taskbar to represent the window Clicking the window icon on the taskbar will put the corresponding window on the top layer of the screen Double click the window s icon will minimize the window and click again will restore the window 177 Chapter 6 Components 6 17 Direct Window ES Direct Window The Direct Window component places a registered window over the current screen The pop up window is displayed in the area of Direct Window component outline Usually the size of Direct Window is set the same as those of pop up window There is no absolute limitation for the maximum number of Direct Window However at run time up to 16 windows can be displayed simultaneously at a time A Direct Window can only be open or closed by the bit register specified by the Reading Address The function key cannot be used to close the window A Direct Window pops up when the bit register is turned ON and the window closes when the bit register is turned OFF Direct Window Reading Address M10 Window Bit state toggle No 20 Switch Reading Address and Output Address are both M10 Press bit state togg Switch Readine Address and Outp Address change te ON and window 2 appears gt Adding a Direct Window 1 Click the direct window icon and drag it to the window the basic attributio
13. Update Operation Area To update the kernel or file system of the embedded OS the user can only select the communication mode of serial port or network port MT4000 series use serial port and MT5000 series use serial port or network port Before updating operation switch the DIP switch 1 on the back of the target screen to ON and DIP switch 2 to OFF After connecting and switching the DIP switch click Write Kernel or Write Rootfs to conduct the update The user can update any one part of the two and doesn t need to update the two parts together all the time PTL a aes rae LES hai if DEn Ge gt A EB ri z iJ A ARAN ae PRINTER Note After the updating OS kernel and root file system operation is conducted the target screen restores to the factory default settings Be cautious on such operation This function is only available for advanced users Caution Make sure the power supply of the panel is good during the OS kernel root file system updating Unpredictable errors may occur if power goes off during downloading The updating operation is necessary only when the embedded OS is permanently damaged and it is strongly recommended that the user conduct this operation with the help of our technician 429 Chapter 16 Use of Setup Chapter 16 Use of Setup The DIP switches on the back of the panel are shown in the following figure iPr ELT INAN oe PRINTER ON JE
14. ig Enter data by customer tailored keypad 6 9 2 Presetting the screen track nodes 151 Chapter 6 Components 1 When LW1 0 LW2 0 2 When LW1 1 LW2 1 3 When LW1 2 LW2 2 4 When LW1 3 LW2 3 6 10 Number Input E POERI The Number Input component displays the current value of a PLC register data and can pop up a small keypad for the user to change the register data If the Trigger Address bit is ON once the number input component area is touched the Numeric Input component will be activated for data entry Use the keypad to enter data to the PLC register designated by Input Address It is a frequently used part for monitoring and changing PLC register data gt Adding a Numeric Input 152 Chapter 6 Components 1 Click the numeric input component icon and drag it to the window the Basic Attribution tab of the component attributions dialogbox appears Data Input Component Attribution Basic Attribution Numeric Data Trigger Address Font Graphic Position Friority Input Address Output Address HMI HMI PLC HMI PLC Addr Type Ly Add oO Addr Type Addr Code Type BIN FormatDDDDD Code Type Format DODOD Word 1 B 3 WordNo E Description MIO Priority Reserved function not used for the time being Input Address The starting address of PLC word register to be displayed and modified by numeric input component Data in the register may be interpreted as BIN or BCD
15. related PLC word address If the value of the word register is 0 the graphic corresponding to state 0 will be displayed If the value equals to 1 the shape corresponding to state 1 will be displayed and so on The corresponding label will also be displayed if the option Use Tag is enabled PLC PLC PLC register register register value is 0 value is 1 value is 2 gt Adding a multi state display component 1 Click the multi state display component icon and drag it to the edit window the Basic Attribution tab of the Component Attribution dialogbox appears 137 Chapter 6 Components Word Display Component Attribution Basic Attribution Multi State Display Tag Graphics Position Friority Input Address e Output Address HMI HMI PLC HMI PLC Addr Type Lw Add OU Addr Type Addr Code Type BIN Foma DODOD Code Type Format DDDDD Word Use Add WoordN ao i Description WLO Priority Reserved function not used for the time being gt Input Address PLC word register address that controls the state shape and label information of the multi state display component Address The address of the word registers corresponding to the multi state display component The usage of register address varies with different PLCs refer to PLC manual for detailed information Code Type BIN or BCD No of Words Select 1 or 2 for input address single word or double word Use Address Tag Whether to use th
16. wordo amp wordo E Description SBO 3 After setting the various properties of the part close the dialog box users can see the part appears in the window Users can drag the icon to adjust the size and position of the part For precise adjustment open the part Component Attribution dialog box and input the value of size and position in the Position tab The procedure of adding a function part is similar with that of the PLC part 5 2 About Part ID ID is a number automatically allocated to a part It is used to differentiate parts on the screen The designer cannot manually designate or change the component ID The ID has two parts a combination of two or three letters indicates the full name or function of that part and a number used as a symbol to distinguish the part from its homogeneous All the letter combinations and their meanings are listed below WLU Part Pa Number WL Multi state Display BL Indicator lamp WL Word Lamp Multi State Display SB Bit setting component SWD Word setting SW Switch 106 Chapter 5 Basic Design of EV5000 MSW Multi state switch FK Function key MV Moving Parts ANI Animation NI Numeric Input ND Numeric Display Tl Text Input TD Text Display BR Bar graph SC Scale IDW Indirect Window DW Direct Window AD Alarm Display TR Trend Curve RCP Recipe data transmission ED Event Display TM Timer OS Oscilloscope SCR Scroll
17. 362 Chapter 14 Connection of eView MT5000 4000 with Common PLCs For other settings refer to related PLC programming software user manual provided by Koyo Electronics Reference website Http Awww automationdirect com Operable address range PLC Address Operable Range Description Type External input X 0 32767 node External output 0 32767 node Internal auxiliary node 0 32767 OOOO Data register Note O indicates octal notation Presently EV5000 does not support some PLC address types They can be translated into the addresses actually supported The operable range in the above table indicates the operable range of the MT5000 4000 touch screen The actual range of the PLC may be broader or narrower than this range Detailed wiring diagram Note KOYO Direct Logic series PLCs cover DLO5 DL105 DL205 DL305 and DL405 series The CPUs of all these series can be connected with the eView MT5000 4000 touch screen through the K sequence serial communication protocol and by the RS 232 RS 422 interface on the CPUs Where DL240 DL250 and DL405 series of PLCs can be connected with the touch screen through data communication modules For related software and hardware settings refer to the technical manuals provided by Koyo Electronics 363 Chapter 14 Connection of eView MT5000 4000 with Common PLCs 1 CPU DLO5 DL105 DL230 DL240 DL250 DL350 DL450 RS232 Port KOYO PLC eView MT5000 4000 touch Dire
18. A deleted macro file cannot be recovered so be cautious on this operation 9 3 Triggering of Macro In the EV5000 macros can be triggered flexibly in multiple modes Flexible use of macro triggering modes can conveniently implement more flexible and powerful functions Presently the EV5000 supports the following macro triggering modes 1 System initialization macro Select the Initialization Macro check box in the HMI Attribution tab shown in the following window The initialization macro will be triggered upon system startup to implement such functions as setting initial values of registers and transferring recipes HMI Attribution Print Setting Serial Port 0 Setting Serial Port 1 Setting HMI Task Bar HMI Extend Attribution ScreenProtect 10 Public Win Attribution Display below the basic windoy TextLab Lan 4 gt Pop Window Attribution Display on the top layer z Default Lan 1 v Upload Key 888888 Save Event Log IV Init Macro B 0 Level Key 888888 Init Addr Init window macro O c 1 Level Key 888888 RecordN Public Window Framel 2Level Key 888888 M Use Buzzer Fast sel Win Frame Cursor Color 2 Function key triggered macro Use the Execute Macrocode function of the function key to trigger macros which is a 297 common triggering mode 3 Timer triggered macro Chapter 9 Macro Use the Execute Macrocode function of the timer to trigger macros The macro can be combined w
19. Detailed wiring diagram 1 PLC setting When the communication is conducted through the auxiliary interface of the programming device no special setting is required When the communication is conducted through the extended communication module VB 232 or VB 485 it is necessary to set the protocol of the extended communication port to Computer Link set the station No to 0 and set the Bits per second to 19200 2 Wiring diagram 2 1 Communication via auxiliary interface of VB programming device eView MT5000 4000 touch VIGOR VB PLC screen Auxiliary interface of COMO COM1 programming device 4 pin JST 2 0 socket 2 2 Communication via VB 232 extended port eView MT5000 4000 VIGOR VB PLC touch screen Auxiliary interface of COMO COM1 programming device 4 pin JST 2 0 socket 2 3 Communication via VB 485 extended port 402 Chapter 14 Connection of eView MT5000 4000 with Common PLCs eView MT5000 4000 touch screen PLC RS 485 interface 9 pin D SUB male connector VIGOR VB PLC VB 485 RS 485 interface 5 pin terminal block wM EMERSON Connection of EMERSON EC20 Series PLC and eView MT5000 4000 Series Human machine Interface EV5000 software setting Recommended Optional Setting Precaution Setting Emerson PLC Type Modbus COM RS232 RS232 RS485 Must be the same as the ee Data Bits Torg port settings of the controller Must be the same as the COM Stop Bits 1or2 port set
20. Download File Path Communication Type IP NULL COM NULL Chapter 17 Networking of MT5000 Series Touch Screens TEM Healer HMI Doo R c documents and settings skinco desktop eng prec 2351 23 pkg USE port PORT BPS NULL NULL BER Select Sector Data File C LOGO File Download Exit Downloading between different touch screens must be conducted via a PC Firstly upload from a touch screen to the PC and then download from the PC to another touch screen 17 1 4 Networking of Multiple Touch Screens with Multiple PLCs 441 Chapter 17 Networking of MT5000 Series Touch Screens A Caution Data reading and modification operations can be performed between different touch screens Configurations can be edited between different touch screens When editing PLC components select corresponding touch screen number and PLC number as shown in the figure below 442 Chapter 17 Networking of MT5000 Series Touch Screens Bit State Setting Component Attribute Basic Attribute Bit State Setting Taz Graphies Position Priority Input Address v Qutput Address HMI HMI PLC o Addr Type Addr Type ae Addr 0 0 Code Type Code Type a Format DOOCOD Word ddr Tag wordo Use Addr Tag Description sB Compile the component select the Offline Simulation mode select the corresponding touch screen number and click Simulate to perform
21. Henu isk Bar The current security level is now 1 Press the Change Window 4 button and the system successfully switches to window 4 as shown in the figure below Nindow 4 Menu wk Bar How to change to a window with lower security level from a window with higher one The register LW9043 is reserved by the system to switch from a higher security level to a lower security level Add a numeric input component in window 0 as shown below 327 Chapter 12 Security Level Data Input Component Attribution Basic Attribution Numeric Data Trigger Address Font Graphics Position Priority Normal input Address Output Address Hal HMO H il HrIO PEL 0 Addr Type Lw 4 Addr Type Uw Addr j Code Type Blt Format DOODO C Code Type EIN Format DOODO word 1 Use Addr Tag Word a Use Addr Tag Description MI Save it to the disk make compilation and then run in offline simulation mode E C o Nindow Current level Input Passyord Change level Menu isk Bar Enter 1 in the Change Level frame but the current level will not change to 1 because it is not permitted to change a window with a lower security level to a window with a higher security level as shown below 328 Chapter 12 Security Level Window Current level Input Password Change level Henu isk Bar Then enter the password 1111 to change the current security level to 1 as shown in the figure bel
22. Human Machine Interface Product Manual Distributed by Anaheim Automation Ine USA Stock in Anaheim Ca 1 800 345 9401 www anaheimautomation com L010679 eView MT5000 MT4000 Series Touch Screen User Manual Contents od a al gl ty aR nrre ree TTT Eee e re RoE NICER ET MPre REID E E Ree TaN Te OPER EE eT TD 4 CHAPTER 1 INSTALLATION OF EV5000 s000sseeesosssssssssssssssssesesosssssossssssscsssesssossssssssssssscsssssesssss 7 he LIN AP TEN ss OO aerate aes asses oars ca ea sneaker ns aecteep ts aes ene 7 1 2 INTERFACE DIAGRAM siaesitiencclanstunhansee Gloss baenii tare den tan sil tenia eth a 9 CHAPTER 2 CREATING A SIMPLE PROJECT 002 ccsssssccccccccccccccscsscssscsccsscsscsscssessees 14 2A NEWAN EMPTY PROJECT cast acatus tatateushcicecuta E a E 14 2 2 ADDINGA SWI CH GOMPONEN TD tesu esesssacnsccus dee S E S EES 20 CHAPTER 3 DESCRIPTION OF THE EV5000 SOFTWARE eeeeeeeeoooosssssssssssesecsoccoscsssssssssssssee 26 321 USER INTEREACE OF BV SOOO a a a a a con 26 3 2 GRAPH ELEMENT WINDOW ssisicilusces cadeubh sure ca bsahcatakcaidaineiai aueatadisleiaa na euh adi ieee iasskushaeteve ius 58 5 St ed oO Oo FFILENINDO W Deneeee ne nr rate tre tamer aa a ive tne mT een a er ae Tee amet ret 62 3 4 PROJECT WINDOW AND PROJECT CONSTRUCT WINDOWSl 0 cccceeseseeeecccccccsssscccccceeeaeeseceeceeees 63 3 5 COMPILE INFORMATION WINDOW ssssssesssssssesesssssseseeressssssorrrrsssseotrroesssseotrtessseetrrrs
23. Normal Input Address H r Output Address HMI PLC HMI HMIO Addr Type LE Addr 9068 Addr Type Code Type BIN Format DDDDD Code Type BIN WordNo 1 Use Addr Tag WordNo 1 Description DWO Lil m3 P LH U la AE F TEI ok z Direct Window Component Attribution SP BMMS ZNZNSZ illl ill Basic Attribution Direct Window Position Window No a a EY U a ee E TEELE smn a a S Ea i i i i Upper 102 H i k 35 S Length 125 4 Save the project and compile it Perform the off line simulation The effect of the project is shown in the following figure 167 Chapter 6 Components 6 13 Text Display Text Display A Text Display component displays the current value of the PLC register data The data is decoded by standard ASCII character table The ASCII code stored in the lower byte is displayed on the left and the one stored in the higher byte is displayed on the right gt Adding a Text Display 1 Click the text display component icon and drag it to the window the basic attribution tab of the component attributions dialogbox appears Text Display Component Attribution Basic Attribution Sen Friority Normal input Address Quito Address Hhil Htl HMI AMO gt PLC Add Type Lw Add 0 Add Type Le Addr Code Type BIN Format 0000 Code Type BIN _ Format DD
24. PLC HM Add Type Ly Add Addr Type Addr Code Type BIN Foma ODODO Code Type Format DODDO Word B WordHa wai Description TRO Priority Reserved function not used for the time being Input Address Specify the PLC word register of the first trend curve the second trend curve corresponds to register at read address 1 and the third curve corresponds to register at read address 2 etc Address The initial address of the word register corresponding to the trend curve component Code Type BIN or BCD No of Words Depend on the number of sampling channels If the number of channels is N 1 lt N lt 16 the No of words is N Use Address Tag Whether to use the address entered in the address tag library For details refer to Section 6 34 Description A reference name not displayed that you assign to the trend curve component 2 Goto the Trend Graphics tab to set related parameters 184 Chapter 6 Components Irend Graph Component Attribute Basic Attribute Trend Graphics Channel cave History Trend Position Type Multiple pac Alt StartfromLe Sam Time 1 PageNum iw Save Time Sarm Plot 10 Channel 1 Control Address Hl FPLC No Addn Type Address CodeTypeWordLen sc HME 1 1 E 1h Format OOOOC E W Rol HME 1 La JU EN 3 Use dd Tag amp BIN p Type Single page or multiple pages If the user selects the single page display mode it will only display the data c
25. Description ADO Priority Reserved function not used for the time being Input Address The Input Address controls the scrolling up and down of the alarm display window All active alarm messages are sorted by time the new alarms are displayed on top and the older ones are put on the bottom If the register value is N then the top N 1 messages will be ignored and the number N message of the order of arrival is placed on the first line of the display window Address The word address corresponding to the alarm display component Code Type BIN or BCD No of Words The default value is 1 for input address Not editable Use Address Tag Whether to use the address entered in the address tag library For details refer to Section 6 34 Description A reference name not displayed that you assign to the alarm display component 2 Go to the Alarm Browse tab as shown in the figure below Alarm Display Component Attribution Basic Attribution Alarm Display Position Column Space 1 Row Spacing Column Spacing The spacing between different rows or columns 3 Click OK and adjust the position and size of the alarm display component 182 Chapter 6 Components Example of an Alarm Display A vectogram SP_0 is used for the background rectangle The vectogram SP_1 indicates a sunken display area Two word setting components SWD_6 SWD_7 are used to increase and decrease the starting lines of the displayed alarm mess
26. HMI attribution dialogbox see chapter 7 and click OK to begin the uploading process A Note The default upload password is 888888 if it has not been set in the HMI attribution dialogbox as the following figure shows f HEI ttribute Serial Fort O Setting HI Task Bar Serial Port 1 Setting HMI Extend Attribute Frint Setting ScreenProtect Public in Attribute TextLab Lan 4 Default Lan H Init window O Framed Public Window 1 Frame Fast sel Win 2 Framee T T Fop Window Attribute Upload Kep 0 Level Kep 1 Level Kep 2 Level Key occ och sis isisis Ls gggoog Display below the basic windoy Display on the top layer hi Save Event Log lrit Addr Record NO Use Buzzer Cursor Color To upload the LOGO file or recipe file select these two options Logo and recipe file are uploaded and stored into the pkg file with the user data in this method 425 Chapter 15 Operation Instructions for EVManager A E Hanazger Communication Set BY Download Operate Communication Type USE port IF MILL PORT HULL re LA k i age Get Version System Operate Upload Section Upload User Data Upload Recipe Upload Set HMI Information User Datalmust choose Logo File l Recipe File Communication Set Communi cation Type E port File name 456 save as type User Data Files pkg Cancel Upload Password Dialog Boz Please input upload passw
27. Operable address range Corresponding PLC software 8000 9999 DDDD does not contain this register Corresponding PLC software word SD_word 8000 9999 DDDD does not contain this register 357 Chapter 14 Connection of eView MT5000 4000 with Common PLCs Detailed wiring diagram 1 CPU MITSUBISHI PLC eView MT5000 4000 touch FX series CPU RS 422 screen interface COMO COM1 8 pin DIN round female connector Pin assignment of 8 pin DIN round female connector 2 Communication module RS232BD MITSUBISHI PLC FX series RS232BD module RS 232 interface 9 pin D SUB female connector eView MT5000 4000 touch screen COM0 COM1 358 Chapter 14 Connection of eView MT5000 4000 with Common PLCs 3 Communication module RS485BD MITSUBISHI PLC eView MT5000 4000 FX series RS485BD touch screen module COMO0 COM1 RS 422 interface 5 pin terminal block Connection of MITSUBISHI Q Series PLC with eView MT5000 4000 Touch Screen MT5 ANS communication cable MITSUBISHI PLC e View MT5000 4000 A3N A1SH series CPU RS232 RS422 ports 25 pin D SUB female connector touch screen EV5000 software setting Recommended i i Optional Setting Precaution Setting Select corresponding MITSUBISHI PLC Type MITSUBISHI Melsec Q PLC type according to Melsec Q different PLCs COMO COM1 RS232 RS485 Must be the same as 7ors the COM port settings of the PLC Data Bits Must be the same as Stop Bits 1 1 or 2 the COM por
28. Slave No Max block package szep ORDOS Max block package size BIT 5 Double click the Siemens S7 200 PLC and set the PLC station No to 2 as shown below PLC Attribute Set the communication parameters of the OMRON PLC settings of COMO as follows Communication mode RS232 Bits per second 9600 data bits 7 parity check even parity stop bits 2 as shown below 433 Chapter 17 Networking of MT5000 Series Touch Screens HEI Attribute Task Far HMI Extend Attribute Print Setting Serial Port O Setting cerial Port 1 Setting PLE Communication Time Out 3 Baud Fate 9600 Protocol Time Out 1 AD Data Bit T Frotocol Time Out 2 3 Parity even Max interval of block packi ORDS Stop Bit 2 Max interval of block pack BITS Slave No Max block package szet ORDS Max block package size BIT 5 Right click on HMIO and select the Edit Configuration menu to enter configuration window 0 as shown below 434 Chapter 17 Networking of MT5000 Series Touch Screens Halo CutiD Ctrl x POEN E FTT I copyiC Ctrl C Delete Y Paste P Ctrl Multi Copy Exchange Serials Ports a Init Start Window Import Recipe Ca re Attribute Editing configuration Place a bit setting component set the PLC No to 0 and select S7 200 address for address type Bit State Setting Component Attribute Basic Attribute Bit tate Setting Tag Graphics Position Friority
29. The keyboard has four lines with 10 keys on each line We set the size of one key to be 25X25 the size of the whole keyboard is 250X 100 For displaying the content just input add a line 250 pixels wide and 25 pixels high So the complete keyboard is 250 pixels wide and 125 pixels high In this example we use window 4 as the keyboard window Use the window attribution dialogbox to change the size of the window to 250 X 100 164 Chapter 6 Components Window Attribution No Safe Level Lowest Print page gt 7 Disable Map Keyboard Filled Color B E kground b Transparence 0 Bottom Window 1 None Frame Pop Window Type i a rj Tracking C M g Fae a c e Add function keys on window 4 and designate the ASCII code for the key In the following figure we put a function key and configure it for inputting a for details about function key refer to section 6 Function Key Component Attribution x Function Key Trigger Addr Tag Graphics Position Switch Window Change O Framel Excute Marco Map Keyboard e Black andiy hite r E Multicolor Text Pen T Magnify Multiple 10 E Indicator 7 ER P Trend Graphics Pen Color Print Pe E Al Bimap N f Curent t Horizontal Pen Width 1 fe Al Vectorfaraph C Cear Next Vertical D Background Go to the Tag tab set the tag for the key as a Go to Graphics tab and select a graphic for the
30. The network interface of the PC is directly connected to the touch screen via a cross over cable Then it is connected to the touch screen through the HUB via a straight through cable 3 If a user has enabled the firewall an alert box will appear to ask which port the user wants to access Select Enable and download can be made If all ports are disabled disable the firewall 4 The touch screen is directly connected to the network interface of the PC and the IP address of the PC should be changed to an address different from that of the touch screen If the IP address of the touch screen is 192 168 0 253 then IP address of the PC should be changed to 192 168 0 X The first three digits should be the same and the last digit should be different 2 Downloading through Serial port To use serial port as the downloading method select Serial Port in the list as the following figure shows 80 Chapter 3 Description of the eV5000 Software Compile t Download Option Compile W Compress Bitmap L Size gt 1024 Download Download Device i IF Address Port Screen Grid Space Ke 20 Serial Port No Select a serial port you want to use Make sure the port you designate is available and the downloading cable is connected properly The user can contact with Stepservo Ltd or local distributor to get the serial downloading cable Tools T Library D Window HelpfH Pl Compile Ctrl F Ca Downloadi
31. Trigger Address Font Graphics Position Priority Normal Input Address Htl HMO PLC 0 ddr 0 Format DOODODODO Add Type Aral Code Type BIN Use Addr Tag Word Description TH Output Address Hel HMI Addr Type Uw Code Type BIN wordo 0 Addr i Format DODOD Use Addr Tag Create a numeric input component to display and modify each group of recipe data 283 Chapter 8 Recipe Data Data Input Component Attribution Basic Attribution Numeric Data Trigger Address Font Graphics Position Friority Mormal input Address om Output Address Hi HMIO PLC 0 Hbl HID PLC D Addr Type Fwi Addr Addi Type Uw Ada 0 Code Type BIN Format DODDDD Code Type BIN Format OODOG Word 1 Use Addr Tag Word a Use Addr Tag Description MI Create a text input component and a numeric input component to display and modify the recipe data on the PLC Text Input Component Attribution Basic Attribution Trigger Address Font Graphics Position Priority Nomal Input ddes A jj SS Dito Addr Hil HMI PLC O HhAl HMIO PLC 0 Addr Type 4 Add 100 Addr Type Lw Addr 0 Code Type BIN Fama DOOD Code Type BIN Format DDDOCO word 4 Use Addr Tag WhordN a Use Addr Tag Description The nane of PLC Recipe Data Data Input Component Attribution Basic Attribution Numeric Data Trigger Address Font Graphics Position Priority Normal Input
32. input method usedjcharacter displayed in the current Chinese window 317 Chapter 11 Reserved Register Addresses of the System _ to turn the window with Chinese characters input method used to displayed the currently entered gt characters Used scroll in The value indicates the starting line of the input area notepad component Contents of online switching text base the value indicates text base index e Display contrast level contrast level Used by MT4000 series to display contrast level 11 3 Nonvolatile Local Word LW10000 10256 TC Address 10000 10001 10002 10003 10004 10005 10006 RTC second BIN code value range 0 59 R W RTC minute BIN code value range 0 59 R W RTC hour BIN code value range 0 23 R W RTC date BIN code value range 0 31 R W RTC month BIN code value range 0 12 R W RTC year BIN code value range 0 9999 R W RTC day BIN code value range 0 6 R W Note on RTC A user can display system time with corresponding component with its value writable However the user has to make sure its value must be within the value range For example the second cannot be written as 78 BIN If it is written as 78 RTC will continue the sequence as 78 79 80 which may result in unpredictable errors 318 Chapter 11 Reserved Register Addresses of the System Mapping of other system parameters Note changes on these registers will take effect after restarti
33. of the screen and the upper value should not exceed the length For a screen of the resolution of 320 240 the maxim of left is 319 and the maxim of upper is 239 Width is the width of the part shown in the screen and Length is the length of it Also the maxim of these two inputboxes should not exceed the size of the screen 8 Click OK to close the dialog box The component in place is shown as follows SvwoO 9 Select File gt Save on the menubar then select the menu Tools gt Compile If no error occurs during the compilation the project is completed 10 Select Tools gt Offline Simulation gt Simulation Thus you can view the switch you have added to the project You may click it to switch between its ON OFF state which acts as the same as a real switch as shown in the following figure Nenu Task B 24 11 12 13 14 15 Chapter 2 Making a Simple Project If you have set the IP address see page 20 you may use the indirect online simulation Select Tools Indirect Online Simulation You may use your mouse to control the switch on the screen of your PC and it can be found that the output point QO of the PLC can be controlled You may use the output of the PLC to change over between the ON OFF state of the switch See chapter 3 for detail of simulation Select Tools gt Download After download reset the touch panel and you can control the switch by touchin
34. or contains special characters like blank and backslash 3 Variable name cannot be any reserved keyword of C language In the above example set the properties of the LWO_R as follows Bacro Code Variable Variable Lit_k HMI Data Type signed sh FLU Ho Address Li Address Word Length 1 Format DDDDI R Y MEE Code Type BIN OE Cancel In the window select signed short for Data Type R for R W LW for Address Type and 0 for Address Click OK and the variable is registered in the Macrocode Variable Window Parameters Data type Param name PLC Station Reg Addre No oF Word OptMode Address signed shart L R i Livy i Note While compiling macrocodes all referenced external data must be registered in the Macrocode Variable Window in advance Use the same method to set LW1_R and set the address to LW1 The properties of LW2_W are set as follows 292 Chapter 9 Macro Macro Code Variable arable Mie a Hl Data Type double PLE No O A write Address Type Lw word Length 4 Address Fore Coding Type BIN Cancel A Caution Select double for Data Type and the Word Length changes to 4 automatically that is the variable occupies LW2 LW5 After setting the variable window is shown as follows Data type Param name PLC Station Reg Addre Address Mo of Word OptMode signed short L OR T Livy g 1 Read signed short Livi FR
35. perform corresponding print operations 0 Print meter O A O N gt Print text Print trend graph Print all bitmaps Print all vectograms Print background color 10 3 Report Output The background component PLC Control gt Report Output uses a word address to control the printout of a designated window The printout of the screen starts when the entered value of the word address is a valid window number Upon the completion of printout the value of the word address changes to 0 307 Chapter 10 Print PLC control object No REG Address Contralevent PLC Control Hh HMIO PLC No 0 Addr Type Lw Address 0 Code Type BIN VFormat DD Control Type Macro Number Buen fddiess gq tahay Ok Cincel As shown in the above figure if the value of LWO is set to 4 the contents in window 4 will be printed out Upon the completion of printout the LWO automatically returns to 0 To print out a window by the Report Output function the system will not switch to the window to be printed The print format is also controlled by LW9054 For control functions refer to the description given earlier in this document 10 4 Event Printout When the user enters events in the Event Entry background component the user can set trigger printing The corresponding contents will be printed out when the set condition is triggered Address q e Trig Function Hbl Execute Macrocode
36. to a lower level for example level 0 Refer to related part in Chapter 12 Security Level W 9050 Base Window number Number of base windows of the touch screen are saved here The salve machine can maintain the same base window with the master machine according to the word using PLC control component R 9054 Report output format 0 Text amp meter amp trend graph 1 Text amp meter amp trend graph amp vectogram excluding templates 2 Text amp meter amp trend graph amp bitmaps 3 Text amp meter amp trend graph amp bitmaps amp vectograms excluding templates 4 All R W a of each item in Size used by the recipe memory to store each item of 9058 9059 Size of event entry Size used by the recipe memory to store the event entry mda message base including management message R 9060 9075 Numeric input amp text LW9075 includes the recently entered data Numeric a eee 9100 Change address 9100 stores the window number 9101 Applicable only to the 9101 stores the offset of PLC address external PLC When LW9100 is set to 11 and LW9101 is set to 20 the PLC word addresses of all components in window 11 will be added with an offset of 20 that is D10 changing to event entry message the event entry message base R D30 and all bit addresses will be added with an offset of 20 16 320 that is M20 changing to M340 9150 In the case of Pinyin The value of LW9150 is the serial number of the Chinese
37. B indicates bit code and the value range is 0 15 The operable range in the above table indicates the operable range of the MT5000 4000 touch screen The actual range of the PLC may be broader or narrower than this range The operable range in the above table indicates the operable range of the MT5000 4000 touch screen The actual range of the PLC may be broader or narrower than this range Detailed wiring diagram Note The CPU of CPM1 CPM1A series does not provide standard serial ports and has to be configured with OMRON CPM1 CIF01 RS232 communication adapters or OMRON CPM1 CIF 11 RS422 communication adapters to establish the link with the touch screen through the Host Link The CPU of CPM2A PLC provides RS 232 interface and it can be connected with the touch screen directly it can also be configured with CPM1 CIF0O1 RS232 communication adapters or OMRON CPM1 CIF11 RS422 communication adapters to establish a link For hardware descriptions refer to manuals provided by OMRON 1 CPU OMRON PLC CPM2A CPU RS 232 MT5000 4000 touch screen interface COMO0 COM1 9 pin D SUB female connector 2 Communication module CPM1 CIFO1 OMRON PLC CPM1 CIFO1 adapter RS232 interface 9 pin D SUB female connector MT5000 4000 touch screen COM0 COM1 344 Chapter 14 Connection of eView MT5000 4000 with Common PLCs Note Set the mode setting switch of the CPM1 CIF0O1 adapters to the Host Link communication mode 3 Communic
38. BLU 4 Switch to the Switch tab Set the Switch Type Select Toggle Switch from the list as shown in the following figure Bit setting Component Attribution Basic Attribution Hit State Setting Taz Graphics Position 5 Switch to the Tag tab select Use Tag enter the texts corresponding to state 0 and 1 in 22 Chapter 2 Making a Simple Project Content and select the label color You can modify the alignment mode font size and color of the labels Bit setting Component Attribution Basic Attribution Bit State Setting Tag Graphics Position W UseTag Language Chinese PR China D Tag List Switch to the Graphics tab and select the Use Vector Graphics check box Select a wanted shape Here the switch shown in the following figure is selected For the making of the vectogram refer to Chapter 5 Bit State Setting Component Attribute Basic Attribute Bit State Setting Tag Graphics Position NUB_CTRL_BAROOT vg Import Graphics Graphics State Cancel Switch to the Position tab There are four inputboxes showing the position and size of the part Left inputbox holds the horizontal position of the upper left corner of the part Upper inputbox holds the vertical position of that corner the unit of these inputboxes is pixel The origin of the screen is the upper left corner So the Left value should not exceed the width 23 Chapter 2 Making a Simple Project
39. Bar Timer and so on For the usage of them please refer to Chapter 6 A cati n In the Graph element Window right click and select Small Icon in the shortcut menu the icons will be displayed in the form of smaller icon which can save the window area for small displays as shown in the following figure PLC Farts yp Bit State Setting Bit State Lamp Bik Stake Switch Direct Window 4 iMultiple State Setting LJ Multiple State Display u Multiple State Switch Scroll Bar Se Moving Component Ted Animation A Alarm Display Trend Curve 2 XYP lat ul Bar Picture Se Meter ai Recipe Data ce Event Display Indirect Window T Number Display TE Text Display e Number Input a Text Input 2 Oscillograph a video Mote Book 3 3 Project File Window Files related to shape library and HMI panels are displayed in the Project Files Window so there are two branches in the tree structure HMI and Graphic Library HMI The HMI folder contains whe file which is corresponding to the HMI icon in the Project Window For the first HMI panel HMIO the file is HMIO whe for HMI1 the filename is HMI1 whe If there are three HMI panels in the project there are three whe files HMIO whe HMI1 whe and HMI2 whe Double click the whe file will expand it macrocode file and recipe file attached to the HMI panel will appear 62 Chapter 3 Description of the eV5000 Software Project files window aa D HMI 0 AMID whe 5 _ Yect
40. Bit State Lamp Component Attribute Basic Attribute Bit State Lamp Tag Graphics Position W UseTag Language English USA amp Use Text Library Tag List Text Library MultiLine Align Cancel Color Select the color of the label contents The available colors are shown in the following figure Besides the color listed here the user can use Custom option to customize a desirable color Bit State Lamp Component Attribute Eg Basic Attribute Bit State Lamp Tag Graphics Position W UseTag Language English USA Use Text Library T ag List li Text Library MultiLine Align i OFF Left 16 ae 1 ON Left 16 nucle Default Color EREEHEEE BESET ee BH EEO ODORA E CO O DO BOO WN L Custom Color 4 Go to the Shape tab Select vectogram or bitmap to display bit address ON and OFF states 129 Chapter 6 Components Bit State Lamp Component Attribute Basic Attribute Bit State Lamp Tag Graphics Position W Use Vector Graphics Use Bitmap Use Picture Init Size Import Graphics Graphics State U ad Go to the Position tab adjust the position and size of the lamp if necessary Click the OK key to complete the setting of the lamp component 6 2 Bit Setting Component os Bit State Setting The bit setting component defines a touch area which sets a specified bit to a certain status ON or
41. C and an Enable end in the RS 485 while they are optional in the RS 422 The Enable end is used to control the connection disconnection between the transmission driver and the transmission line When the Enable end is active the transmission driver is in a high impedance state that is the third state a state different from the logic 1 and logic 0 as shown in the figure below EN ABLE B TERE AREA Ey XYRS422 HE AERA S XIRS485 i Corresponding specifications are made for the receivers AA and BB are connected with balanced twisted pairs between the transmission end and the receiving end When the level between AB at 338 Chapter 13 Serial Communication the receiving end is greater than 200 mV it outputs positive logic level when the value is less than 200 mV it outputs positive logic level The level range received by the receiver on the balanced cable is from 200 mV to 6V as shown in the figure below 6V 200mv 200mv RS 422 standard stands for Electrical Characteristics of Balanced Voltage Digital Interface Circuits which defines the characteristics of the interface circuits The following figure shows a typical 4 wire RS 422 interface In fact it has another signal ground cable and totally 5 cables Since the receiver adopts high input impedance and the transmission driver has high driving capability than RS 232 interfa
42. CPUs can be connected through the extended Cnet module Please note that different PLC types must be set in the touch screen software when different PLC CPUs are adopted When Cnet protocol is used pay attention to the setting of communication protocols For setting methods refer to operating instructions provided by LG Industrial Systems 1 CPU K10S1 K10S K30S K60S K80S K200S K300S K1000S RS232 LG Master K PLC Master K series CPU RS 232 interface 9 pin D SUB female connector eView MT5000 4000 touch screen COMO0 COM1 Note When K10S1 is used the Bits per second in the touch screen software must be set to 9600 When K10S K30S K60S K100S are used the PLC type must be set to LG K60S and the Bits per second to 9600 When K80S K200S K300S K1000S are used the PLC type must be set to LG MASTER K300S CPU and the Bits per second to 38400 Where K10S1 K10S provide 6 pin mini DIN round interface E 5 4i T513 a y 6 Pin Mini DIN Interface 388 Chapter 14 Connection of eView MT5000 4000 with Common PLCs 2 CPU K80S K200S K300S K1000S Cnet RS232 LG Master K PLC Master K series CPU RS 232 interface 9 pin D SUB female connector eView MT5000 4000 touch screen COMO0 COM1 Note When the Cnet communication mode of K80S K200S K300S K1000S is used set the PLC type to LG MASTER K Cnet The setting of communication parameters must be consistent with that of the touch screen 3 CPU LG Master
43. D SUB female connector 9 TXDA erx Sn xB E oy a eee EE a rr ac ee oe 4 RTS 5 CTS 11 RTS 12 CTS eView MT5000 4000 touch screen COM0 COM1 Note For detailed software and hardware settings refer to the technical manuals provided by Matsushita Electric 14 10 DELTA PLC A ELTA Delta Connection of DELTA DVP Series PLC with eView MT5000 4000 Touch Screen EV5000 software setting Recommended i i i Optional Setting Precaution Setting PLC m DELTA DVP COMO COM1 RS232 RS485 Must be the same as the re Data Bits Torg port settings of the PLC Chapter 14 Connection of eView MT5000 4000 with Common PLCs Must be the same as the COM Stop Bits 1 1 or 2 port settings of the PLC 9600 19200 38400 Must be the same as the COM Bits per Second 9600 57600 115200 port settings of the PLC Even parity odd Must be the same as the COM Parity Even parity parity none port settings of the PLC Must be the same as the COM PLC Station No 1 0 255 port settings of the PLC PLC software setting Please note that the setting of the PLC station No must be consistent with that of the touch screen software Please refer to related PLC programming software user manual of Delta Reference website Http www deltadriver com Operable address range PLC Address Operable Description Range 09999 9999 External Extemalinputnode node 0 9999 ra oo eE External output n
44. D21 If the return value function is disabled the system will not return the number 12 to D21 R W 9055 Disconnect PLC Clear this bit will make all commands for writing into the PLC invalid When this bit is set ON all writing operations can be performed It serves as a logic switch for connecting and disconnecting the panel with PLC set ON the touch function is diabled and it would not respond to any touch operation It serves as a logic switch for the touch function 9060 Keypad control bit When a user enables the numeric input or text input the pop up of the function the MT5000 4000 set this bit to ON and the direct keypad is controlled window including a keypad will appear After successful by the component injentry or pressing ESC this bit will be set to OFF The user the left part of the can use this bit to control the keypad After successful entry or cancellation the keypad window will close automatically For details of the keypad control bit refer to the notes following the table R Keypad control bit For usage of LB9060 LB9069 LB9080 and LB9081 refer the pop up of the to the notes following the table R 9061 keypad is controlled by the component in the left part of the window 9062 Keypad control bit R 9056 Disconnect Touch _ Clear this bit will enable the touch function When this bit is 313 Chapter 11 Reserved Register Addresses of the System _ the pop up of the keypad is contr
45. Epeon Stylus C65 i Print Humber iw Print Time if Print Extend Timeld h m iw Print Date if Print Extend D ateflyypy mm dd Printer Select the printer model Print No If this check box is selected a serial number will be printed out with the event message The serial number will be increased with each new event Print Time If this check box is selected the print time will be printed out with the event 268 Chapter 8 Recipe Data message Print Extend Time Determine whether to print out the time in the format of day hour minute Print Date Determine whether to print out the print date Print Extension Date Determine whether to print out the date in the format of YYYY MM DD Check Window Errors Determine whether to check errors in the window during printing For detailed print settings and methods refer to Chapter 10 7 5 COM Settings HMI Attribution Hbl Task Bar Hl Extend Attribution Print Setting Serial Port 0 Setting Seral Port 1 Setting Type eae PLC Communication Time Out Baud Rate 9600 Protocol Time Out 1 Word Length Protocol Time Out 2 Parity none Max interval of block pack MfORDS Stop Bit 1 Max interval of Block pack BIT 5S Slave Mo Max block package szew ORDS Mas block package size BlTS The MT5000 4000 series panels provide two serial ports so the user has to configure COMO and COM1 separately The two serial ports can be used simultaneously connecting with t
46. F S Win T C Lamp Frame Color mc un Workspace Color WY T C workspace Calor Moco W cow ButtondreaSizewidth 140 Height 32 Font 24 Fort 24 If Include Fast Selection Window labled as Include F S Window is selected click the Fast 122 Chapter 5 Basic Design of EV5000 Selection window button in the left a Fast Selection window appears This window provides some function keys placed by the user for switching to different windows Since the Fast Selection window is always displayed in all screens it can be invoked anytime To switch to a specific window touch the function key pointing to the destination window in this way the process of monotonous window search can be avoided iin om Nenu Task The taskbar can include a maximum of 16 window icons at the same time Double click the Minimize icon and the related pop up window will be minimized clicking this icon again will retrieve the minimized window to original state Pop up window with the function keys Minimize Window and Window Bar can be minimized to the taskbar Refer to the description in the Components and Function keys part in Chapter 6 gt Procedure of setting task buttons In the project window double click HMI to show the HMI Attribution setting dialog box Open the Taskbar tab check the Display Taskbar option The user can set the position of the task buttons to the right or to the left The label content of the taskbuttons can be chang
47. HMI adapter PLC HHR TEWE FRSA GAA PLC BHA TEREE Fest ie NH lo 040987 DDDO srMMAA 1 040957 Sp AA Qs 040957 DDDO sma 040957 DDDO shiii 0 4095 7 DDDO ARHHT A Alb ag BOTI H DB10 DB60 DDDD EFTA Ld A 7 0 8 192 7 TED 384 Chapter 14 Connection of eView MT5000 4000 with Common PLCs Note 1 D indicates decimal notation O indicates octal notation and the value range is 0 7 Please note that VB10 is DB10 and the start bit of the VB10 address must be an even number 2 If itis necessary to operate the double word variable select 2 in the corresponding component address properties dialog box 3 The operable range in the above table indicates the operable range of the MT5000 4000 touch screen The actual range of the PLC may be broader or narrower than this range Detailed wiring diagram Note SIEMENS S 7 300 series PLCs cover such models as CPU312 CPU313 CPU314 CPU315 CPU316 and CPU318 All of them can be connected with the eView touch screen through the HMI adapter or PC adapter provided by SIEMENS Presently MT5000 series of touch screens do not support CP340 and CP341 communication modules of SIEMENS When the PLC communicates with S7 300 it is necessary to create the data block DB10 MT5000 series exchange data with the S7 300 through the DB10 When using an adapter pay attention to the setting of the DIP switch and it is necessary to define the data format as byte when creat
48. Lamp B CPU Lamp Color Hide F S window Hide Task Bar MW Include larmLamp alarm Lamp Color Menu Task Bar W Include F 5 Wir i T C Lamp Frame Color mc un forkepace Color a T C Workspace Color E Color W Color Buthond reaeS ize width 100 Height 20 Font 16 Font 16 Show Hide FastSelct Menu isk Bar TP A Window Alarm Lamp Show Hide Task Bar Touch Lamp CPU Lamp Display taskbar Determine whether to display the taskbar If this check box is selected the taskbar shown in the above figure will be displayed in the lowermost part of the screen Use touch lamp When the screen is touched the lamp will blink If this check box is selected the touch screen lamp will be displayed in the right part of the taskbar as shown in the above figure The touch lamp can blink different colors when you touch the three types of panel area workspace area un workspace area and undefined area The color will indicate which kinds of area you are touching help you touch the correct position Include CPU lamp The CPU lamp is a bar graph showing the percentage of CPU resources currently being used If this check box is selected the CPU lamp will be displayed in the right part of the taskbar as shown in the above figure Include alarm lamp Alarm lamp is a bar graph showing the percentage of the number of current alarms to the total number of alarms entered in the alarm message If this check box is 263 Chapter 8 Recipe Dat
49. Mormmal Output Address HF HO PLC Input Address HF HMO PLC Add Type CIO bi ddr Type LB Addr Code Type EIN Code Type BIN Format DODD wordo 7 Use Addr Tag wordo Use Add Tag Description SB0 Place a bit setting component set the PLC No to 1 and select OMRON address for address type 435 Chapter 17 Networking of MT5000 Series Touch Screens Bit State Setting Component Attribute Pasic Attribute Bit State Setting Taz Graphics Position Priority Normal Input Address Output Address Htl HMI Htl HMIO PLC i 4 Addn Type CIO bi Add Type W_bit Addr jp Code Type BIN Code Type BIN omatDCDDO DDO wordo Use Addr Tag wordo Use Addr Tag Description SB To set other components select corresponding PLC numbers 17 1 2 Networking of One Touch Screen with Multiple PLCs A Caution 1 When a touch screen is connected with multiple PLCs the communication mode can only be RS 485 instead of RS 232 The same COM port must be connected with same PLCs or the PLCs supporting the same protocol As shown in the figure below COM1 is connected with 2 Siemens S7 200 PLCs and COMO is connected with 3 MODBUS RTU PLCs or 3 PLCs supporting the MODBUS RTU protocol for example LG MODBUS RTU EMERSON MODBUS RTU Schneider MODBUS RTU However during configuration these three PLCs must select
50. NY AEE ON MNT NE AEE ON ENT ME ANE URNS RE ANTE Me MINEITS SU AST ne LEN 305 g A SY 1 Od 2 ad TR aad i 0 Gece neta ate ne crake Rae eaters ORS eee a eS A ten RARE Rte oe ee Na 306 UOC REPORTON 0 igreraeee erence terrae a Sone OOP a one Orn ren ann On Ton we Te Oe 307 104 EVENT PRINTOUT sacon a aula ane stores a a E a a a 308 105 PRINTING AL URE a e a ued ee sc asd a eo sued es eee 309 CHAPTER 11 RESERVED REGISTER ADDRESSES OF THE SYSTEM ccccsssssees 311 The eOCAL BIT ALB REGISTERS RESERVE Derete OnE Ra ONNEN ON 311 11 2 LOCAL WORD LW REGISTERS RESERVED ccssssssssssccssssssssccassccssssssssceassccssessssscesseessssenees 316 11 3 NONVOLATILE LOCAL WORD LW10000 10256 o oo cccecccccccccccesssssseeeeeceeessssseeeeeeeeeeens 318 CHAPTER 12 SECURITY l VE L NaRa 321 CHAPTER 13 SERIAL COMMUNICATION W 0 0 0 ccccccssssccccsssccccsssccccssccccccccsccscsccccsceccces 335 13 1 SERIAL COMMUNICATION sssessssssenssseseernsscnsstnsstresttrot rset t aoc eec e n een acta eee ean eae 335 eView MT5000 MT4000 Series Touch Screen User Manual Contents ee Ra ta A 336 Fe AG He he PA ae ed eee PR er MESON NRT AASE SEEEN NUESTRO CUNT rt NUTINI NUIT ead NOREEN CERT RE SSPE ae 338 ee eS or Ng ko ee a ae ae ene a ene RT A Re O EA E E E A N A E E ar e 340 CHAPTER 14 CONNECTION OF EVIEW MT5000 4000 WITH COMMON PLCG 343 ges AE Ys BG Se I eee eee Renee ane See en aE name ON tee oS Ae eR RCE RE
51. Numeric Input Part Text Input part and so on Functional Components Parts for special functions are listed here including Function Key Part Scale Part Alarm Bar Part and Timer Part Usage 1 2 Connector If you select RS232 or RS485 click Serial icon drag it to the Project Window If you want to use the Ethernet connection click the Ethernet icon then drag it to the Project Window When dragging the icon will appear like a wire After dropping it the wire will stay in the Project Window HMI 59 Chapter 3 Description of the eV5000 Software Identify the model of the actual HMI panel you are currently using click the corresponding icon and drag it to the Project Window Caution Make sure that the selected HMI model is consistent with your hardware model 3 PLC Identify the model of PLC currently being used click the corresponding icon and drag it to the Project Window After selecting the PLC HMI and communication connection connect them properly Drag the PLC and HMI icon to make the wire ends attached to the ports automatically Click and drag the wire ends towards the ports will yield the same result To make sure the connection is established drag the HMI or PLC icon the properly attached wire ends will move with the mouse Note If there isn t any PLC or HMI in the Project Window the Project File Window and the Project Construct Window will be blank as shown in the followin
52. PLCs Note D indicates decimal notation The operable range in the above table indicates the operable range of the PLC Some register addresses are reserved by the system and cannot be used For details refer to Keyence KV1000 user manual Detailed wiring diagram eView MT5000 4000 touch screen KV CPU Port PLC RS 232 interface RJ 12 port 9 pin D SUB male connector Connection of KEYENCE KV 16DT Series PLC with MT5000 4000 Touch Screen EV5000 software setting Recommended Optional Setting Precaution Setting KEYENCE PLC Type KV 16DT RS232 RS232 RS485 Must be the same as the COM Data Bits 7ors port settings of the controller Must be the same as the COM Stop Bits 1 1 or 2 port settings of the controller 9600 19200 38400 Must be the same as the COM Bits per Second 9600 57600 115200 port settings of the controller Even parity odd Must be the same as the COM Parity Even parity parity none port settings of the controller Must be the same as the COM PLC Station No port settings of the controller Controller software setting Refer to keyence KV 16DT user manual 407 Chapter 14 Connection of eView MT5000 4000 with Common PLCs Reference website http china keyence com Operable address range Operable Bit Word PLC Address Type Format Description Range Bt Connie corset oze oo Rey Bt Tier contact 0289 a Wor comecen oze 000 Gauiermenowy Woa comerme oze 000 C
53. Puta Number Input Component in window 0 and set the necessary parameters see relative sections for details 4 Save and compile the project conduct the off line simulation When the Numeric Input component is activated the function keys FK_0 FK_14 become the keypad for numeric input 232 Chapter 6 Components Bac Henu wk Bar 6 29 10 Printer function Function Key Component Attribution Function Kep Trigger Addr Tag Graphics Position Switch window Change O Framel Escute Marco Keyboard Func 9 etsy 4a Map Keyboard Mapping Kev iE Print Color Black and White C Message Board i e IY Text Magnify Multiple 10 B I Indicator f Tool Pen W Trend Graphics Pen Color Print Page gt P M All Bitmap Curent Horizontal Penwidh 1 W All VectorGraph Clear C Next C Vertical Refer to Chapter 10 Print 6 30 Timer i o 7 a The Timer is a timing device and will execute corresponding function when the timing time arrives It can implement such function as executing macro code setting parameters and transferring data Various Functions of Timer 233 1 Chapter 6 Components Click the Timer component icon and drag it to the window and the Timer Component Attribution dialog box appears Click the Timer tab Timer Component Attribution Timer Timer Function Basic Attribution Trigger Address Trigger Mode Aine Htl E xe
54. Serial Port1 Setting tab set the parameters of COM1 settings in this window If the PLC is connected to COMO please modify the parameters of COMO as shown in the following figure HMI Attribute Hal Print Setting Type Baud Rate 19200 Data Bit z Parity Stop Bit Slave Ho Task Bar HMI Extend Attribute Seral Port 0 Setting Seral Port 1 Setting PLE Communication Time Out E Frotocol Time Out 1 100 Protacal Time Out 2 3 Max interval of block packi ORDS blas interval of Block pack BIT 5S Max black package szet ORDS Max block package size BIT 5 In accordance with your PLC connection set the Type to be RS232 RS485 4W or RS485 2W and set other properties like Baud Rate Data Bits Parity and Stop Bits If you are not an advanced user do not change the default settings in the right column 11 Select File gt Save on the menu to save the project 18 Chapter 2 Making a Simple Project 12 Select Tools gt Compile or press the Compile icon on the toolbar After the compilation is completed a message box Compilation completed appears in the Compilation Information Window as shown in the following figure Message winodow Compilation Done Error 13 Select Tools gt offline Simulation or press the Offline Simulation icon on the toolbar as shown in the following figure Tools T LibraryiD Windows HelpfH Cl Compile ClrL F Ca Download D Chrl D j Offl
55. Setting D100 9999 The word setting component is also a 134 Chapter 6 Components touch area that when activated writes a word to the designated PLC word register gt Adding a word setting component 1 Click the word setting component icon in the PLC parts window and drag it to the configuration edit window the Basic Attributions tab of the Component Attribution dialogbox appears Word Setting Component Attribution Basic Attribution Multi State Setting Tag Graphics Position Priority Input Address Output Address Hl PLC Htl HMIO PLC 0 Addr Type Addr Addr Type ES 0 Code Type Format DDDDOD Code Type BIN Foma DOCOD Word g WordNo 1 f U Description oWwDO gt Output Address Address of the PLC word register controlled by the word setting component Address Type The type of the word register the prefix for word address varies with PLC type Address The address of the PLC word register corresponding to the word setting component Code Type BIN or BCD No of Words Select 1 or 2 for word output address single word or double word Use Address Tag Whether to use the address entered in the address tag library For details refer to Section 6 34 Description A reference name not displayed that you assign to the word setting component 2 Go to the Multi State Setting tab and select the setting modes for word setting component 135 Chapter 6 Components Word S
56. Word Lowest Word 0 Word High byte Low byte High byte Low byte High byte Low byte High byte Low byte a e o e E ea When entering the character ABC ABC Highest word Word Word 2 Word Word 1 Word Lowest Word 0 Word High byte Low byte High byte Low byte High byte Low byte High byte Low byte A a a a S C L 2 When the Font Align parameter is set to Right When entering the character A Highest word Word Word 2 Word Word 1 Word Lowest Word 0 Word ray S a a E E When entering the character AB AB Highest word Word Word 2 Word Word 1 Word Lowest Word 0 Word 162 Chapter 6 Components Highest word Word Word 2 Word Word 1 Word Lowest Word 0 Word a a a a a Some users would like to display the contents on the keypad when entering data To implement this function a text input component can be placed in the keypad to read the corresponding data between LW9060 and LW9075 lt An example of the usage for LW9060 LW9075 is shown as follows 1 Create a new project and add a text input component on window 0 Set the parameters as shown in the figures below notice that the input component has 5 words for storage so the user can input up to 10 characters a AAAAAAAAAA l Text Input Component Attribution Basic Attribution Tigger Address Font Graphics Position Priority Normal Output Address HMO PLC G
57. _ENTEROO1 vg Ge EV_ENTEROOZ vg mm a ee Sm EV _ENTEROOS vg EW ENTEROO4 vq Project construct window Be 111111 HMI 2 HMO ii PLC offi PLC1 0 fP PLCO 0 Display Scroll Bar Fast Selection Function Parts Common indor Project Database Mouse x 2 y 5 llaa 118 Chapter 5 Basic Design of EV5000 Use of bitmaps 1 Select a component you want it to use a bitmap open the component attribution dialog box and switch to the Shape tab Bitmap Component Attribute Graphics Position m W Use Bitmap qg bg Use Picture Init Size Import Graphics 2 Select the Use Bitmap option Select the bg file to be used the preview of the bg is shown on the right Click OK to close the dialog box Import Existing Bitmap Graphics 1 You may import a bg file like the import of a vg file Click the E icon to show the importing dialogbox Select Bitmap for the Import Type You can import bg files used in other projects they are stored in the vg folder under the directory of the project folder or bg files provided by us visit our website to download the bg file package 119 Chapter 5 Basic Design of EV5000 Import Graphics Bos a 0 Common Files ag eV5000_UNICODE_ENY evyew1l p 9 driver lib C SYSTEM 45 VE 5 alarm arr ow C balloon 5 button lamp C others O pipe port i lt T
58. an even number so the parity bit is 1 When the parity check is adopted 1 bit error can be detected but 2 bit or high errors cannot be detected Furthermore detected errors cannot be corrected Upon detection of an error it will request for retransmission However since it is easy to implement it is widely applied To implement communication between two parties the settings of data bit start bit stop bit bits per second and parity check for serial ports of both parties must be set to be the same The eView MT5000 4000 and most PLCs support only asynchronous transfer mode Our description is also based on asynchronous transfer mode If you are interested in synchronous transfer mode please refer to related documents Certainly entity interfaces are required as transmission media to send or receive data in asynchronous transfer mode This is the difference between RS 232 RS 422 and RS 485 as detailed respectively below 13 2 RS 232 Presently RS 232 is the most widely applied serial interface in PC and communication industry RS 232 is defined as a single ended standard to extend communication distance in low rate serial communication RS 232 adopts an Unbalanced Data Transmission UDT interface under which the voltage of a single cable relative to a grounding signal cable is used to indicate the logic status Mark or Space A typical connection method is shown as follows Pinout of a typical RS 232
59. attributes can be moved by touching the title bar then touching a another position on the screen the window is moved to that place o FR 1 lt Status 1 Touch the title bar of the popup window 2 Touch on the postition where the window you want to move Shoukd move to it wil be displayed there Minimize Window If a pop up window on the screen has a function key set to perform Minimize Window function in it when the function key is pressed the window will be minimized to a window icon on the taskbar at the bottom of the screen A touch on the window icon will maximize the window again A comprehensive example of function key related to window manipunation In this section we provide a detailed example containing all the function related to window 225 Chapter 6 Components manipunation After finishing the application project under the following instructions the user can simulate this project to observe the behavior of these function keys Also the user can get a better understanding of some basic conception about window such as basic window fast select window common window and task bar 1 Create a new project and save it Select any type of PLC for this project doesn t use any PLC register 2 The default project wizard has five windows basic window 0 window 1 with two direct window components for the default number input keypad window 2 as the default fast selection window window 3 as the default
60. bar BG Bitmap graph VG Vector graph XY XY Plot MT Meter AB Alarm Bar NP Note Pad 5 3 Additional Note Description If necessary each component can be added with a note This note only plays the function as a descriptive remark for the current program and can serve as future reference which facilitates in the understanding of print results This note does not have any substantial influence upon the program 107 Chapter 5 Basic Design of EV5000 Bit setting Component Attribution Pasic Attribution Bit State Setting Tag Graphics Position Friority Input Address Output Address HMI PLC HMI HMIO PLO Addr 0 Format ODOOD Addr Format ODODO Addr Type Addr Type LE Code Type Code Type Wwhordh a Use Addr Tag 5 4 Input Output Address of PLC Parts related to PLC registers during runtime must be designated with proper PLC I O address to ensure the program run correctly The correct address type and range are different for different PLCs As shown in the following figure PLCO is a MODBUS device while PLC1 is a SIEMENS product so their addresses are different The program will automatically list the correct address type and range according to the PLC type Bit State Switch Component Attribute Graphics Fosition Basic Attribute Bit State Switch Tag Pricrity Output Address Input Address Htl HMIO PLC HMIO PLC 0 Add Type LB Add 0 Format OOOOD Use
61. be broader or narrower than this range Detailed wiring diagram Note Allen Bradley SLC500 series PLCs includes SLC5 01 SLC5 02 SLC5 03 SLC5 04 and SLC5 05 series of CPUs Where SLC5 01 and SLC5 02 series do not provide RS 232 interface and cannot communication with the touch screen directly through the DF1 protocol Instead they have to be configured with communication module 1747 KE and connected with the touch screen through the DF1 interface on the module SLC5 03 SLC5 04 and SLC5 05 can be connected with 3 2 Chapter 14 Connection of eView MT5000 4000 with Common PLCs the touch screen through the DF1 interface on the CPUs In addition all types of CPUs can be connected with the eView touch screen through the DH485 interface on the CPUs For related software and hardware settings refer to the technical manuals provided by ROCKWELL 1 CPU SLC5 03 SLC5 04 SLC5 05 CPU DF1 Port Allen Bradley PLC eView MT5000 4000 touch SLC500 series CPU screen RS 232 interface COMO COM1 9 pin D SUB female connector 2 CPU SLC5 01 SLC5 02 SLC5 03 SLC5 04 SLC5 05 CPU DH485 Port Allen Bradley PLC SLC500 series CPU DH485 interface RJ 45 female connector OS 1 TX RX RJ45 Pin 1 eView MT5000 4000 touch screen COM0 COM1 D GND Pin assignment of 8 pin RJ 45 female connector 373 Chapter 14 Connection of eView MT5000 4000 with Common PLCs 3 Communication module 1747 KE DF1 Port Allen Bradley P
62. can achieve the best operation effect In the meantime please keep the manual well for future references in commissioning maintenance examination and repair If you have any doubts or problems during the use of the product please feel free to contact the Technical Support Department of our company without delay Our product will surely better meet your requirements and the application of our product will boost your business career Any suggestions and comments on our products are welcome If you have eView MT5000 MT4000 Series Touch Screen User Manual Preface any suggestions comments or complaints on our product please contact us immediately at any time we provide 7 days 24 hours service and we will make quick and satisfactory response as soon as possible The following sections present a detailed description of our product Chapter 1 Installation of EV5000 Chapter 1 Installation of EV5000 1 1 Installing EV5000 Minimum Computer Hardware Requirement Recommended Configuration CPU INTEL Pentium II or better Memory 128 MB or higher 512 MB is recommended Hard disk 2 5 GB or above at least a free disk space over 100 MB 40G or above is recommended CD ROM One 4X CD ROM optical drive Monitor Supporting monitor with a resolution of 800 600 and 16 bit color or above recommended 1024x768 32 bit true color or above Mouse and keypad One for each RS 232 COM port At least one port available for serial c
63. case Tighten the clamping screws in an even pattern until the unit is secured in the panel Do not over tighten mounting clamps Specifications Note To seal to NEMA 4 specifications all supplied mounting clamps must be used and panel cannot flex more than 0 010 2 1 3 Environmental Considerations i The MT5000 series are to be used indoors as built in LCD displays Make sure that the displays are installed correctly and that operating limits are followed See Hardware Specifications Do not operate the unit in areas subject to explosion hazards due to flammable gases vapors or dusts The unit should not be installed where fast temperature variations and or high humidity are present This will cause condensation of water in the device and cause damage to the unit 2 2 Power Connections Make sure all local and national electrical standards are met when installing the unit For details refer to a local dealer 2 2 1 Power Requirements AN Input voltage 24V 15 Current Starting current 5300L lt 1A 5400T lt 1 2A Power Supply 5500T lt 1 2A Working current 5300L lt 500mA 5400T lt 600mA 5500T lt 600mA If the display does not come on within 2 seconds of Fusing power up turn off the power immediately An internal fuse Requirement will prevent damage if the polarity of the DC power is incorrect Check wiring to ensure proper connections and try to power up again 451 Caution H
64. data at the same time in one second so as to display the curve effect of the 0 5S sampling cycle Save Time If this check box is selected the Time box in the Control Address frame is available 212 Chapter 6 Components Sampling Plot Number of sampling points for one curve displayed on the graph No of Pages When the Type is set to Multiple Pages this box is available Channel Number of tracks to be displayed corresponding to the number of word addresses of the PLC data One word register corresponds to one track Hold Keep The bit address that controls the start or stop of the oscillogram in other words the data sampling stops when the Hold bit is turned ON and the sampling continues and oscillogram will be dynamically displayed when the Hold bit is turned OFF Roll Changing the value of this register can implement scroll display of the graph Each incremental unit can move the oscillogram leftward rightward by one sampling point For example create two numeric setting components with their register addresses the same as the address of the register controlling the scrolling Set one component to addition and the other to deduction In this way it can turn the oscillogram to the previous or next page Time When the Save Time check box is selected the Time box in the lower part of the window will be activated It includes 12 word registers used to save the time of the latest sampling point The registers are r
65. double word address so the drivers of these PLCs will convert between double word address used in the PLC and word address used in the panel The user has to pay special attention to the operation instructions for PLC drivers 125 Chapter 6 Components 6 1 Indicator Lamp o _ Bit State Lamp An indicator lamp displays the ON or OFF status of a designated PLC bit address If the bit status is OFF the shape representing state 0 will be displayed If the bit status is ON the shape representing state 1 will be displayed The corresponding label will also be displayed if Use Label is enabled The figure below shows the appearance of an BL_ OFF OM 1 Click the Indicator Lamp icon and drag it to the configuration edit window the component indicator lamp component gt Adding an indicator lamp attribution dialogbox shows the fist tab is the Basic Attribution hit State Lamp Component Attribute Basic Attibute Bit State Lamp Tag Graphics Position Priority Input Address e Output Address HMI HIO PLC HMI Addr Type LE Add Addr Type Code Type Format DODOL Code Type wordMo Use ddr Tag WordNo Description gt Priority Reserved function not used for the time being gt Input Address Bit address of the PLC register that controls the lamp state shape and label information HMI If your project contains more than one HMI panel select which HMI panel the
66. downloading method related parameters displayed in gray boxes there are some options the users can set and should pay attention to 82 Chapter 3 Description of the eV5000 Software Select Section The files to be downloaded to the panel are of three types User Data File Recipe File and Logo File The user can select any one of these files to be downloaded which makes the downloading more flexible and avoid wasting time for unnecessary download The following paragraphs give an introduction of these files User Data File The configuration project files including all the data of the configuration windows and images are packaged into a single user data file after being compiled The extension of the file type is pkg Only after the pkg file has been downloaded the panel can run the configuration project designed by the user Recipe File This option is only available when there is a recipe file imported into the project and affiliated to an HMI panel The recipe file is stored in one SRAM chip on the mainboard of the panel with a backup battery to keep the data when the power is off LOGO File Logo is the first picture displayed during the power on stage when the embedded system has not been booted So the picture is different from other pictures displayed in the configuration windows By editing the initial window the user can create his own logo file whose expansion is logo When the user want to change the current logo he must edi
67. for indirect online simulation Pin Pin assignment of 9 pin male D SUB COMO Designations PLC PLC PLC RS 485 PC RS 232 Signal RS 485 RS 232 4 wire Cay 243 45 2 wire Cay 689 La Signal ground RS 485 Rx RS485B aS n es a kea 8 TxD_ TxD_PC i a RS 232 Tx ee dailies ea MT4000 RS232 485 422 PC PLC RS232 485 422 PC RS232 RX A 1 1 MT 4000 to RxD PLC 2 2 PC TxDPLC 3 3 MT4000_PC ae Tx 4 4 Wiring GND 5 5 Diagram 2 3 3 USB Connection The USB port on the back of the case is the USB Slave device used to connect with a PC for configuration downloading and HMI setting It cannot be used to connect with peripheral equipment such as a USB printer Connection USB Slave port can be connected with a PC through a general USB cable Port Function The port is only used to download user configuration program to the HMI and to 476 Appendix Ill Hardware Overview set HMI system parameters Port Diagram 2 3 4 Connection with Printer The parallel printer port on the back of the case can be used to connect with various parallel port printers on the market The full series of MT4000 products support printout function The printing port will export data when the printing component works Dnia The MT4000 series touch screens support multiple printers with parallel ports an
68. graph component In the Basic Attribution tab set Input Address to LWO In the Trend Graph tab set Sampling Time to 1 second No of Sampling Points to 21 and Channel to 4 as shown in the figure below 186 Chapter 6 Components Trend Graph Component Attribution Basic Attribution Trend Graphics Channel Position Type Singe Alt StartfromLe Sam Time 1 PageNum E Sam Plat 21 Channel 4 k Control Address HMI FPLC No Add Type Address CodeType WwordLen 7 Keep amc 0 it 7 100 Format DOODO E E E In the Channel tab set the color of four track lines respectively to blue red green and purple Set the minimum value to 0 and the maximum values respectively to 500 1000 1500 and 2000 Trend Graph Component Attribution Basic Attribution Trend Graphics Channel Position signed int signed int signed int signed int Adjust the size of the trend graph component Add two scale components one is horizontal and the other is vertical and each is divided into 20 equal scales Place them together to form a network and place the trend graph component on the top Please note that the size of these three components 2 scale components and 1 trend graph must be the same and they must be overlapped with each other as shown in the figure below 187 Chapter 6 Components FET Add four numeric display components to display the values of LWO LW1 LW2 and LW3 respectively Add four timer component
69. in the alarm bar area in scrolling way like a banner moving from the right to the left The messages must be linked to some bit node addresses The messages are scrolled from right to left in order of triggering Alarms continue to scroll until they switch to the inactive state Alarm messages must be entered in the Alarm Entry 207 Chapter 6 Components Alarm Information Logon component in advance This component is used only to display alarm message To enter alarm messages the Alarm Entry component is required gt Adding an alarm bar 1 Click the Alarm Bar component icon and drag it to the window the basic attribution tab of the component appears Alarm Bar Component Attribution Alarm Bat Position Moving Step Pinel Moving Rate 10 100 MilliSecond Description ABU For the moving step and moving speed the higher the value is the quicker the scrolling speed will be Moving Step Distance of a step in each moving operation in the unit of pixels Bigger step distance means faster movement Moving Speed Time interval between two moving operations in the unit of 100 ms Description A reference name not displayed that you assign to the alarm display component Example of placing an alarm bar 1 Create a new project 2 Click the Alarm Information Logon component icon to enter the Alarm List Add two alarm messages as shown below 208 Chapter 6 Components Alarm object list LB is off
70. interface PC Compatible is shown as follows 336 Chapter 13 Serial Communication Carrier Detect CD ae 4 Received Data RD Data receiving signal cable oa Transmitted Data TD Data transmission signal cable Data Terminal Ready DTR Signal Ground Grounding signal cable Ring Indicator RI Pinout of the eView MT5000 4000 RS232 is shown as follows CE SY Gk ic Received Data RXD Data receiving signal cable Transmitted Data TXD Data transmission signal cable Signal Ground Grounding signal cable Clear To Send CTS CTS and RTS work only on Request To Send RTS some PLCs Only COM1 supports CTS and RTS If without CTS or RTS the typical connection between the eView 5000 4000 PLC RS 232 and PLC is shown as follows GND e e GND Since RS 232 adopts the full duplex transmission mode it has independent transmission TD and receiving RD signal cables and a grounding signal cable The purpose of CTS and RTS is intended for handshaking control between the eView MT5000 4000 and the PLC The CTS or RTS of only a few PLCs must be controlled by the eView MT5000 4000 The length of RS 232 connection cable is often a question The standard length shall not exceed 50 feet 1 foot 30 cm or the capacitance shall not exceed 2500 pF Based on capacitance standard the typical capacitance of a UTP CAT 5 connection cable is 17 pf feet and the maximum 337 Chapte
71. interface Controller 9 pin D SUB male connector RS232 COM port 4 TXD 4 RXD 5 GND 416 Chapter 15 Operation Instructions for EVManager Chapter 15 Operation Instructions for EVManager The EVManager management and configuration tool is shown in the following figure This chapter introduces the usage of this tool rr stepservo m i E VSO00 exe ka EvManager exe i Uninstall 15 1 Introduction to EVManager EVManager is the management and configuration tool for the EV5000 software The EVManager tool consists of three operation processing modules download upload and system operate The structural diagram is shown as follows EVManager System Operate Download Upload Select Start gt Programs gt stepservo gt ev5000 gt EVManager the EVManager dialog box appears as shown below 417 Chapter 15 Operation Instructions for EVManager Sa EVMa nager Communication Set By Communication Type Nettork Spe A IP 255 255 255 255 oma TS S System Operate Serial Wo HULL Sat Download Section LOGO Show Set Download User Data Show LOGO Download Recipe O UnShow LOGO Download LOGO The section below will give a detailed description of different modules of the EVManager 15 2 Download Operate Download processing is mainly used for downloading files from a PC to the HMI panel Communication parameters must be properly set before
72. l port settings of the controller Must be the same as the COM Stop Bits 1 port settings of the controller Must be the same as the COM Bits per Second 9600 9600 19200 port settings of the controller Must be the same as the COM Parity Even parity Even parity port settings of the controller Controller software setting Refer to user manuals provided by BAUMULLER Operable address range 413 Chapter 14 Connection of eView MT5000 4000 with Common PLCs PLC Bit Word Address Operable Range Description Type DB BIT 0 00 255 0f DDDH Bit type Note D indicates decimal notation H indicates hexadecimal notation the value range is 0 F This is the address of the controller When using the touch screen pay attention to the rules for use For details refer to the description below BIT for example DB2_ BIT write DB2_ BIT 0 F for the equipment address of the touch screen WORD for example DB2 write DB2 11 for the equipment address of the touch screen Detailed wiring diagram Baumuller controller MT5000 4000 touch screen RS 485 port PLC RS 232 485 port 9 pin D SUB male connector 9 pin D SUB female connector 14 20 Kinco ECOSTEP CONTROLLER Connection of Kinco ECOSTEP CONTROLLER with MT5000 4000 Touch Screen EV5000 software setting Recommended Optional Precaution E Setting Must be the same as the A Data Bits l port settings of the controller Must be the same as the COM Stop Bits 1 1 port settings o
73. left to right from right to left from top to bottom from bottom to top Background Picture The background image to be used by the scroll bar including such options as Not Use Use Bitmap and Use Vectogram If you select the Use Bitmap or Use Vectogram option select a desirable bitmap or vectogram in the Image drop down list box At the same time you can select the corresponding State No for the bitmap or vectogram Adjusting Knob Image The adjusting button image to be used for scrolling images including such options as Not Use Use Bitmap and Use Vectogram If you select the Use Bitmap or Use Vectogram option select a desirable bitmap or vectogram in the Image drop down list box At the same time you can select the corresponding State No for the bitmap or vectogram Click OK and adjust the position and size of the scroll bar component 216 Chapter 6 Components Example of Using the Scroll Bar Add a scroll bar component to the multi page trend graph described in Section 6 20 2 Set the output address to LW100 consistent with the scrolling address of the trend graph HMI0 HMI HMIO PLC 0 Addr Type LW AddrType E Ader 100 Code Type BIN Fomat DDDDD Code Type BIN Format DDDDD WordNo Use Addr Tag WordNo 3 F Use Addr Tag Description SCRO Select the background image and the adjusting button image Scrollbar Component Attribution x Basic Attribution Scroll Bar Position Index Length Direc
74. maximum of three bottom windows When a base window is invoked the window number ranges from 0 to 3 65535 the touch panel will show all parts in the window In the meantime if the window has a bottom window and all parts in the bottom window will be displayed also All the touchable parts such as bit state setting function keys and so on defined in the bottom window are also valid in the current window The common window is also displayed with all parts of it valid if it has been invoked by taskbar button The maxim number of windows in a project is 65535 including all three types of windows A project can only have one fast selection window however the function key Change Fast Selection Window can be used to switch over to another window and assign that one to be the current fast selection window For details please refer to Section 6 29 Function Key After creating a new blank project it has a default start window Normally this window is numbered 0 to change the number please change it in the HMI Properties dialog box in the project edit window In general a project contains multiple windows The valid window number ranges from 0 to 65535 By default Window 1 and Window 2 are the common window and fast selection window of a project respectively To change the default fast selection window and common window double click the HMI to modify the Touch Screen Extended Properties as shown in the following figure
75. message board Block Cleanout Clean out the contents in a selected area in the message board 2 Pen Color Set the color of the brush as shown below Function Key Component Attribution Function Key Trigger Addr Tag Graphics Position Switch Window Change 0 Framefl Excute Marco Keyboard Func Enter d eean iis C Print M Color Black and White 9 TIELT f Multicolor E Text Tool Clear Block Magnify Mutiple gg 7 Indicator P Trend Graphics Pen Color Color Print Pai E F a sae 7 All Bitmap F All VectorGraph Pen Width Default Color god Harz aay m a vertical M Background ZRA Bright green Es ton Color 3 Pen Width Select the width of the pen with the value range of 1 8 the number 1 indicates the thinnest brush and the number 8 indicates the thickest brush as shown below C Tool Pen bi C Tool Fen C Pen Color Fen Color Pen widhi 1 EA Pen Wid 8 al Clear Clear 4 Clear Screen Clear all contents in the message board 220 Chapter 6 Components Example of using Message Board 1 Create a new project 2 We take window 0 as the message board window for example You can also select other window as the message board window Just drag the message board component to window 0 3 Set the properties of the message board component attribution dialog box as shown in the figure below Message Board Component Attribution M
76. mode 347 Chapter 14 Connection of eView MT5000 4000 with Common PLCs 3 Communication module CPM1 CIF11 OMRON PLC CPM1 CIF11 adapter RS 422 interface 5 pin terminal block eView MT5000 4000 touch screen COMO0 COM1 4 Communication module CPM1H SCB41 OMRON PLC eView MT5000 4000 touch CPM1H SCB41 communication screen module COMO0 COM 1 RS 232 interface 9 pin D SUB female connector OMRON PLC eView MT5000 4000 touch CPM1H SCB41 communication screen module COM0 COM1 RS 422 interface 9 pin D SUB female connector 348 Chapter 14 Connection of eView MT5000 4000 with Common PLCs Note Only CQM1H CPU51 61 support SCB41 communication module For hardware settings refer to the technical manuals provided by OMRON Connection of OMRON C200H HS ALPHA Series PLC with eView MT5000 4000 Touch Screen EV5000 software setting retail tance PLC PLC Type OMRON OMRON a RS232 RS485 Must be the same as the Data Bits Torg COM port settings of the PLC Must be the same as the COM port settings of the PLC Bits per Bane 9600 19200 38400 Must be the same as the Second 57600 115200 COM port settings of the PLC Even parity odd Must be the same as the Parity Even parity parity none COM port settings of the PLC PLC Station T Must be the same as the No COM port settings of the PLC PLC software setting Stop Bits 1 or 2 Set the communication protocol of the COM port to Ho
77. no response Meaning of the three groups of digits followed the message HMI No PLC station No Serial port No PLC response error PLC response error PLC responds an unexpected message which may be caused by read or write command Check whether the PLC is correctly configured Socket Connect Error Network connection error Check whether the IP address port number and PLC communication parameters are correctly configured Macro Code Error xxxx macro No Programming error with macros so it encounters infinite loop or execution timeout Please check the programming code of the macro The number followed is the macro number System error System error an internal error with the touch screen Print error Print error not connected with the printer or print error Server Error Server error 446 Appendix II Troubleshooting Appendix Il Troubleshooting The following is the method for removing the PLC no response and PLC response error fault The flow chart is shown below PLC no response Y4 Check whether PLC type is N correct Whether System Parameters gt PLC Type setting is correct Check whether the connection is N Refer to Chapter 14 correct Check baud rate parity bit data bit stop bit RS 232 or RS 485 refer to Chapter 14 Check whether PLC station No is correct Refer to Chapter 14 Check whether PLC address type and range are correct N Refer to the contents related
78. not used for the time being Input Address Read Address The word address that controls state and label of the Animation component in the PLC Read Address 1 is the word register address that controls the position of the Animation component Data in the register may be interpreted as BIN or BCD format refer to Multi State Display component The No of Words is restricted to 2 Address The lower word register address corresponding to the animation component Code Type BIN or BCD No of Words It is restricted to 2 for input address Use Address Tag Whether to use the address entered in the address tag library For details refer to Section 6 34 149 Chapter 6 Components Description A reference name not displayed that you assign to the animation component 4 Go to the Animation tab Animation Component Attribution Basic Attribution Animation Tag Graphics Moving Mode List Add Node Insert Mode Delete Node Shift Up Shift Dorr Gize Width 32 Height 32 State Num D No of States Select the total number of states for the animation component This determines the number of states of vectograms or bitmaps that will be displayed along the predetermined path Add Node Add a new moving node to the end of the current predetermined path Insert Node Insert a new moving node after the moving node being selected Delete Node Delete the selected moving node Shift Up move the selected node to
79. of the items in the menu correspond to each other which are as follows in turn Text Library fe MP TA TA Edit an Initial window Address tag ra Import data from recipe Alarm Inforamation Logon dd macrocode Event Information Logon Import a graphic file PLC controller Create a new graphic Text Library Stores text tags Address tags Stores address tags Alarm Information Logon Enter alarm messages Event Information Logon Enter event messages PLC Control Adds PLC control components New Graphics Creates a vectogram or a bitmap Import Graph Library Imports a vectogram or a bitmap Add Macrocode Adds a macrocode Import Recipe Data File Import a Recipe data file Edit Intitial Window Click this button to switch the window to the startup screen edit window where you can edit the initial display window upon the power on startup of the HMI panel as shown in the following figure 44 Chapter 3 Description of the eV5000 Software Graph element window Connector HMI PEE PLC Farts Bit State Bit State Lamp Setting LOH Bit Skate Direct Window L Switch T The default initial window is the logo of Kinco Electric Ltd Line style toolbar As shown in the following figure the contents of the items in the menu correspond to each other in turn Line a aa Arrow Style 6 Dashed Line NArrow Style 5 Dotted Line rrow Style 4 Dashed L
80. of the multi state display component is linked to a unique value of the designated PLC word register When the register value equals to one of the Map Values in the mapping list the multi state display component will display the corresponding state Since the multiple state switch component can write and read the register when the switch is set to a new state the corresponding map value will be written to the designated word register The mapping detail is listed in the data mapping list the user can view and edit the mapping relationship between state numbers and register values Go to the Label tab Fill in text to denote states Go to the Shape tab Click the vectogram or bitmap to display the register states and represent the touch area 5 Go to the Position tab and adjust the position and size of the multi state switch component if necessary 6 Click OK to complete the setting of the multi state switch component 6 7 XY Plot Z NRN XY plot is a curve which shows the relationship between two variables in a vivid way Two neighbouring word registers form a pair The lower register contains the value representing the X axis while the higher one corresponds to the Y axis Such a pair of registers represents a sampling point A curve consists multiple smapling points must use the same number of register pairs For example Suppose an XY plot component containing M channels each chanel contains N sampling points on each page For this X
81. panel will light up in each communication Do no insert or pull out the Shielded cables must be used for long lengths or cables run in an cable while the power is on electrically noisy environment Do not run cables next to AC power lines or near sources of electrical noise 454 Appendix Ill Hardware Overview Be sure that the cable ends have been inserted all of the way into mating connectors and are secure Pin assignment of the 9 pin male D SUB COMO This port is used to Pin Designations connect the MT5000 series touch screens and provides RS 232 485 422 COMO port controller 43521 9 67 6 Note This port is used for MT5000 programming and debugging at the same time Signal PLC PLC PC RS 232 RS 485 RS 485 RS 232 4 wire 2 wire Rx Taia ke 485 SA O ke har ere _ ud S a a kA w pen O o s ow swo o o Aar _ RxD_ RxD_PC RS 232 Rx a pare TxD __ TxD_PC RS 232 Tx TE e a Pin assignment of the 9 pin female D SUB COM1 This port is used to Pin connect the MT5000 series touch screens and provides RS 232 port 4 3 2 1 controller Designations peeled Pin assignment of this port is basically the same as COMO The only COM1 difference is that COMO is connected with the RS 232 interface of the PC to serve as the hardware flow control signal for PLC 232 connection Pin Signal PLC RS 485 PLC RS 485 PLC 4 wire 2 wire RS 232 455
82. parity odd Must be the same as the Parity None parity none COM port settings of the PLC 371 Chapter 14 Connection of eView MT5000 4000 with Common PLCs PLC Station j Adopt the recommended No value for DF1 protocol Note If the DF1 communication protocol is selected the DF1 in the PLC communication parameters must be set to full duplex mode check mode set to CRC and hardware handshaking disabled It is not required to set PLC station No If the DH485 communication protocol is selected the PLC station No must be set and the human machine station No must be different from the PLC station No PLC software setting Please refer to related PLC programming software user manual of ROCKWELL Reference website HTTP www AB com Operable address range PLE Address Type Operable Format Description o oa D0 0D Exemal output node C uv f oa oD Setvalue resistor ot C ev 0258 000 Actual vale eater of C5PV 0 254 DDD Actual value register of 0 254 DDD Floating data register C5SV 0 254 DDD Set value register of N7 10 11 12 13 14 1 0 254 DDD Data register Note 1 D indicates decimal notation and the DD after the bracket indicate the value range of 0 15 When the address is less than 10 add a 0 before the number For example write 8 as 08 2 The operable range in the above table indicates the operable range of the MT5000 4000 touch screen The actual range of the PLC may
83. range PLC Address Operable Bit Word Description Type Range D E 0 0 127 F 0 127 F DDDH Input output node node 0 0 63 F DDH ae register 0 0 127 F DDDH General register na 0 0 127 F DDDH Holding node 0 255 DDD Timing register 0 0 15 F Special register namm ee et ee Twos Exes oe o Garret voa woa or 000 Gwerrepor we Ko or ooo roenan word F_word 0 15 Special register word 0 255 DDD Timer counter register 0 2047 DDDD General register 409 Chapter 14 Connection of eView MT5000 4000 with Common PLCs word SRo f osn ooo Sect eiter Doa Rowa or f ooo mals Doa cow 0 63 00 ereraa Doa Moe or f ooo General egitor SV_Dword 0 255 DDD Timer counter register Dword PV_Dword 0 255 Timer counter register 0 2047 DDDD General register SR_Dword 0 511 DDD Special register Note D indicates decimal notation H indicates hexadecimal notation and the value range is 0 F The operable range in the above table indicates the operable range of the MT5000 4000 touch screen The actual range of the PLC may be broader or narrower than this range Detailed wiring diagram MT5000 4000 touch screen OEMAX PLC series CPU PLC RS 232 interface RS 232 interface 9 pin D SUB male connector 9 pin D SUB female connector 14 17 ABB 07KR51 PLC Connection of ABB 07KR51 Series PLC with MT5000 4000 Touch Screen EV5000 software
84. settings without the need of manual settings by the user Note In communication parameter settings of Micrologix PLC set DF 1 to the full duplex mode and set it to be free of hardware handshake signals PLC software setting Please refer to related PLC programming software user manual of ROCKWELL Reference website HTTP www AB com Operable address range Operable a PLC Address Type Description Range 0 4096 DDD DD External input node a w 0 4096 DDD DD External output node 369 Chapter 14 Connection of eView MT5000 4000 with Common PLCs rev 288 o setae gir orimer ew om 000 eaeoe css o oo seta gio ofcouner om oo aaava rite ofcounter 0 254 DDD Floating data register double word N7 10 11 12 13 14 15 0 254 DDD Data register Note 1 D indicates decimal notation and the DD after the bracket indicate the value range of 0 15 When the address is less than 10 add a 0 before the number For example write 8 as 08 2 The operable range in the above table indicates the operable range of the MT5000 4000 touch screen The actual range of the PLC may be broader or narrower than this range Detailed wiring diagram Note Allen Bradley Micrologix series PLCs include three series of Micrologix1000 Micrologix1200 and Microligix1500 All of them can be connected with the eView MT5000 4000 touch screen through the serial port on their respective CPUs and by the DF1 serial communicati
85. text input component Code Type BIN or BCD No of Words 1 16 consecutive word registers can be selected for storing the characters Use Address Tag Whether to use the address entered in the address tag library For details refer to Section 6 34 Description A reference name not displayed that you assign to the text input component Go to the Trigger Address tab Enter the trigger address which enables the text input component Using LB9000 will make the text input component always enabled Text Input Component Attribution Basic Attribution Trigger Address Font Graphics Position HMI T PLC No sd Add Type LB g Address S000 Format ODODO Go to the Font tab Set the attributes of display data Refer to the Numeric input component Go to the Graphics tab Select vectogram or bitmap to display the state Click OK key to complete the setting and place the text input component on an appropriate position 161 Chapter 6 Components Note on the Storage Mode of Text Input In this example the text input component uses 4 words for 8 characters 1 When the Font Align parameter is set to Left When entering the character A 4 Highest word Word Word 2 Word Word 1 Word Lowest Word 0 Word High byte Low byte High byte Low byte High byte Low byte High byte Low byte A a S a A A A AB When entering the character AB Highest word Word Word 2 Word Word 1
86. the PLC may be broader or narrower than this range Detailed wiring diagram Note NAIS FP series PLCs cover FPO FP1 FP2 FP2SH FP10SH and FP3 series All of them can be connected with the eView MT5000 4000 series touch screens through the programming interface or communication port on their respective CPUs For detailed hardware settings refer to the technical manuals provided by Matsushita Electric 1 CPU RS232 NAIS FP PLC FPO FP2 FP2SH FPM CPU programming interface Tool Port eView MT5000 4000 touch screen COMO COM1 5 pin DIN round female connector 5 Pin Mini DIN Connector 392 Chapter 14 Connection of eView MT5000 4000 with Common PLCs eView MT5000 4000 touch screen COM0 COM1 NAIS FP PLC FPO CPU RS232 COM port 3 pin terminal block Note In the FPO series only FRO CxxCxx models support RS 232 interfaces eView MT5000 4000 touch NAIS FP PLC screen FP1 FP2 FP2SH FP10SH CPU COMO0 COM 1 RS232 COM port Note In the FP1 series only FP1 CxxC models support 9 pin RS 232 interfaces The tool port of the FP10SH can also be used to connect with the touch screen The wiring method is shown in the above figure 2 CPU RS422 485 eView MT5000 4000 touch NAIS FP PLC screen FP1 CPU RS422 COM0 COM1 programming interface Round Hirose 8 Pin Port Chapter 14 Connection of eView MT5000 4000 with Common PLCs ON Hirose 8 Pin Port NAIS FP PLC FP3 CPU RS422 programming interface 15 pin
87. the following codes define MAX_X 260 Maximum displacement along X axis define MAX_Y 180 Maximum displacement along Y axis define MIN X 0 Minimum displacement along X axis define MIN_Y 0 Minimum displacement along Y axis 299 Chapter 9 int MacroEntry direction 0 increase 1 decrease if direction_x_r decrease lw1_w lIw1_r speed x if lw1_r lt MIN_X Iw1_w MIN_X Prevent out of bounds direction x w 0 Change direction else increase Iw1_w Iw1_r speed x if lw1_r gt MAX_X lw1_ w MAX X direction x w 1 if direction_y_r decrease Iw2_w Iw2_r speed y if Ilw2_r lt MIN_Y lw2 w MIN_Y direction _y w 0 else lw2_w lw2_r speed_y if Iw2_r gt MAX_Y lw2_w MAX Y 300 Macro Chapter 9 Macro direction y w 1 return O Finally add a timer component as set below Timer Component Attribution Timer Timer Function Basic Attribution Trigger Address Trigger Mode Fai Hl Exe Cycle 1 00m PLC No Response Mode Immediate Address Type Response State gfi Address Repeat Times 0 Select Execute Macrocode in the Timer Function tab and then select the compiled macrocode Upon completion the configuration interface is shown as follows l Aa D A Accelerate W decelerate owl Sw D4 ByvD5 T Accelerate decelerate THO SWiOo OWN Run the macro and perform offline simula
88. the position before the previous one shift Down move the selected node to the position after the next one Size of Graphics the size of the graphic representing the moving object Node 0 1 2 3 Select a designated track node Point O is the start node point 1 is the second node and so on The total number of moving nodes depends on the number of moving nodes placed on the screen when X Y corresponds to the coordinate position of the moving nodes where you can edit the coordinate position of each node 5 Go to the Tag tab If you want to use tags for different state check Use Tag and Fill in text to be displayed 6 Go to the Graphics tab Select a vectogram or bitmap to represent moving objects the selected graphic must have more states than the number of state of the animation component 7 Click OK to complete the setting 150 Chapter 6 Components Read Data Assignment Read Address Object state Read Address 1 Position number on the path The following is an example showing how to use the animation component 6 9 1 Adding an animation component The settings are as follows Read data LW1 BIN format state control LW2 BIN format position control No of states 4 Number of positions 4 Selection of state graph State 0 State 1 State 2 State 3 stateD state 1 State State 3 Display current reading value F Touch the part area to activate the data input DGE FEE EE
89. to 300 Since LW9000 indicates the offset of the index address RWIO displays the data of RW300 address as shown below 278 Chapter 8 Recipe Data Then enter the text data QWERTYUIOP in the 4x100 text box and click the Upload key The RWIO displays the same data as the 4x100 text box It indicates the uploading succeeds as shown in the figure below How to download the five words with the starting address of RW300 to the position with the starting address of 4x200 The following is an example showing the implementation process Add a recipe data transmission component to the above project Set Address Type to 4x Address to 200 Function to Download Data Length to 5 and the label content is Upload as shown in the figures below Recipe Component Attribution Basic Attribution Recipe Data Tag Graphics Priority Normal Input Address Output Address HF HMO T Hil HMO PLC 0 Add Type Lw Addr U Addr Type 4 Addr 200 Code Type EIN Format DODDD Code Type BIN Format DDOCDO Word Use Addr Tag WordWio Use Addr Tag Description RLPU 279 Chapter 8 Recipe Data Recipe Component Attribution Basic Attribution Recipe Data Tag Graphics Function Download Data Length a The completed project is shown as follows RHIT6 LW9ee8 441668 TES Run the project in offline simulation mode Firstly set the value of LW9000 to 300 and enter AAAAAAAAAA in
90. to PLCAddressView Check whether PLC address Supports write operation Refer to related PLC data Y 4 Y 4 PLC response error y J N Check whether PLC type is correct Whether System Parameters gt PLC Type setting is correct 447 Appendix Il Troubleshooting N Whether System Parameters gt PLC Type setting is correct Check whether PLC address type and range are correct N Refer to related PLC data Check whether PLC address Supports write operation Ontact the vendor Fault with compilation information The user can view the number of errors as well as causes in the compilation information window 1 Address error or threshold crossing of PLC component as shown in the following figure HMI FLC FLC Farts E 5 Bit State Bit State Setting Lamp E Bit State Setting Component Attribute Bit State Direct 2i Ua Basic Attribute Bit State Setting Tag Graphics Position j NW Pricrity Multiple Multiple State State Input Address Output Address P si g HMI HMI HMl2 PLC LF Multiole Seroll Ear k 7 Se Addr Type Addr Type Add 99999999 lessage window Code Type Code Type Format DODDD compile ee Fees aera WordN a Wardha indowFr ame irror Window HO 0 I tem SBO over write findowFramel ae lindowFrame Description findowFr ame3 findowFr ame4 MI HIU compile failed Tompile HMI findowFr amel findowFr amel findowFramez findowFr amed f
91. to place a static text component on window 1 The content of 226 Chapter 6 Components the text is Common Window 1 5 Place a static text component on window O with the content Base Window 0 Place a function key whose function is Goto Previous and labeled as Return and a Pop up Window function key with the label Popup window 7 to pop up window 7 as shown in the figure below Basic Window O FEO Popup window f 6 Place a text component on window 4 to display the text of Basic Window 4 and a Return to Previous function key with the lable Return Basic Window 4 FRA 7 Place a Fast Selection Window function key on window 5 for switching to fast selection window 2 a Change Common Window function key for setting window 1 as the current common window and a Change Common Window function key for setting common window 6 as the current common window 22 Chapter 6 Components Common eH indou 6 Fast Select Window 2 8 Place a static text component with the content Common Window 6 on window 6 9 Place a popup window bar function key on window 7 to display the title of Pop up Window a Minimize Window and a Close Window function key 10 After setting these options save and compile the project run online offline simulation or downloading The operation effect simulation is shown in the figure below aa Basic Window i Window 8 ormmon Window 1 Basic J
92. 0 4 2 3 4 5 6 standard Dimensions of 481 Appendix IIl Hardware Overview MT4400 Dimensional Drawing Unit mm inch Front View Side View 235 9 25 33 209 ma 172 6 77 Top View Panel installation holddown errove totally four Rear View 224 8 82 161 6 34 482 Appendix Ill Hardware Overview MT4500 Basic Parameters 4500L 4500T Case color Dark grey Display 10 4STN 10 4TFT 000 200MHz RISC 8M FLASH 16M SDRAM COM port 2 RS 232 485 422 1 USB SLAVE Printer port 1 DB25 General specifications 21 28VDC_ working current Max 400mA 24V starting current Max Power supply 600mA 24V Complies with EN61000 6 4 2001 EN55011 EN61000 6 2 2001 CE certification EN61000 4 2 3 4 5 6 standard FCC compatibility Complies with FCC Class A Dielectric strength test 500 VAC 1 minute Insulation resistance Greater than 50MQ 500V DC Shockproof test 10 25Hz X Y Z direction 2G 30 minutes Degree of protection IP65 front panel Operating temperature 0 45 Operating humidity 10 90 non condensing Dimensions of 483 Appendix IIl Hardware Overview MT4500 Dimensional Drawing Unit mm inch Front View Side View 310 12 21 54 2 13 wax 230 9 06 Top View Panel installation holddown grrove totally six Rear View 2938 1174 218 8 59 484
93. 0 Height 240 Bottom Window Use Background Color 1 N aie ae i one one Ore Filled Color Background Frame S Pop Window Type W Tracking Monopoly wi F E E W Clipping Coherence Create a function key in window O and its properties are designed as follows 323 Function Key Component Attribution Function Key Trigger Addr Tag Graphics Position Switch Window Change Keyboard Func Enter Mapping K ep C Message Board C Tool Pen z Pen width 1 Clear f Black and white Multicolor Magnify Multiple 10 Color Print Page Curent Horizontal f Next f Vertical Function Key Component Attribution Function Key Trigger Addr Tag Graphics Position W UsTag Language English U SA Tag List Use Text Labrary Chapter 12 Security Level fe Escute Marco maco 0c Map Keyboard T Text T Indicator Trend Graphics All Bitmap All VectorGraph Background Save it to the disk make compilation and then run in offline simulation mode as shown in the figure below 324 Chapter 12 Security Level Nindow Current level Nenu wk Bar Press the function key but the system fails to switch to window 4 The reason is that the current security level is 0 while that of window 4 is 1 so the user cannot access a window with higher security level from lower one To access window 4 the user has to enter the password for
94. 00S CPU The Bits per second must be set to 38400 The user can also set LG MASTER K Cnet but shall pay attention to the setting of the DIP switch Only Cnet protocol supports PLC station No PLC software setting Please refer to related PLC programming software user manual of LG Industrial Systems Reference website Http www lgis com Operable address range PLC Address Operable a Description Type Range eo 0 255F DDD H Input output node 0 255F DDD H Holding node 0 255F DDD H Internal auxiliary node Link relay node Special relay node 0 255F DDD H 0 255F DDD H T C 0 255 DDD Timer counter node Note D indicates decimal notation H indicates hexadecimal notation and the value range is 0 F It supports T and C nodes only when LG K10S1 is adopted The operable range in the above table indicates the operable range of the MT5000 4000 touch screen The actual range of the PLC may be broader or narrower than this range 387 Chapter 14 Connection of eView MT5000 4000 with Common PLCs Detailed wiring diagram Note LG Master K series PLCs cover independent type and substrate type Where the independent type covers LG Master K 10S1 10S 30S 60S 80S series of CPUs and the substrate type covers LG Master K200S 300S 1000S series of CPUs They all can be connected with the eView touch screen through the communication port on their respective CPUs In addition Master K80S 200S 300S 1000S series of
95. 1 series CPU RS 232 interface 8 pin round male connector male connector MT5000 4000 touch screen PLC RS 232 interface 9 pin D SUB male connector 14 18 eView Master and eView Slave Master Slave Protocol Connection EV5000 software setting item Recommended Setting Optional Setting PLC Type eView Master eView Slave a RS 232 RS232 RS485 Data Bits Bits per 9600 Second _ PLC Station No o a 1 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 Even parity odd parity none 412 Must be the same as the COM port settings of the controller Must be the same as the COM port settings of the controller Must be the same as the COM port settings of the controller Must be the same as the COM port settings of the controller Must be the same as the COM port settings of the controller Chapter 14 Connection of eView MT5000 4000 with Common PLCs Operable address range PLC Address Bit Word Operable Range Description ype bit E 0 8999 DDDD wf as 0000 Detailed wiring diagram MT5000 4000 touch screen MT5000 4000 touch screen PLC RS 232 interface PLC RS 232 interface 9 pin D SUB male connector 9 pin D SUB male connector 3 TXD 4 RED 5 GND 14 19 Baumuller Controller Connection of Baumuller Controller with MT5000 4000 Touch Screen EV5000 software setting Recommended Optional Setting Precaution Setting RS485 4 ean RS485 4 Must be the same as the COM Data Bits
96. 10 Public Win Attribution Display below the basic windoy TextLab Lan 4 Pop Window Attribution Display on the top layer Default Lan 1 Upload Fey sates at W Save Event Log lial 0 Level Key Oooo Init Addr 100 Init window Framed 1 Level Key 111111 Record U Public Window Framel 2 Level Kep eeeeee Use Buzzer Fast sel Win Framez Cursor Color The system will reserve an area starting from RW100 for saving the event entry data Suppose that we want to save an event entry management information and 200 event entries as the following table shows 267 Chapter 8 Recipe Data Rep Card Addr Data RW100 Event list oes RW130 Content of 1st event entry RW150 Content of 2nd event entry RW170 Content of 3rd event entry ale a 2272 2222 2222 RW4090 Content of 199th event entry RW4110 Content a event The size of the reserved space is 200x20 30 4030 words For users this area cannot be written any write operation will cause unpredictable results The Initial Address can be designated by the user at his will There are two notes on that address 1 The desired memory area should not have any address conflict with the other registers in the project 2 The end of the memory are should not exceed RW60000 spaces over RW60000 is reserved by the system 7 4 Print Settings HMI Attribution Hh Task Bar HMI E stend Attribution Print Setting Serial Port 0 Setting Serial Port 1 Setting Printer
97. 109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0 10 10 10 10 thousand hundred ten one For example T 6 5 4 3 2 0 10010100 BIN data 1 2 0 2 0 2 1 2 0 2 1 2 0 2 0 2 decimal data 128 16 4 148 1 0 1001 0100 BCD data 9 40 4 10 decimal data 94 1001 binary 9 decimal 0100 binary 4 decimal 6 6 Multi State Switch Multiple State Me The Multiple State Switch is a combination of multi state display component and multi state setting component It displays different states 5 a maximum of 32 states depending on the value of the a mau PLC word address It also defines a touch area that when activated writes a specified data to the PLC word register The input address can be the same as the output address or different from it 139 Chapter 6 Components gt Adding a Multi State Switch 1 Click the multi state switch icon and drag it to the window the Basic Attribution tab of the Component Attribution dialogbox appears Word Control Component Attribution Basic Attribution Multi State Switch Tag Graphics Position Friority Input Address Output Address HMI HIO PLE Hl HMID 0 Add Type Lyf Add U Addr Type Lw Addr 0 Code Type BIN Pomat DDDDD Code Type BIN FomatDDDDD Word 1 WordHo 1 Description MS Priority Reserved function not used for the time being gt Input Address PLC register address that controls the state shape and label information of the multi
98. 89 Chapter 4 Windows HMI Attribution Print Setting Serial Port 0 Setting Serial Port 1 Setting HMI Task Bar HMI Extend Attribution ScreenProtect Public Win Attribution Display below the basic windoy gt TextLab Lan 4 Pop Window Attribution Display on the top layer g Default Lan 1 Upload Key 500008 Save Event Log E 0 Level Rey oodgdg Init amp ddr Init window Frame 1 Level kep COC Recodo Publie Window Frame 2 Level Rey OO Use Buzzer Fast sel Wiin Fiame Cursor Color A Note 1 A maximum of 16 pop up windows can be opened at the same time A window can only be opened once The function key Close Window cannot close direct or indirect windows since the opening or closing of a direct window is only related to the ON or OFF state of the bit address that controls its switch and the opening or closing of an indirect window is only related to the data content of the word address of the indirect window The function key Close Window cannot change the values of these bit word addresses so it cannot close these windows 4 All pop up windows are attached to the current basic window so when the basic window closes or switches to other basic window the attached pop up windows will be closed either In this case if you switch the window to the basic window previously opened again you may find that the original pop up windows attached to this basic window still exist unless you run related command to c
99. ABOUT OVERLAPPING OF COMPONENTS csscccsecccccecccascccecccuescecaccceuescccaesccauecesausecusesesuesesauacs 256 CHAPTER 7 SYSTEM PARAMETERS cccccscssccccsscccccssccccccsccccccsccccccsccccccscsccccccscocccccces 262 ERA NOMEN e a aera er ese Rede ar er tic vO ao Oey vet Ry Or A On Ar ete Oa PEE ee LTT A Tene vO ee 262 Ga NS 6271 gt ee CORY CeCe ETC TIEE a Ave ae TET OeE Leven eCry ten ker Ten tCrr Toes 263 To SAMPEXTEND APIRIBU TIONS a haat ct ert haa ct eerie tana ce isis 265 LA Ne RUIN Ee WIN oS ele te researc eats Saison ee ce ata sn aoe sete ange 268 Co HOI SEIN SS aere e ces these tne coc otis sane Gite otis cane Sh Goon iotinc cas a e NT 269 TE JPEG STATIONING i e ee ee ee eee 271 CHAPTER 8 RECIPE DATA caseccccstcsccscsdeiccccstesccncs aaa a aeaea aeaaaee 273 8 1 CREATING A RECIPE DATA TRANSMISSION COMPONENT cccsecccsecccceccccccccccccccacscceuececaeccceeecs 273 eZ EEEO Ea E EEE EA E E A 274 8 3 UPLOADING DOWNLOADING OF RECIPE DATA BETWEEN TOUCH SCREEN AND PLC 281 CHAPTER 9 MACRO CODE aA E EE tenet eee 290 9 1 GETTING STARTED A SIMPLE MACRO TEMPLATE sscccsseccccecccccccccceccccccccucscccscccucccceuesecaesceuaecs 290 9 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES OF MACRO TEMPLATE AD READ WRITE VARIABLE 295 9 3 TRIGGERING OF MACRO ws ee ee 297 e TE APEE Sn a a T A A ern CURE Tw Cente 298 CHAPTER 10 PRINT aooiee nEn LAEL EN E LA vali dow vce cea AEAEE EELEE NEEE EAA 305 TOT FUNC TION KE aineen a
100. Address a r Dutt Address Hal HMIO PLC oO Hbl HID FEE 0 Add Type 4 Addr 104 Addr Type Lw Addr T Code Type BIN FommatDDODDOD Code Type BIN Format DODOD word 1 Use Addr Tag Wardha Use Addr Tag Description Nie 284 Chapter 8 Recipe Data Create two recipe data transmission components one is for downloading recipe data and the other is for uploading recipe data The address for both of them is 4x100 Recipe Component Attribution Basic Attribution Recipe Data Tag Graphics Priority Input Address HF PLC Addr Type Addr Code Type Format DDDDD Word jis Description Output Address HF HMIO PLO 0 Addr 100 Format DOODO Addr Type 4s Code Type BIN h Word a Use RCF In addition we have to design two buttons to enable a user to query and modify each group of recipe data conveniently One button is to query previous data and the other is to query next data The former is a multi state setting component Each time when you press this button the system will deduct 5 from the value of LW9000 because each group of recipe data consists of five words Press this button once and the RWIO can display the data of the previous recipe as shown in the figure below Word Setting Component Attribution Basic Attribution Wulti State Setting Tag Graphics Position Priority Input Address Htl PLE Addr Type Addr Code Type Word
101. Align Make Same Size t width Layer LL Height Align Horizontal Centert Ctrl I li Align vertical Center T Ctrl g Select All Component Select Componett 4 38 Chapter 3 Description of the eV5000 Software Ecit E Miewt Tools T Library D Wine H UndotZ Ctrl z A Cuib Ctrl JA Copic Circ Mudge Align b Make Same Size t width Layer LL Height Align Horizontal Centert Ctrl I li Align vertical Center T Ctrl g Select All Component Select Componety 4 Layer If multiple components are overlapped you can use the icons D Top Bottom or selectSet Top Layer andSet Bottom Layer in the Layer submenu in the Edit menu to change the layer sequence of the components First select a component then click the related icon to set the component to the expected layer The components on the top layer are always displayed above the components on the layers below Top Group Ungroup This function can be used to group multiple selected components or shapes so that they can be used as a single component To group multiple components select these components and then select Group in the Edit menu or click the icon iI To ungroup select the grouped entity and 39 Chapter 3 Description of the eV5000 Software then select Ungroup in the Edit menu or click the
102. Appendix Ill Hardware Overview 2 RxD PLC RS 232 Rx se prorcfrsae OO za Signal ground Rx B RS 485 Rx RS485B pere PLC C send input T B E 2 3 2 Connection with PC The COMO port on the back of the case can be used to connect PLC RS 232 485 422 devices and can also be used to connect with the programming interface and setting interface of a PC Connection The port can be connected to a PC through a dedicated cable P N MT5000 PC Port Function Due to the reason of communication rate the COMO port of a PC is only used for configuration downloading and parameter setting and it will not be used for indirect online simulation Pin A sll of 9 pin male D SUB COMO Pin Signal PLC PLC PLC PC RS 232 Designations RS 485 RS 485 RS 232 om 4 wire 2 wire 6789 RS 485 Rx RS485A RxD_PLC ae 232 COMO 3 TxD_ TxD_PLC RS 232 Tx l e e meo e ToT n e se aa a 456 Appendix Ill Hardware Overview MT5000 RS232 485 422 PC PLC RS232 485 422 PC RS232 RX A 1 m l 1 1 MT 5000 to RxD PLC 2 2 PC TxDPLC 3 3 MT5000_PC 7 Tx 4 4 Wiring GND 5 5 Diagram Rx B 6 6 RxD PC 7 7 TxD PC 8 8 Tx 9 9 2 3 3 USB Connection The USB port on the back of the case is the USB Slave device used to connect with a PC for configuration downloading and HMI setting I
103. C helps the user distinguish those PLCs Right click on the PLC icon will popup its own shortcut menu and the user can select in the menu to edit the attribution of the corresponding PLC Wire The wires shown in the Project Window represent the physical connection between HMI and PLC See page 59 for detail of connecting HMI and PLC The structural diagram is as follows gt PartO Project Name _y Framed pa Part1 Le HMI gt HMIO gt Frame lp Part2 sel abd Frame2 pe HMIn PLCO PLC gt PLC1 L PLCn The detailed structure is shown in the Project Construct Window as follows Project construct window TF O Framnet I 1 Framel e DWO a DWI p 2 Framez 3 Frames I 4 Framet HMO fii FLE ii PLEI i PLOO O See the figure above the icons labeled FrameX represent the configuration windows of panel marked as HMI1 DWO and DW1 in the above figure represent parts in Window 1 The symbols indicate windows containing parts click on the will expand the tree and make the parts of that window visible Windows containing no parts don t have that symbol and can not be 64 Chapter 3 Description of the eV5000 Software 99 expanded To collapse the expanded tree click on the symbols If t
104. Code Type Wordla Swi Description Add Type LB gt Addr 0 Code Type Format DODOD Word The PLC list box can display the numbers of all available PLC devices Bit State Switch Component Attribute Pasic Attribute Bit State Switch Taz Graphics Fosition Priority Input Address Hbl HMIO PLC 0 Addr Type LB Add OQ Format DOOOD pt Code Type wordo Description Swi z Output Address HMI HMO PLC l dd Type LB Addr i Format DOODDD TT Use Code Type wordo 108 Chapter 5 Basic Design of EV5000 An internal node can also be selected as input origin or output target The descriptions of the internal nodes are as follows SMI di tte asi i nanneereanlanicin i ae E 0 261000 Index address of the recipe memory 0 261000 Absolute address of the recipe memory RB and RW point to the same area for example RB5 0 RB5 F and RW5 map into the same word of the recipe memory RB5 0 is Bit0 of RW5 However LB and LW map into different areas and their addresses in the memory are different LB9000 LB9999 in LB and LW9000 LW10256 in LW are reserved for system functions which have special usage so the user cannot use them like common nodes Therefore the user should use their special functions according to related instructions For details please refer to Chapter 11 If an index address accesses the recipe memory the index address itself serves as the base address the offset ad
105. Compress Bitmap Size gt 1024 Download Download Device USE Serial Hao IP Address Fort Screen Grid Space Es Cancel 4 If the Ethernet interface is used to download the program the IP address should be set to be different from that of the PC To modify the IP address you may turn the two DIP switches in the rear of the touch screen to ON and then reset the HMI to enter the built in SETUP window 5 Click Options in the Tools menu open the compilation download option select Ethernet for the Download Device and set the IP Address and Port of the touch screen Chapter 1 Installation of EV5000 Compile amp Download Option Compile W Compress Bitmap Size gt 1024 Download Download Device Serial Ho IP Address Fot 1845 Screen Grid Space Cancel the IP address set in the HMI Properties window If the IP address set in the HMI Properties Note After project download the IP address of the screen will automatically change to interface is inconsistent with that set in the Compilation Download Options window download by use of the old IP address will fail In this case it is necessary to adjust the IP address in Compilation Download Options window or enter the SETUP state to modify the current IP address of the touch screen 1 2 3 Printer Interface eeeeeeaeeeees eeceeeeeeeees 25 E The MT5000 series and the MT4400T MT4500T series provide a printer interface T
106. Ctrl D 2 Offline Simulation F F5 Ta Indirect Online Simulation shift FS fa Direct Online Simulation W Ctrl F5 Options Alt F Compile t Download Option Compile W Compress Bitmap Size gt 1024 Download Download Device i IF Address Fort Screen Grid Space ke 20 note Due to the low downloading speed downloading through serial port will take a long time to wait thus it is not recommended as the downloading channel After selecting the downloading method and setting the required parameters you can start E downloading by click the icon A dialog box will pop up after clicking the download icon According to the method you select the dialog box looks a bit different as the following figures show 81 Chapter 3 Description of the eV5000 Software EVDownload Select HMI Select Section HMI Station HMI Information Data File Recipe File J Loco File Download File Fath Ec textitext_Ol aa pkg Communication Type USB port cm woo n EVDownload Select HMI HMI Station HMI Information Data File Recipe File O Loco File Meng lmed tile Path E tenthtext_O1 Maa pkg Communication Type Serial port BFS 1 15200 EVDownload Select Section HMI Station HMI Information Nata File g Recipe File Loco File Download File Fath Es texthtext_Ol aa pkg Communication Type Fettork TF 255 209 255 255 PORT 21845 Except the
107. Cucle 1 00m FPLC No Response Mode Address Type Response State Address Repeat Times gt Basic Attribution Trigger Mode Include such options as All time Initial Frame Triggered at Window Initialization Close frame Triggered at Window Close and by register address Triggered by Register State Always TriggeredAll time If this option is selected the timer will be triggered upon initialization regardless of the trigger mode to execute the triggered operations until the times designated by the Repeat Times reach Then it will not be triggered until the next initialization Initial Frame The timer will be triggered upon initialization of the window to execute the triggered operations until the times designated by the Repeat Times reach This function is basically the same as the All time mode Close Frame The timer is triggered only once when the window closes Triggered by Register State The timer will be triggered according to the setting of the Trigger State and the value of the register designated by Trigger Address When the Repeat time is 0 it will continue to execute the triggered operation until the trigger condition is cancelled If the Repeat time is N it will clear trigger register once triggered and then trigger N operations before it automatically stops Execution Cycle The timing cycle of the timer in the unit of 100 ms The timer will execute the triggered operation at an interval of th
108. Curve Background Span Point Rectangle Fill Color Rounded Rectangle Line Color Polyline Ellipse Image Polygon Text Sector The contents of the drawing toolbar are arranged in the following order Select Selects a single component Straight Line Draws a straight line Curve Draws a curve Rectangle draws a rectangle Rounded Rectangle Draws a rounded rectangle Polyline Draws a continuous straight line Polygon Draws a polygon Circle Ellipse Draws a circle ellipse Sector Draws a sector Text Adds a text Picture Imports a picture to the bitmap library Line Color Sets the color of a line Fill Color Sets the filling color Background Spacing Point Sets the background spacing point Transparent Color Implements transparent color effect of an added bitmap Gray Scale switches the bitmap between color and gray 47 Chapter 3 Description of the eV5000 Software Compile amp Download Option Compile W Compress Bitmap Size gt 1024 Download Download Device Serial Hao IP Address Port 1845 Screen Grid Space 20 E Cancel In the palette of color related tools we provide 40 optional colors as shown in the following figure re EL DENE EEEE kal FFF k P F LELLLLELI BEES unFilled EER eee ee HEHE ee miming inimi EE gagaosaonf In addition besides the 40 colors listed above you may make a customized setting of the color Select Custom and th
109. DOD Word 1 Use Addr Tag wordo Use Addr Tag Description TOO Priority Reserved function not used for the time being 168 Chapter 6 Components Input Address The address of the PLC word registers to be displayed a maximum of 16 words with each word containing two ASCII characters Address The initial address of the word registers corresponding to the text display component Code Type BIN or BCD No of Words 1 16 optional for input address Use Address Tag Whether to use the address entered in the address tag library For details refer to Section 6 34 Description A reference name not displayed that you assign to the text display component 2 Goto the Font tab Set the size color and alignment mode of display texts Text Display Component Attribution Basic Attribution Font Font Size 16 Alon Left Example A 3 Click OK to complete the setting and place the text display component in an appropriate position 6 14 Bar Graph Bar Picture The Bar Graph displays the PLC register data as a bar graph in proportion to its value as defined by the maximum value and minimum value settings _ 169 Chapter 6 Components As shown in the figures below the user can customize bar graphs of any shapes DEB gt Adding a Bar Graph 1 Click the bar graph component icon and drag it to the window the basic attribution tab of the component attribution dialogbox appears B
110. DODDO Code Type Format ODDDD Word ii WordAa E Description IEO Priority Reserved function not used for the time being Input Address The address of PLC word register designated to store direct window No When the register value changes the window designated by the changed value will pop up For example if the value changes to 20 window 20 will appear the window must a created window If the value changes to 0 the window closes Address The word register address corresponding to the indirect window Code Type BIN or BCD No of Words The default value is 1 for input address Use Address Label Whether to use the address entered in the address label For details refer to Section 6 34 Description A reference name not displayed that you assign to the indirect window component 2 Click OK and adjust the position and size of the indirect window component The size of the Indirect Window limits the area of pop up window The area of pop up window out of the Indirect Window boundary will be truncated The Function Key can be assigned to the window to enable repositioning and minimizing features Refer to Window Bar and Minimize Window in the Function Key Component Section Pop up method for direct and indirect window The window is controlled by a PLC bit Direct Window or word Indirect Window address Once the bit or word address is activated the window pops up When the bit or word changes to 0 the window closes
111. E E TCA 121 5 6 TASKBAR AND TASK BUTTONS orron a a a a a 122 CHAPTER 6 COMPONENTS PARTS esssececccsoccecccoccccccsoccccccsocceccosccccccooccecccoccccccosccecccsscecccsseeee 125 SEIN I rs ce spots a scans dis a a a osembacclstne alt toseetbacelotsedess 126 0 2 BIT SE ING COMP ONE ING sores sed ect were EE E EEIE acts encima EEE ETEEN 130 03 OWOH eoe ceca iawhennceund qu eset a enteenieusaeadenctaauetind 133 0A WORD SETTING eee cosclta tc unaclaven cose asta a A ache esssaseeasens 134 625 MULTISTATE DISPLAY arcsec alle cca ich beaaii tsar til ateasauiadnchieas Casieetali tse iniatnel base aeluaoes 137 6 6 MULTI STATE S WIG He areira etree hot Goh Ge ote eta 139 O Al dE 1 ie ere nee ET ae atTaT cree Cie meaty a E Fer net eT gee 141 6 5 MOVING COMPONENT xis csece sacs ec 144 RT AI TOI ace ssp casera a seis asm t aaa a E E S 148 Os OINUMBE Re INE 0 a A tore oe reiterate eee tatiana eat A E E E NT 152 BOIINUMERIC DISPUAY E E A EE E EE A EEE EE tae 158 OIZ TE TIN O a e a a a a a men ene mt ent 160 0 13 TEXT DIS PEAY anne a a E E A E A deta Shatin tees 168 OBAR GO PAP aa A N 169 OTO R era E ON EMTS TeOmE a erE Uw arte TTT mY ArT em eTeT mC RST TTeemE art 172 eView MT5000 MT4000 Series Touch Screen User Manual Contents 6 16 INR We WINDOW aps aa se ee 174 SUVAB E ERA D B oats sete ah escent ght eae ha EAEI AAS O ENASI ETAS AAS 178 6 18 ALARM INFORMATION LOGON sscccsecccecccceccceccceccccscenecccusccuececeeceuescsaecceesceac
112. Edit ToolbarfB Chrl 4lk D Filled Effect ToolbarfE ctrl 4lk H Project Structure Window Chrl Alk C Project File List WindowlE Ctrl Alk F Compile Information Window Cbrl alk M Component List Window Ctrl Alk E All Graph element list winodow x HMI Frame Graph element Read PLC Read Address write PLC Write Address HMIO Framel Dwi PLCO 100 LB 9060 HMIO Framel DWO PLCO 100 LB 9064 HMIO Frame3 TDO PLCO 100 LW 9072 HMIO Frame3 ND1 PLCO 100 LW 9004 HMIO Frame3 NDO PLCO 100 LW 9002 The window shows the information of all parts used in the project including HMI panel number configuration frame number part number input PLC number type of input address input address output PLC number type of output address and output address Double click an entry will lead to the configuration frame where the part is 3 7 Offline Simulation The EV5000 provides offline simulation function During offline simulation the program does not accquire data from the PLC but only read data from the local address Therefore all data displayed on the configuration windows are static data With the offline simulation the user can conveniently preview the configuration effect without the need to download the program to the touch screen every time Therefore lots of time for downloading is saved Select Offline Simulation in the Tools menu or click the fel icon the following dialog box appears 66 Chapter 3 Description o
113. IF Address Se ee eee are Port Number 2008 Display Setting Screen Display Mode Description In the dialog box there are six tabs namely HMI Taskbar HMI Extend Properties Print Settings COM1 Settings and COMO Settings as detailed one by one below 7 1 HMI HMI Attribution Print Setting Serial Port 0 Setting Seral Fort 1 Setting HMI Task Bar HMI Extend Attribution Network Setting IF Address Se Port Number 2005 Display Setting Screen Display Mode Description IP Address Set the IP address of the HMI This IP address is the IP address of the HMI when 262 Chapter 8 Recipe Data the Ethernet connection is used IP Address is only valid for MT5000 and MT4000E not for MT4000 Port Number Refer to the description in Section 3 9 Display Settings Select the display mode Horizontal or Vertical The display mode is set when dragging and dropping the HMI icon Once it is selected it cannot switch over to the other mode So this parameter is only for reference here Description Description of the HMI which will be displayed in the HMI description frame during download or simulation to help user distinguish different HMI panels 7 2 Taskbar HMI Attribution Print Setting Serial Port 0 Setting Seral Fort 1 Setting Task Bar HMI Extend Attribution Background Color Button Position Align lett Use Touch Control B Undefined Area Color Text Align Align lett 7 Include CPU
114. IP switches for parameter setting Please pay attention to parameter settings For detailed hardware settings refer to the technical manuals provided by OMRON 350 Chapter 14 Connection of eView MT5000 4000 with Common PLCs 2 Communication module C200H LK201 3G2A6 LK201 communication module RS232 OMRON PLC eView MT5000 4000 touch LK201 adapter screen RS 232 interface COMO COM1 25 pin D SUB female connector Note Please pay attention to the setting of four DIP switches on the module For indications of these DIP switches refer to the technical manual of communication modules of OMRON The wiring method of the CPUs of the C series PLCs developed at an earlier stage like C20H C28H C40H CPU is the same as that shown in the above figure 3 Communication module C200H LK202 3G2A6 LK202 communication module RS422 OMRON PLC eView MT5000 4000 touch LK202 adapter screen RS 422 interface COMO COM1 9 pin D SUB female connector 351 Chapter 14 Connection of eView MT5000 4000 with Common PLCs 4 Communication module C200HW COM02 03 04 05 06 communication module RS 232 OMRON PLC C200HW COM communication module RS 232 interface 9 pin D SUB female connector eView MT5000 4000 touch screen COM0 COM1 5 Communication module C200HW COM03 06 communication module RS 422 OMRON PLC C200HW COM communication module RS 422 interface 9 pin D SUB female connector eView MT5000 4000 touch screen COM0 COM1
115. K200S CPU K3P 07BS RS422 eView MT5000 4000 touch LG Master K PLC screen Master K200 series CPU COMO0 COM 1 RS 422 interface 5 pin terminal block Note Only K200S CPU K3P 07BS provides built in RS 422 485 port Set the PLC type to LG MASTER K Cnet and pay attention to the setting of communication parameters 389 Chapter 14 Connection of eView MT5000 4000 with Common PLCs 4 Communication module G7L CUEB G6L CUEB G4L CUEA G3L CUEA Master K Cnet RS232 LG Master K PLC eView MT5000 4000 touch Master K Cnet module screen RS 232 interface COMO COM1 9 pin D SUB female connector 5 Communication module G7L CUEC G6L CUEC G4L CUEA G3L CUEA Master K Cnet RS422 LG Master K PLC Master K200 series CPU RS 422 interface 5 pin terminal block eView MT5000 4000 touch screen COM0 COM1 Note When the Cnet module is used the PLC type must be set to LG MASTER K Cnet Pay attention to the setting of communication parameters It is necessary to use the Cnet Frame Editor software provided by LG to set the parameters Set the mode switch on the communication module to position 3 390 Chapter 14 Connection of eView MT5000 4000 with Common PLCs 14 9 Matsushita PLC Matsushita Electric Connection of NAIS FP Series PLC with eView MT5000 4000 Touch Screen EV5000 software setting Recommended Optional Setting Precaution Setting PLC Type Matsushita FP ee different types COMO COM1 RS232 RS485
116. LC eView MT5000 4000 touch 1747 KE module screen DF1 RS 232 interface COM0 COM1 9 pin D SUB female connector 14 5 MODICON PLC Schneider af Electric Schneider Electric Connection of MODICON Compact A E984 Momentum Quantum Series PLC with MT5000 4000 Touch Screen EV5000 software setting Recommended Optional Setting Precaution Setting Data bits for this protocol 7ors are set to 8 in a fixed manner Must be the same as the 1or2 COM port settings of the PLC Must be the same as the COM port settings of the PLC Must be the same as the COM port settings of the PLC 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 Even parity odd parity none 374 Chapter 14 Connection of eView MT5000 4000 with Common PLCs Must be the same as the PLC Station No COM port settings of the PLC Note In fact the maximum setting range of the DIP switch on the Quantum series of PLCs is 1 64 PLC software setting Set the communication protocol of the COM port to Modbus RTU mode Please refer to related PLC programming software user manual of Schneider Electric Reference website HTTP www modicon com Operable address range PLC Address eee Operable Range Description Type System internal external Ox 1 9999 DDDD output node 3 System internal external 1x 1 9999 DDDD input node 1 9999 DDDD Analog input data register DDDD Data register Note 1 D indicates decimal notation If it is necessary to operate t
117. Lw Addr Addi Type Uw Add 0 Code Type BIN Format DODD Code Type EIN Format DOODO wordo 1 Use Addr Tag wordo D Use Addr Tag Description NDO The finished project window is shown as follows 98 Chapter 4 Windows 6 Save compile and perform online simulation of the project LBO is set to ON and LW1 is set to 200 lien bit state suitch Nultiple State switch Bit State Lamp Humber Display Nenu Task B E L view e Nenu Task Reference for this example Section 6 1 Indicator Lamp Section 6 2 Bit Setting Component Section 6 4 Multi State Setting and Section 6 11 Numeric Display in Chapter 6 Example 2 It is an example of pop up keypad window for number entry In many cases we need to conduct write operation for registers If the keypad is fixed on the current window it will occupy too much screen area so that the current window design space of the project is greatly reduced In this example we use the direct pop up window method to solve this problem Assume that LWO is the register need an input operation 99 Chapter 4 Windows JN Note The EV5000 software has a keypad in Window 3 which can be directly invoked so you do not have to create a keypad by yourself each time To create your own keypad please refer to chapter 6 100 Chapter 4 Windows Create a new project or open an existing one Enter the window editing mode Create a numeric inpu
118. M port settings of the PLC Must be the same as the 9600 19200 38400 Bits per Second 9600 19200 COM port settings of the 57600 115200 Bie 383 Chapter 14 Connection of eView MT5000 4000 with Common PLCs Must be the same as the Even parity odd Parity Odd parity COM port settings of the parity none PLC Human machine It is not required to set 0 255 station No this protocol Multiple Applicable only to human machine Disabled Disabled Master Slave multiple human machine Must adopt PLC Station No 2 0 255 recommended settings interconnection interconnection Human machine Applicable only to interconnection 38400 38400 115200 multiple human machine rate interconnection PLC timeout 3 0 1 5 5 0 Adopt default settings constant Recommended value PLC packet 0 10 range 0 10 Note The part number of SIEMENS S7 300 HMI adapter is 6 S7972 0CA10 0XA0 and that of SIEMENS S 7 300 PC adapter is 6 S7972 OCA23 0XA0 When a PC adapter is used the baud rate bits per second can be set to 19200 or 38400 only depending on the setting of the DIP switch on the adapter For details refer to the product catalogue of SIEMENS PLC software setting It is required to create data block DB10 For creation procedures please refer to related PLC programming software user manual of SIEMENS Reference website Http www aut sea siemens com s 300 Operable address range PLO R Wi FRY PC adapter PLO2E ie FE
119. MODBUS RTU In actual connection the user can use PLCs supporting the MODBUS RTU protocol Setting of communication parameters The same COM port shall have same settings no matter how many PLCs it is connected to Double click each PLC and modify it to be the corresponding PLC station No As shown in the figure below station numbers of the Siemens S7 200 PLCs are respectively 0 and 2 while the station numbers of the MODBUS RTU PLCs are respectively 1 2 and 3 4 Setting of PLC components Select corresponding PLC number 436 Chapter 17 Networking of MT5000 Series Touch Screens 17 1 3 Networking of Multiple Touch Screens with One PLC A Caution 1 Different types of touch screens can be connected with each other 2 Different touch screens are connected with each other through the Ethernet As shown in the figure below lead an Ethernet cable from Communication Connection Graph element window x Connector Connect the Ethernet cable to the Net interface of the touch screen and connect two touch screens together in this way 437 Chapter 17 Networking of MT5000 Series Touch Screens HMI ICOM COME HMT COMI COMO Lead another Ethernet cable from Communication Connection and connect it to the Net interface of a touch screen In this way three touch screens are connected as shown in the figure below HMD HBA Connect the PLC with the corresponding touch screen as shown in th
120. N Explorer oh 1 2 Interface Diagram The COMO COM1 ports in MT5000 and MT4000 can be connected to a PC or a PLC The MT5000 and MT4000 have very powerful communication capability The MT5000 provides one Ethernet interface the MT4000 does not have any Ethernet interface one USB interface one print interface and two serial ports Therefore the MT5000 and MT4000 are capable of communications with most devices with communication capabilities Thus it can be seen that the MT5000 and MT4000 have wide applications These interfaces will be described one by one in the following sections 1 2 1 Serial Ports Presently the MT5000 4000 has two serial ports marked COMO and COM1 The two ports are respectively male and female connectors for the convenience of differentiation The difference between their pins lies in PIN 7 and PIN 8 COMO is a 9 pin male connector with the pinout definition as follows P1 GND IX IX PC TAD TXD PLC PC_RXD RAD PLEC RX B RX A Od NO N Oo Co A CO On COMO MALE PC232 PLC232 NO HARDWARE CONTROL 485 422 COM1 is a 9 pin female connector with the pinout as follows Its difference from COMO is that its PC RXD and PC_TXD are replaced with TRS_PLC and CTS_PLC hardware control connected to PLC 232 Chapter 1 Installation of EV5000 GND IXt Tas RTS PLC TXD_PLC CIS Pie RXD_PLC RX B RX A DININ Oo R O On COM1 FEMALE PLC232 HARDWARE CONTROL 485 422 1 2 2 Et
121. No screen saver will be available when the value is set to 0 The time can be modified The Setup interface may not be able to display in full size in a single screen In this case click Next to enter the next page and click Back to return to the previous page Calibrate Time Check whether the year month day hour minute and second is the current time If the time is not consistent with the current time calibrate the time manually IP Address Setup Modify the IP address and port number PORT of a target screen It is necessary to reset the screen after modification Buzzer Disabled Enable disable the buzzer After setting the option it is necessary to reset the screen Adjust contrast Contrast Up Down and brightness Brightness Up Down to achieve the best visual effect Adjust contrast and brightness according to different models of HMls 5300L 5500L 4500L 4300L 4300S Adjust contrast 5300S 5400S Adjust contrast and brightness 5300T 5400T 5500T 5600T 5700T 4300T 4400T 4500T Adjust brightness 4300C No contrast or brightness adjustment function Calibrate touch screen Set DIP switch 1 to OFF and DIP switch 2 to ON Follow the sign until you hear a click sound and the sign disappears Then set DIP switch 1 and 2 to OFF and press Reset 431 Chapter 17 Networking of MT5000 Series Touch Screens Chapter 17 Networking of MT5000 Series Touch Screens 17 1 Networking 17 1 1 Networking
122. OCO File name 123 Files of type User Data Files pkg Cancel Open as read only Downloading LOGO Click Download Logo select a compiled configuration project in the tar folder and then select the HMI LOGO file in the HMI folder and click Open to download the logo file 422 Chapter 15 Operation Instructions for EVManager Communication Set S Communication Type USE port Upload Operate TF i aaa eo 1 cin es System Operate Serial W0 MLL a jo Get Version Download Section LOGO Show Set Download User Data Show LOGO File name 123 Open Files of type User Data Files pkg Cancel Open as read only Hanager 19 EVDownload Message Eg Download success Ok LOGO Show Set Determine whether the logo will be displayed during the power on of the panel Changes will take effect after restarting the panel Select Show logo and restart the panel the logo will be displayed during power on select UnShow logo and restart the panel you will not see the logo during power on 423 Chapter 15 Operation Instructions for EVManager Communication Set EY Communication Type USB port EJ Upload Operate IP NULL PORT NULL iS System Operate Serial NO NULL Set JE sacar 1 EVDownload Message x LOGO Show Set Download success Lhe UnShow LOGO Download LOGO If the setting fails an error message dialo
123. OE me ICE ORE NRE A OnE Ree PE Re On 343 gs Po 1 Tg SE TTA a E ame cam E EE E E Oe nr Re E ne ee eee Pe 353 S KOYO PLO eee rer ene mee eT ero ete Pee OF Pee ee ee Ear gO es ee ee ere ee 362 TAA AUCEN SB RADUEY PEC sane T T E E NRR 369 T40 MODICON PEC ruaa eana en e a a ecto TE 374 14O FACON PEC oeenn aaa a a aaa a aa aaa a ae 378 t TT gS Sa AY mal I eso PLEO careen aa EEEE EEEN E E E CECENE AE 381 We il OS el 2d ECE E A E E EE E R 386 O NIATSUSHTA PLO ere N A N A 391 gr iW JI E AREG a a R E E A N AR 394 1411 MODBUS RRUSCONTROLLER a n a a at 396 14 12 MODBUS ASCII CONTROLLER aiissssnnnsoesnssoensssenssessssserssseensserossorrserrossrrosseorsssrroserrossroosserrnsens 398 mA t VIGOR FEO aae AA A A AA 401 Tete EMMERSON IPE C eects eE N NO ONE NGN 403 AaS KEYENCE PLO annn N T T NENA 405 TATOO IAS PLEC ass ah tens aces a ac a tyros a a A a ae in i 408 TAATABB OTIKIRS Wie Cetera a Ae ee eee E E 410 14 18 EVIEW MASTER AND EVIEW SLAVE MASTER SLAVE PROTOCOL CONNECTION 000008 412 14 19 BAUMULEER CONTROLLER serinin iat ein EE AE E male an ca tenant A 413 14 20 KNCOECOSTEP CONTROLLER veraia a E A E E EEEE 414 CHAPTER 15 OPERATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR EVMANAGER ccccccccccssssccsscees 417 LO VIINTRODUGTION TO EVMANAGER er R NERE NR R N toscana ae uae 417 1522 DOWNLOAD OPERATE a A aes 418 15 3 UPLOAD OPERATE min aana n an aa a aa TA aa Oaa a a N 424 194A IEM OPERA TE meene E a E 427 CHAPTER 16 USEOF SETUP nnrir
124. OFF when it is touched or activated by other conditions lav Exe gt Adding a bit setting component 1 Click the bit setting component icon and drag it to the window the Component Attribution dialogbox appears The first tab is the Basic Attribution tab 130 Chapter 6 Components Bit Setting Component Attribution Basic Attribution Bit State Setting Tag Graphics Position Pricrity Input Address Output Address HMI PUE HMI HMO PLE 0 Addr Type Addr Addr Type Add 0 Code Type Format DODOD Code Type Format DDDODG Ward if 3 WiordN a a Description SBO gt Output Address Bit address of the PLC register whose ON or OFF state is controlled by the bit setting component The HMI field PLC field and Address type field is similar with those of the Indicator lamp component Address Bit address of the register corresponding to the bit setting component Use Address Tag Whether to use the address stored in the address tag library For details refer to Section 6 34 Description A reference name not displayed that you assign to the bit setting component 2 Goto the Bit State Setting tab Bit State Setting Component Attribute Basic Attribute Bit state Setting Tag Graphics Position Type Set On when Window Open 7 Set On when Window Oper Set OFF when Window Open Set On when Window Close Set OF when Window Clase Set n when Window MM asinized
125. OODDD Code Type BIN Foma OOODD Code Type word ia WordNo Description ACPO 275 Chapter 8 Recipe Data Recipe Component Attribution Basic Attribution Recipe Data Tag Graphics Function Upload Data Length Place it on the window RCPU The recipe data transmission component is made but it only indicates that the five words with the starting address of 4x200 shall be transferred to the recipe memory and it does not suggest the specific position in the recipe memory This is where the reserved keyword LW9000 of the system works Set the value of LW9000 to 300 and press transmission component key The five words with the starting address of 4x200 will be transferred to the position of five words with the starting address of RW300 in the recipe memory To transfer the five words with the starting address of 4x200 to the position RWIOO in the recipe memory set the value of LW9000 to 100 and press the transmission component key To complete the transmission we have to make a text input component to modify the upload data Set Address Type to 4x Address to 200 and Word No to 5 Set trigger address type to LB and address to 9000 It is shown in the following figure 2 6 Chapter 8 Recipe Data Text Input Component Attribution Basic Attribution Trigger Address Font Graphics Position Priority Input Address e Output Address Hl HMIO PLCE Htl PLC Addr Type s Addr 200 Addr T ype A
126. RO EO TERESA MWM La aera gt O Framed IELA 200 x lt gt gt gt PTE ee eee ee 1 A SS ZN V HE hh E lil z moa aa fe o_o es Ed E Project files window x Graph element window x Connector 5 test_01 0 HAI HMI HMIO whe PLC Vector Graph PLO Parts HNUB_CTRL_BAROOL vz o S vg aS Bit State Bit State Setting Lamp G EF rf Goni Bit State Direct Switch Window aN U Multiple Multiple State State wii ind Multiple Scroll Bar Stata NA E Project construct window x Moving Animation Component Alarm Trend Curve Display 2 Wl XYPlot Bar Picture a Si Meter Recipe Data Jj amp Event Indirect Display Window Irna imma w Function Parts Mouse x 319 y 229 21 Chapter 2 Making a Simple Project Bit State Switch 3 In the PLC Components frame in the graph element window on the left click hold drag and drop it to the configuration screen editing area after dropping the General dialog box in the Bit Control Components appears Set the input output address of the bit control component as shown in the following figure Bit Display Component Attribution Basic Attribution Bit Lamp Tag Graphics Position Priority Input Address Output Address HMI HMI PLC HMI PLC Addr Type LE Add JU Addr Type Addr Code Type Format DODDD Code Tyne Format DODOL w ordho B WordHo E Description
127. Recipe memory 256K WORD Printer port 1 DB15 General specifications 21 28VDC_ working current Max 400mA 24V starting Power supply current Max 600mA 24V Complies with EN61000 6 4 2001 EN55011 EN61000 6 2 2001 EN61000 4 2 3 4 5 6 standard Complies with FCC Class A 500 VAC 1 minute Greater than 50M Q 500V DC 10 25Hz X Y Z direction 2G 30 minutes IP65 front panel 0 45 10 90 non condensing CE certification FCC compatibility Dielectric strength test Insulation resistance Shockproof test Degree of protection Operating temperature Operating humidity Case materials ABS Dimensions 204x150x52mm Dimensions of installation 192x138mm 0 85kg Natural air cooling holes Weight Cooling method 479 Appendix IIl Hardware Overview MT4300 Dimensional Drawing Unit mm inch Front View Side View 204 8 03 2 2 05 max 150 5 91 Top View Panel installation holddown grrove totally four E A Rear View 192 7 56 138 5 44 480 Appendix Ill Hardware Overview 4400T Basic Parameters 4400T Case color Black Touch screen 4 wire precision resistance network 200MHz RISC 8M FLASH 16M SDRAM COM port 2 RS 232 485 422 1 USB SLAVE Printer port 1 DB25 General specifications 21 28VDC_ working current Max 400mA 24V starting current Power supply MAX 600mA 24V Complies with EN61000 6 4 2001 EN55011 EN61000 6 2 2001 CE certification EN6100
128. Reverse Scaling Scale Lower Limit State Mum The moving modes are described as follows X Scaling Y Scaling When this option is selected the component will move horizontally along the X axis At this time the input maximum minimum value will be invalid the first register stores component state and the second register stores position When this option is selected the component will move vertically along the Y axis At this time the input maximum minimum value will be invalid the first register stores component state and the second register stores position When this option is selected the component will move along the X amp Y axis At this time the input maximum minimum value will be invalid the first register stores component state the second register stores X position and the third register stores Y position When this option is selected the component will move horizontally along the X axis only but the user can set relative movement position by set input register value limits and scaling value limits for example when the read PLC register value range is O 1000 but the relative moving position range on the screen is 0 640 The lower and upper limits of the scaling value can be set to 0 and 640 respectively the lower and upper limits of the input value can be set to 0 and 1000 respectively The first register stores component state and the second register stores position When this option is se
129. Set OF when Window MM asinized Several modes of the function of the bit setting component are listed here as the following table decribes Type and Functions of Bit Setting Components 131 Chapter 6 Components When the bit setting component is touched the corresponding PLC bit register is turned ON The state will be kept i e remains ON even after ON release When the bit setting component is touched the corresponding PLC bit register is turned OFF The state will be kept i e remains OFF even after release Toggle Every time the bit setting component is pressed the corresponding PLC bit register filp its current status once ON OFF OFF gt ON Toggles Reset Only while the bit setting component is held down pressed will the corresponding PLC bit register be turned ON Likewise when the switch is released the specified bit register is turned OFF Set ON at When the window containing this bit setting component is opened the window open corresponding PLC bit register is turned ON Set OFF at When the window containing this bit setting component is opened the window open _ corresponding PLC bit register is turned OFF Set ON at window close When the window containing this bit setting component is closed the corresponding PLC bit register is turned ON This operation is only applicable for local bit LB or LW x Set OFF at window close When the window containing this bit setting component i
130. Software HMIO whe KI Fie EditfE View Tools T Library D Windowiw HelpiH Rede Aaa Le O e 4 Hid dopa star m m paa TE ue co O FrameO Sane element window Connector Configuration edit window Bit Setting Indicator lamp Component aT Direct e F Graph element a window a mas Word Setting Mutiple State RMierlas Iw Function Parts Message winodow Mouse x 120 y 232 Width 120 Height 80 E Q o pp f a iS PES SD Os OC AMID E E Me i e pgOoOCSeOOSOT A ES BSE al p Project files window D i Vector Graph Project files window Project construct window f aa 0 HMI Hmo T 0 Framed 1 Framel F 2 Frame2 Project construct amp 3 Frames window T 4 Frame4 Number The Graph element Window includes Connector HMI PLC PLC Parts and Function Parts Connector Includes serial port connection Serial and Ethernet connection Ethernet HMI All models of eView MT4000 and MT5000 series HMI panel are listed here the users should select the proper model in accordance with the actual panel for their projects PLC All the PLCs supported by eView HMI panel system are listed here the user should select the proper model in accordance with the actual PLCs for their projects PLC Parts All the parts related to PLC registers are listed here including Bit Setting Part Switch Multi state Display Part Trend Graph Part XY Plot Part
131. T L i 1 1 Read d OL b L wy T wy After defining the variable compile the codes as follows int MacroEntry LWO divided by LW1 is LW2 LW2 W LWO_R LW1_R return 0 Save it to disk and the compilation of the macro is completed The system returns to configuration editing window Edit the following parameters Place two numeric input components corresponding to LWO and LW1 respectively Place a static text and enter to indicate a division operation Place a numeric display component corresponding to LW2 Select Double for Data Type Both integer place and decimal place are 4 Place a function key execute the macro and select macro_0 c in the drop down list box and 6 7J enter in the Tag tab as shown below 293 Chapter 9 Macro Function Key Component Attribution Function Key Trigger Addr Tag Graphics Position Switch Window Change E Eo Maco cena C Keyboard Fune foie 8 Map Keyboard C Print Color Black and White Miedo I Text P Indicator Magnify Multiple 10 F Trend Graphics T All Bitmap PF AllVectorGraph F Background The configuration window is shown as follows i U Perform offline simulation and enter 5 and 2 in LWO and Lw1 respectively and press to obtain the result as follows According to our estimation the result shall be 2 5 instead of 2 What is the problem If the user is famili
132. V5000 Library in the Project File Window so that the user can view and use the shapes conveniently Import Graphics e S000_UNICODE_ENU B cygwin O driver connector 7 C Program C Program O HMI Files e 5000_U Fileste 5000_U O include ple PLOGE O printer gt SYSTEM mm alarm O arrow O balloon O button O lamp O others OD pipe DB port O rectangle kr gt Type Vector graph vz State 0 Import A vectogram may include 32 states and it can be use in two modes static vectogram without changing states or indicator of a multi state part Vectogram Vectogram 0 database Vectogram State 0 State 1 Vectogram 2 State 2 State m Vectogram n gt Procedure of creating a new vector graph 1 Select New Graphics in the Library Menu or click the I icon on the toolbar the following dialog box appears LibraryiD wWindow W HelptH Text Labrary T Hi Address Tagle Fg Alarm Information LogOnt a El Event Information LagOntE E PLC ControliP New GraphicstG Ya Import Graphics Labrary tI hi Macrocode M1 111 Chapter 5 Basic Design of EV5000 State Width f Vector Graphics Height File Hame ei textitext_O0livg Description 2 Name the vector graph select Vector Graphics and enter the number of state that vector graphic has The size of the graphic and the filename can be designated here too For better und
133. Video l ET 1 Click the icon drag it to the window and the Basic Attribution tab of the Video Component Properties dialog box appears Video Frequency Component Attribution Basic Attribution Position Pricrity Input Address Output Address HM HMIO PLC HM Addr Type Ly Addr Addr Type Addr Code Type BIN FormatDDODD Code Type Format ODODG Word Ba WiordNo oO Description YOO Input Address Four consecutive word registers are used for save parameters of the Video Component The Input Address indicates the starting address of those word registers The first word indicates channel switching the two channels are Channel 0 and Channel 1 the second word indicates brightness adjustment adjustable range 0 255 the third word indicates the contrast adjustment adjustable range 0 255 and the fourth word indicates chroma adjustment adjustable range 0 25 Address The starting offset address of the word register corresponding to a video component Code Type BIN or BCD No of Words This cell is automatically filled with 4 the user can t change it eUse Address Tag Whether to use the address entered in the address tag For details refer to Section 6 35 Description A reference name not displayed that you assign to the video component 2 Goto the Position tab and adjust the position and size of the video component if necessary Note Video components can only be placed in a p
134. Window Click Window in the main menu bar and the following dropdown menu appears The functions of Cascade Tile Horizontally and Tile Vertically are respectively as follows Cascade is used to display windows in a cascade sequence Tile Horizontally is used to display a window in Horizontal tile mode and Tile Vertically is used to display a window in vertical tile mode Tr Window w HelptH Cascade Tile Horizontally Tile Vertically The Tile Horizontally window is shown as follows 56 Chapter 3 Description of the eV5000 Software The Tile Vertically window is shown as follows 3 1 7 Help Users can find software version information here 57 Chapter 3 Description of the eV5000 Software eV S000 Configuration Edit Software Version 1 2 3 4 Build 59 Copyright C 2007 2017 Kinco Electric Shanghai Ltd All rights reserved 3 2 Graph element Window By default there are three important windows displayed within the EV5000 user interface They are not real windows The definition of window will be described in the next chapter The window here refers to a special area related to all components of a project The three windows provide global information of the whole project The three windows are Graph element Window Project File Window and Project construct Window which will be described one by one in the following 58 Chapter 3 Description of the eV5000
135. Window 4 Nenu wk Bor 11 Press function keys in a fast selection window to switch from window 0 to window 4 press Return to return to window 0 Then press Return in window 0 to return to window 4 228 Chapter 6 Components Basic Window 4 Common indow 1 Nenu wk Bor 12 Press Pop up Window in window 0 to pop up window 7 as shown in the figure below The user can move minimize or close the pop up window lt Basic Window i Basic _Hindow 8 Fommon Window 1 Menu isk Bar 13 Press Fast Selection Window 5 in the fast selection window to switch to fast selection window 5 as shown in the figure below 229 Chapter 6 Components Basic Window O primon Window l Window 1 Menu isk Bar 14 Press Common Window 1 or Common Window 6 to switch between common windows a Basic Window Window 6 fommon Window 1 Common Nindow 1 Nenu ek Bar 230 Chapter 6 Components es i oe Basic Window O Common Window 6 brmon Window 6 Common odbere Popup Fast Select vindow 7 Window 2 window f Menu isk Bar 6 29 2 Keyboard Function Function Key Component Attribution Function Key Trigger Addr Tag Graphics Position C Switch Window Change O Frame Escute Marco Kevboard Func Map Keyboard Mapping Rey Color f Black and White E klulticolor w Text Tool Fen 10 z I Indicator v Trend Graphics Fen Color Print Page en
136. Word Use Addr Tag Word Ho 1 Use Addr Tag Description SwWD2 _ y Word Setting Component Attribution Inc Value Upper Limit 9 Word setting Component Attribution Basic Attribution Multi State setting Tag Graphics Position SettngMode Sub value Dec value Batkorn Overlap the component whose Setting Mode is Sub Value on the multi state component created earlier whose type is also deduction and whose address is LW9000 Overlap the 287 Chapter 8 Recipe Data component whose Setting Mode is Add Value on the multi state component created earlier whose type is also addition and whose address is LW9000 In this way when we browse recipe data the value of LWO changes to indicate the group number of the current data Place a keypad on the window and make some text decoration and the project is completed Recipe Card Group Aids Recipe Data RWI LHJH Subtraction Overlay LH SUB 44166 4164 LW9666 ADD ates rra E Overlay LW ADD Save it to disk compile it and run the project in the offline simulation mode ra im p Recipe Card Group 0 Recipe Data RHIO RUT O eine meg e LW9660 Subtraction Overlay LHO SUB LH9000 ADD Overlay LHO ADD 4X100 4x104 Enter the above mentioned ten groups of recipes into the recipe memory Then we turn to the group 8 change the recipe name to KKKKKKKK change the data to 1234 and c
137. Y plot on one page the required registers in PLC cover a continous area of M X N X2 words as shown below X11 Y1 X12 Y12 XIN YAN 09 eee XM1 YM15 XMN YMN Note For Xj and Yj the subscript i indicates channel number and j indicates sampling point Xi indicates the horizontal axis value of the sampling point j in the channel i 141 gt Adding an XY plot component Chapter 6 Components 1 Click the XY plot icon and drag it to the window the Basic Attribution tab of the Component Attribution dialogbox appears XY Graph Component Attribution Basic Attribution er Graphics Channel Position Priority Input Address Output Address Hbl HiO PLC GR H PLC Addi Type Li Add O Addr Type Adar Code Type BIN Foma DOODOO Cade Type Format DDODO Word a wordo pai Description aro Priority Reserved function not used for the time being Input Address PLC word register address corresponding to the designated X axis track data the word address corresponding to Y axis is input address 1 If there are more than one channel the corresponding address of the second channel is X axis input address 2 X number of sampling points Y axis input address 2 X number of sampling points 1 and so on Address The address of the word register corresponding to the XY plot Code Type BIN or BCD No of Words Depend on the number of channels number of sampling points and current addres
138. YOO1 vg Bit State Bit State Lamp i Setting lt im E 1234 A H T HMI Bit State Direct Window ome Switch E C HMI ee ey RRENEN su KY 1 Framei HMIO and PLC have SA ee Multiple State Multiple State corresponding contents 4 3 Frame3 Setting Display we TF 4 Framet Function Farts E Ato w Ready 4 PLC parts It includes various configuration parts as shown in the following figure Bik State Bit State Lamp Bit State Setting Switch 7 ES L ik Moving Animation Alarm Display Component Ly E Event Display Indirect Number Window Display Mote Book Mouse x 70 y 215 PLC Parts il Ge Direct Window Multiple State Multiple State Multiple State Setting We Z Trend Curve Plot ie Text Display Number Input 61 Display Switch Y Wl 6S Bar Picture Meter ie rr Text Input scillograph F wf Scroll Bar Eu Recipe Data a Video Chapter 3 Description of the eV5000 Software After creating a project and switch to the configuration screen edit window you can drag parts to be used into the configuration window For the detailed instruction for using the PLC parts please refer to Chapter 6 5 Function Parts Function Parts the gt a a i oil gt wtf Fa Sa TA I h A GO YB a is Scale Function kew Alarm Bar Timer BitMap vector graph MotePad Function parts include Function keys Scale Alarm
139. a selected the alarm lamp will be displayed in the right part of the taskbar as shown in the above figure Nenu wk Bar Include fast selection window Determine whether to include the fast selection window If this check box is selected the user can use the parts in the fast selection window to switch over between different windows If this check box is not selected the fast selection window will not appear Quicken pop up of taskbar Whether to quicken the pop up speed of the taskbar Quicken fast selection window Whether to quicken the pop up speed of the fast selection window Background color Select the background color of the taskbar from any of the following colors or selectCustom to configure your own color Background Color a Bu Default Color SEG S HETE ES p E E SHE g O E O MASO Custom Color Undefined area color When you touch an undefined touch area that is the area outside the valid touch area of the touchable parts but still within the outline of the parts the touch lamp will blink a color different from the color when touching the valid area of the touchable parts The color for the non effective touch is set here CPU lamp color Set the color of the CPU lamp Alarm lamp color Set the color of the alarm lamp Touch lamp frame color Set touch lamp frame color Touch un workspace area color Displays the touch lamp color when touching a non working area Touch workspace color D
140. a a a eens 430 CHAPTER 17 NETWORKING OF MT5000 SERIES TOUCH SCREENG cc00 432 17 1 NETWORKING aean a a et tc a a a A A ORGEN 432 17 2 MUTUAL DOWNLOAD BETWEEN DIFFERENT TOUCH SCREENS cccseccccceecccccececcnseccecnseecs 445 APPENDIX SYSTEM MESSAGES eeeosssseecsssseccssseccccssscecsssesoccsssceccssssoccsssccccossseccsssseccsssseccsssse 446 MT5000 4000 SYSTEM MESSAGES TABLE c ccccceecccccsecccccccccccecccccecccccnscecccacececaucecccaceceesseceeaes 446 APPENDIX II TROUBLESHOOTING eessseeecsssseecssssccccssscecsssscoccssscoccsssseccossceccsssseccsssseccsssseecsssse 447 APPENDIX Ill HARDWARE OVERVIEW ccccccsssssssccccssssccccccsssccccccccscccccsccsccccccscesccccoes 450 INSTALLATION OF MT5000 SERIES TOUCH SCREENS ccccsecccccseccccceeccccccccccnsccccceucececacccecaueeees 450 INSTALLATION OVERVIEW ccs sae ae Sas an can ca en ne ee ee 450 2 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS nrinn e a A a e a 450 3 PROGRAMMING SOFT WARE noaren E EE T E T OA A T O E EA 459 RO Gr Pe CIC ION S aen steam t eee ees eenetosedee See aeptaneeese cous eh aces 460 eView MT5000 MT4000 Series Touch Screen User Manual Preface Preface Thank you for buying MT5000 and MT4000 series industrial embedded Human Machine Interface hereinafter referred to as HMI products HMI is a two way communication bridge between an operator and a machine A user can combine characters buttons fi
141. a window that appears by use of the function key in Pop up Window the position of the point at the upper left corner of the window will be displayed here The position of the origin of the screen is 0 0 and the origin point is the upper left corner of the screen Width Height A pop up window supports the setting of width and height smaller than the size of the screen of course However a basic window should be set to the default size that is the full screen size Print Page Indicate whether the window is used as the print window For more information about printing refer to chapter 10 Video Page Indicate whether to set the window as a video window Only the MT5600T and MT5700T have the video function Use Background Fill Effect To fill the background of window with the patterns or colors check this option Fill Color and Background Color Select according to the fill style used for the description of the fill effect toolbar please refer to Chapter 3 The selected fill color is the impression color and the background color is the fill pattern color Fill style O is used by default that is a pure color In this case only the fill color is displayed Pop up Window Type Track Monopoly Truncate and Coherence These parameter types indicate the relationship between a pop up window and its adjacent window If a window has the property of Monopoly before the window appears its father window 91 Chapter 4 Windows will b
142. abel exceeds two lines Left Right or Center can be selected for the alignment of the multiple lines Color The user can select from a palette of 40 frequently used colors among 65536 colors The Primary Color palette includes the most frequently used colors The Custom palette allows the user to customize a palette there are 65536 optional colors Ene Kal Color i ELANG jmp f gmn O EOR EU N m O EO EOSL Ate Ene 5 8 Taskbar and Task Buttons The eView5000 provides a simple method for window actions such as pop up or minimize change the display or quickly switchover between windows All these can be done with taskbar The taskbar provides two task buttons one is used to control the Fast Selection window and the other is used to control the taskbar itself In the HMI Attribution dialogbox in the project window double click the HMI icon or right click and select Attribution to open it the user can set the taskbar including whether to use the Fast Selection window color position and other related properties By default all the items in the taskbar are selected Frint Setting serial Port O Setting Serial Port 1 Setting Task Bar HHI Extend Attribution Background Color Button Position Align lett Use Touch Contol E Undefined Area Color Text Align Align lett M Include CPU Lamp M CFU Lamp Color Hide F 5 Window Hide Task Bar W laclidedlannLamp im Alarm Lamp Color Menu Task Bar iM Include
143. according to different ports Must be the same as the Data Bits 7ors COM port settings of the PLC Must be the same as the Stop Bits 1 or2 COM port settings of the PLC 9600 19200 38400 Must be the same as the Bits per Second 9600 57600 115200 COM port settings of the PLC Even parity odd Must be the same as the Parity Odd parity parity none COM port settings of the PLC Must be the same as the PLC Station No 1 0 255 COM port settings of the PLC Note The PLC station No for FP series is usually 1 by default However due to special control of FP3 its PLC station No must be 0 Pay attention to the communication settings of the PLC during connection PLC software setting Please refer to related PLC programming software user manual of NAIS Reference website Http www aromat com Operable address range PLC Address Operable Lon Description Type Range Pp XO 0 9999F DDD H External input node a 0 9999F DDD H External output node 391 Chapter 14 Connection of eView MT5000 4000 with Common PLCs 0 9999F DDD H Internal auxiliary node 0 9999 Link control node Timer node Counter node Set value register of timer counter Actual value register of timer counter Data register Note D indicates decimal notation H indicates hexadecimal notation and the value range is 0 F The operable range in the above table indicates the operable range of the MT5000 4000 touch screen The actual range of
144. acro _0 8 error parse error before numeric constant K macro _O c In function macro main For programs used to modify macro instructions refer to Chapter 9 449 Appendix Ill Hardware Overview Appendix Ill Hardware Overview Installation of MT5000 Series Touch Screens 1 Installation Overview 1 1 Installation Environment MT5000 series touch screens are industrial products designed for factory eee applications They are designed to work stably in most industrial Application environments at the temperature of 32 113 F 0 45 C They may not be environment l l 2 applied to some specific outdoor environments For specific outdoor applications do consult your vendor NEMA rating NEMA stands for National The front panel of MT5000 series touch screens conforms to the specifications of NEMA 4 When the product is correctly installed in a panel in compliance with the NEMA 4 specifications the panel still meets the Electrical es cin ben protection requirements of NEMA 4 that is no liquid will seep through the Manufacturers oo hs _ panel when the panel surface is sprayed with liquid Association It is proved by test that MT5000 series touch screens meet CE standard In other words the circuit design of the product is able to withstand the Electrical interference of electrical noise but it cannot eliminate electrical noise under environment l l i all circumstances Correct cabling and correct ground
145. age control the increase or decrease of the Input Address value The actual Alarm Display component AL_0 is placed on top of the vectogram The alarm messages appear in the Alarm Display when the system runs The effect diagram is shown as follows va Alarm Display Alarm Display Sluice valve is OFF Power A is OFF Pouer C is OFF Pouer D is OFF Power B is OR 6 20 Trend Curve PA Trend Ire The Trend Curve periodically retrieves a block of PLC data and displays the trend data over time As each sampling period elapses the new data is read from the PLC and inserted towards the right side of the trend graph The trend graph is retrieved on a real time basis Yield Efficiency Vectogram background Scales Trend Graph Hinutes 183 Chapter 6 Components Yield Efficiency The newest data is inserted into the left side and the track is shifted right Hinutes An example of a typical trend curve is shown as the above A vectogram is used for the background and scales are added to show relative information about the trend The trend graph is then placed on top of the vectogram gt Procedure to add trend curve 1 Click the Trend Curve component icon and drag it to the window the basic attribution tab of the component attribution dialogbox appears Trend Graph Component Attribution Basic Attribution Trend Graphics Channel Position Priority Input Address Output Address HM HMId
146. al Disk C4 hs DVD Drive Ds H Shared Documents 4 4 kinco s Documents a My Network Places ey ENG 4 Select the proper communication connection mode for the project The MT5000 touch penel supports serial port and Ethernet connection while the MT4000 series supports only the serial port now further revision will support Ethernet also Click Connection in the Component Library window there are two icons represent serial port and Ethernet mode respectively Click the icon of the proper communication mode to select hold and drag it to the Project Structure Window A wire appears in the Project Structure Window 15 Chapter 2 Making a Simple Project Graph element window x Connector Ethernet 5 In the HMI window click to select the model of touch panel corresponding to the actual hardware hold and drag the icon to the Project Structure Window Release the mouse and the following dialog box appears Select Horizontal or Vertical display mode to view the touch panel in horizontal or vertical direction click OK 6 Select the proper PLC to be connected the PLCs supported by EV5000 are listed in the PLC window click to select hold and drag it to the Project Structure Window as shown in the following figure 7 Inthe Project Structure Window drag to place the HMI and PLC when the ports shown as the gray trapezoids of the HMI or PLC are close to the end of the wire the wire will automat
147. ally a window contains many parts of different kinds such as switches lamps numeric input parts and shape parts Parts are divided into two species PLC parts and Function Parts They can be found in the Graphic element Window Following a three step procedure the user can add a part to the window gt Process of adding a PLC part 1 Click to select then drag a part icon from the PLC component toolbox to the window editing area 2 After dropping the icon the Component Attribution dialog box of the part appears Set the properties of the part in this dialog box Attributions most frequently used are PLC input output address vectogram or bitmap label position and so on PLE Parts EY Bit Stake Bit State Lamp Bit Stake Direct Window Multiple State Multiple State Multiple State Setting Switch Setting Display Switch Fi Fa ae a pos ul Scroll Bar Moving Animation Alarm Display Trend Curve sYFlot Bar Picture Component il z NEI piZ Leo m al a Meter Recipe Data Event Display Indirect Mumber Text Display Mumber Input Window Display se amp YF Text Input scillograph Video Note Book LJ 105 Chapter 5 Basic Design of EV5000 Bit setting Component Attnbuotion Basic Attribution Bit State Setting Tag Graphics Position Priority Input Address Output Address Htl PUE Hl HMIO PLO Addr Type Addr Addr Type 0 Format DODO Format OD OOD Code Type Code Type
148. als provided by Schneider Electric 5 Communication module NOM 21X 00 applicable to Quantum series PLC RS232 eView MT5000 4000 touch Modicon PLC screen NOM 21X 00 series adapter COMO COM1 COM port 9 pin D SUB female connector 14 6 FACON PLC FAT E K Fatek Automation Connection of FACON FB Series PLC with eView MT5000 4000 Touch Screen 378 Chapter 14 Connection of eView MT5000 4000 with Common PLCs EV5000 software setting Recommended Optional Setting Precaution Setting Must be the same as the COM Data Bits T Torg port settings of the PLC Must be the same as the COM Stop Bits 1 1 or 2 port settings of the PLC Bits per P 9600 19200 38400 Must be the same as the COM Second 57600 115200 port settings of the PLC Even parity odd Must be the same as the COM Parity Even parity parity none port settings of the PLC PLC Station i ee Must be the same as the COM No port settings of the PLC PLC software setting Please refer to related PLC programming software user manuals Reference website HTTP www fatek com e Operable address range PLC Operable po Address Description Range Type X 0 9999 DDD External input node 0 9999 DDD External output node 0 9999 DDD Internal auxiliary node 0 9999 DDD Sequence control node 0 9999 DDD Timer node 7 C 0 9999 DDD Counter node HR 0 9999 DDD Data register TMR 0 9999 DDD Timer buffer Note D indicate decimal not
149. and then will erect one by one from right to left The speed is quick without intervals In the Timer tab select Delay for Response Mode and 10 for Execution Cycle as shown below Timer Component Attribution Timer Timer Function Basic Attribution Trigger Address Trigger Mode By reg address Hl E xe Cucle 1 00m 10 PLC No Response Mode Delay Address Type Response State On Address Repeat Times 1 Compile the codes and run the macros again We can see that the dominos will be fallen down or erected after a delay of 1 second We can see from the above example that the timer triggered macros can be used to conduct sequential operations to implement sequence and time control and to flexibly achieve desirable results 304 Chapter 10 Print Chapter 10 Print The print function is often used in the eView MT5000 4000 In this document there are two types of print operations One is the print through the Windows system and the other is the print through the touch screen This chapter describes only the print with the touch screen To use the print function with the touch screen it is necessary to enable the printer in the Print Settings tab in the HMI Properties window After that the MT5000 4000 will display a dedicated print window therefore if the print function is selected a maximum of five pop up windows can be displayed at the same time You can view the print window in the PLC Monitor of the online simula
150. appear after the current last state in the states preview window The latest added state will be selected and ready for editing gt eS eL E A statel statel w p Eno H D 3 Click thel icon in the Drawing Toolbar find the image you want to import click to open it For bitmap graphics you can only import a picture other editing operations such as line 117 Chapter 5 Basic Design of EV5000 drawing tools and other similar tools are disabled as shown in the following figures Lh i ie ia Sc o 2 Eee 100 E ESE NON 7 Ome a aes Kinco EERTE as defaultlog Sample Pictures File name Files of type Graphics File brop gif ipg Cancel 4 Click Save and close the bitmap editing window you can use it in the configuration window through the bitmap component c 1 3 1111114111111 wpj qq be i FilefF EditfE View Systemi LibraryiDo PLC Parts P Function Parts Toolsi Window HelptH 1 JE k Graph element window Project files window Bik Skate Setting mat Bik Stake Switch i Multiple Stake Multiple State Setting li Multiple State Switch Direck Window Connector 4 vector Graph A Htl PLC me E _CTRL_BAROOL 1 PLU Parts o EW _CTRL_BAROOZ w EW _BACKSPACEOO1 EW_CLOSEOO1 vg EW_CTRL_BAROOS vi 2 EY _DISP_BARDOL vg o EV _DISP_BARODZ vc Bit State Lamp EV _DISP_BARDOS vg EY
151. ar Graph Component Attribution Basic Attribution Bar Graphics Graphics Position Pricrity Input Address Output Address HMI HiO FLE Htl PLC Addr Type Lw Addr 0 Addr Type Addr Code Type BIN Foma DODDO Code Type Format OD DOD Word al lr Ta Wordho Use Addr Tac Description BRO Priority Reserved function not used for the time being Input Address The initial address of the word address corresponding to the bar graph Code Type BIN or BCD No of Words Restricted to 1 or 3 Set to 1 when the variable alarm is disabled Set to 3 when the variable alarm is selected For 3 words condition the Bar Graph component will receive three continuous data words one for data and two for upper and lower alarm limits Use Address Tag Whether to use the address entered in the address tag library For details refer to Section 6 34 Description A reference name not displayed that you assign to the bar graph component 2 Goto the Bar Graph tab Set the parameter as shown in the figure below 170 Chapter 6 Components Bar Graph Component Attribution Basic Attribution Bar Graphics Graphics Position Direction Variable Alarm E Bar Normal Color Min Value 0 Low Alarm 0 E Alarm Color Max Value 1 High Alarm 1 E Frame Color Background Direction Up Down Left and Right indicating the direction of the bar movement Variable Alarm If this check box is selected the upper and lower alarm
152. ar with the C language he will be aware of the reason quickly Because the data type for LWO_R and LW1_R is short according to the default type conversion principle of C language the division result will be rounded off to an integer How to solve the problem It is simple just convert an input value into the type of double LW2_W double LWO_R LW1_R 294 Chapter 9 Macro After modifying the macro conduct simulation again and the result will be Nenu wk Bar This simple example is complete However this segment of codes still has a problem What if the LW1 input is 0 We all know the number 0 cannot be a divisor In the C language if a number is divided by O in an operation it will cause the error of division by zero overflow In severe circumstance it may lead to program deadlock or exit The macro will encounter the error of division by zero overflow and affect normal operation of the system What shall we do then We have to check the operand Modify the codes as follows int MacroEntry Judge whether LW1 is 0 preventing division by zero overflow if LW1_R 0 LWO divided by LW1 is LW2 LW2 W double LWO_R LW1_R return 0 Run the macro again If the divisor is 0 the macro will not conduct the division operation thus enhancing the robustness of the codes 9 2 Operating Principles of Macro Template ad Read Write Variable As shown in the above section you may gain a preliminar
153. arameters in the Setting Option submenu in the Tools menu in the menu bar as shown in the following figure Toolsi LibrarviD Window HelptH Ca c mpiletc Ctrl F7 Ca Downloadi LD Chri D 2 Offline Simulation F F5 Indirect Online Simulation Shift F5 Direct Online Simulationi Ni Chrl F5 Options 2 Alt F7 69 Chapter 3 Description of the eV5000 Software Then the following dialog box appears 1 Download through USB cable Compile amp Download Option Compile W Compress Bitmap Size gt 1024 Download Download Device USE Serial Hao IP Address Fort Screen Grid Space Es Cancel A USB cable is included in the package of MT5000 4000 panel Connect MT5000 4000 panel to the USB port of the PC with that cable before download The USB client port on the MT4000 5000 panel can only be used for uploading downloading configuration package file and the logo file or setting the system parameters of the HMI panel Other USB devices such as printers and USB mass storage devices are not supported When using USB downloading cable for the first time the user should install the USB device driver manually Connect the panel and the PC with the cable fist power on the panel The windows OS will report that the system had just found a new hardware and start the wizard as the following figure shows The user can finish the installation by following the instruction below 70 Found New Ha
154. ardware Overview ations MT5300 Basic Parameters Case color Display Resolution Brightness Color Backlight Touch screen CPU Memory COM port Recipe memory Printer port Dark grey off white computer grey 320x240 dots 64K color 4 wire precision resistance network 200M 400MHZz RISC 8M FLASH 16M SDRAM 2 RS 232 485 422 1 10 100M Ethernet 1USB SLAVE 256K WORD 1 DB25 350 cd m 64K color 1CCFL General specifications Power supply CE certification FCC compatibility Dielectric strength test Insulation resistance Shockproof test Degree of protection Operating temperature Operating humidity Case materials Dimensions Dimensions of installation holes Weight Cooling method 21 28VDC working current Max 400mA 24V starting current Max 600mA 24V Complies with EN61000 6 4 2001 EN55011 EN61000 6 2 2001 EN61000 4 2 3 4 5 6 standard Complies with FCC Class A 500 VAC 1 minute Greater than 50M Q 500V DC 10 25Hz X Y Z direction 2G 30 minutes IP65 front panel 0 45 C 10 90 non condensing ABS 192x139x60mm 180x127 mm 0 85kg Natural air cooling 460 Appendix IIl Hardware Overview MT5300 Dimensional Drawing Unit mm inch Front View Side View 192 7 56 eee Max 139 5 48 Panel installation holddown grrove totally four Rear View 180 7 09 127 5 461 Appendix Ill Hardware Overview MT5400 Basic Paramet
155. at DOOOC word Use Addr Tag wordo Use Addr Tag C aiia S Description SWO Bit Control Component Attribution Basic Attribution Switch Tag Graphics Position Switch Type E The final display effect of window 4 is shown as follows SwWDO S5wWD1 Q Q SWO 1E Z y NDO ND1 ND2 ND3 EEEE EEE EERE EHHE TMO TMI TMe2 TM3 Save and compile it and then perform offline simulation The operation effect is shown in the figure below 193 Chapter 6 Components 91 Nenu Task B Click Stop and the trend graph will hold still Observe the page turning action For each page turning operation the position of the reference coordinate in the leftmost of the trend graph will move the distance of 5 the inc value or dec value in the multi state setting component sampling points There are totally 21 sampling points on the screen and the 20 equal scales divide the screen into 20 blocks Each block covers the distance of 2 sampling points 6 20 3 Time Display Add six numeric display components with three placed in the lower left corner of the trend graph and three in the lower right corner They represent the start point time HH MM SS and end point time HH MM SS of the coordinate respectively Where the addresses for them are respectively LW112 LW111 LW110 LW118 LW117 LW116 Numeric setting components are set as
156. ation The operable range in the above table indicates the operable range of the MT5000 4000 touch screen The actual range of the PLC may be broader or narrower than this range 379 Chapter 14 Connection of eView MT5000 4000 with Common PLCs e Detailed wiring diagram Note FACON FB series of PLCs cover two series of MA and MC and such models as FBE 20 28 40MA FBE 20 28 40MC and FBN 19 26 36MCT Where MA series standard CPUs provide one HCMOS serial port and MC series provide three serial ports 1 HCMOS amp 1 RS 232 amp 1 RS 485 MA series of CPUs have to be connected with the touch screen only after converting HCMOS into RS 232 RS 485 through the commutation interface module FB DTBR or FB DTBR E 1 CPU FACON FB PLC MC series CPU RS 232 eView MT5000 4000 touch screen interface COMO0 COM 1 15 pin D SUB female connector 2 Communication module FB DTBR DTBR E FACON FB PLC eView MT5000 4000 touch FB DTBR DTBR E screen communication module COM0 COM 1 RS 232 interface 15 pin D SUB female connector 380 Chapter 14 Connection of eView MT5000 4000 with Common PLCs 3 Communication module FB DTBR DTBR E FACON FB PLC eView MT5000 4000 touch FB DTBR DTBR E screen communication module COM0 COM 1 RS 232 interface 9 pin D SUB female connector 4 Communication module FB DTBR DTBR E FACON FB PLC FB DTBR DTBR E communication module RS 485 port 3 pin terminal block eView MT5000 4000 to
157. ation module CPM1 CIF11 OMRON PLC MT5000 4000 touch screen CPM1 CIF11 adapter COM0 COM1 RS422 interface 5 pin terminal block Connection of OMRON CQM Series PLC with eView MT5000 4000 Touch Screen EV5000 software setting Recommen Optional Setting Precaution ded Setting PLC PLC Type OMRON OMRON RS232 RS485 Must be the same as the Data Bits Torg COM port settings of the PLC Must be the same as the COM port settings of the PLC 9600 19200 38400 Must be the same as the Bits per Second 9600 57600 115200 COM port settings of the PLC Even parity odd Must be the same as the Parity Even parity parity none COM port settings of the PLC Must be the same as the PLC Station No 0 255 COM port settings of the PLC 345 Stop Bits 1or2 Chapter 14 Connection of eView MT5000 4000 with Common PLCs PLC software setting Set the communication protocol of the COM port to Hostlink Refer to related PLC programming software user manual of OMRON Reference website HT TP oeiweb omron com oei TechManuals PLC htm Operable address range PLC Operable ISS Address Description Range Type OO R 0 65535 DDD BB I O and internal relay 0 65535 DDD BB Holding relay AR DDD BB Auxiliary relay 2 a a eS ae Note D indicates decimal notation B indicates bit code and the value range is 0 15 The operable range in the above table indicates the operable range of the MT5000 4000 touch screen Th
158. atively you can also use the internal register of the HMI For internal registers of HMI refer to Section 5 4 Please note that some internal registers of the HMI are reserved by the system Do not use these registers For details refer to Chapter 11 Address The initial address of the word registers corresponding to the curves in the oscilloscope component Code Type BIN or BCD No of Words Depends on the number of sampling channels curves If the number of channels is N 1 lt N lt 16 which means there are N curves to be shown the No of Words is N Use Address Tag Whether to use the address entered in the address tag library For details refer to Section 6 35 Description A reference name not displayed on the runtime screen that you assign to the 211 Chapter 6 Components oscilloscope component 2 Go to the Oscillogram tab to set related parameters Oscillopraph Component Attribution Basic Attribution Oscillagraph Channel Position Type ie Att StartfromLe Sam Time 1 PageNum 10 SamAatia 1 W Save Time SamPlot 10 Channel 2 Control Address HMI PLC No Addr Type Addres CodeTyppe wordLen i Keep HMC 0 E J Foma DOODOD w Roll Hie oO Lw 5 BIN 3 W Time HMC O 10 BIN Type Single page or multiple pages If the user selects the single page mode it will only display the data change of the sampling values in the current page It does not allow the extens
159. aution The system designer should be aware that devices in controller systems could fail and thereby create an unsafe condition Furthermore electrical interference in an operator interface such as an MT5000 touch screen can lead to equipment start up which could result in property damage and or physical injury to the equipment operator If you or your company use any programmable control systems that require an operator or attendant you should be aware that this potential safety hazard exists and take appropriate precautions Although the specific design steps depend on your particular application the following precautions generally apply to installation of solid state programmable control devices In addition these precautions conform to the guidelines for installation of controllers as recommended in the NEMA ICS 3 304 Control Standards 453 Appendix Ill Hardware Overview Programming To conform to ICS Safety Recommendations checks should be placed in the controller to ensure that all poneciaens writable registers that control critical parts of plant or machinery have limit checks built into the program with AN an out of limit safe shutdown procedure to ensure safety of personnel ICS 3 304 81 Safety Recommendations Consideration should be given to the use of an emergency stop function which is independent of the programmable controller Where the operator is exposed to the machinery such as in loading or unloadi
160. be of the same size as Window 3 102 Direct Window Component Attribution Basic Attribution Direct Hindow Position Priority Hormal Input Address Output Address HMI HHMIO Hhal Htl Add Type LB Add 5065 Add Type Code Type BIN FotmatDDDDD Code Type EIN wordo UsedddrTag 9 WordNo 1 Description DWO Direct Window Component Attribution Basic Attribution Direct Window Position Window No 3 Frames k The entire project is shown as follows Chapter 4 Windows 0 Addr Format DDDOL Use Add Tag Save compile and make offline simulation of the project 103 Chapter 4 Windows Number input Nenu Task B 4 Click Number Input part Upon LWO input a keypad appears below the component for you to input After the input the Keypad automatically disappears as shown in the following figure Tin PREPS FRRRRRRRE AAAAAAAA cn ba fe bs E Number 4 bo ee SHB Ei aes 4 7 Window related Components Function keys directly related to windows include Change Basic Window Return to Previous Window Change Common Window Pop up Window and Change Fast Selection Window Components directly related to windows include Direct windows and indirect windows For the contents of these components refer to related contents in Chapter 6 Components 104 Chapter 5 Basic Design of EV5000 Chapter 5 Design with EV5000 Some Basic Knowledge 5 1 Parts Gener
161. board component If there are several message boards the contents must be consistent as they share the same storage area Data in the message board will not be saved and will get lost after power failure of the HMI Do not write recordable messages on the message board 6 29 Function Key E Function ker The Function Key can be used to change screen display input digit or ASCII character maximize or minimize window and move window design message board or print gt Procedure to add a Function Key 1 Click the Function Key icon and drag it to the configuration edit window and the Function Key Component Attribution dialogbox appears Click the Function Key tab to set the various function and behavior of function key component These functions are Switch Window Keyboard Function Message Board and Print The details about these functions are discussed below Function Key Component Attribution Function Key Trigger Addr Tag Graphics Fosition C Gwich Window f Excute Marca f Keyboard Func eI C Map Keyboard Mapping Key t Print Color C Message Board 2 Magnify Multiple Print Page e fe rc ay rc pS ie Trigger Address tab is reserved for special use don t change the default setting here before contacting Stepservo Technician Go to the Tag tab Select use tags and input the proper tag for the function key Go to the Graphics tab Select vectogram or bitmap to display states C
162. book Component is like the Notebook Program in the Windows Operating System The user can input text contents in the component area Operations such as Copy Cut and Paste are supported These functions are implemented by Function Key component The Notebook Only functions of the Function Key are listed in the following figures 257 Chapter 6 Components Function Eey Component Attribution X Function Key Trigger Addr Taz Graphies Position Switch Window Change O Framel Excute Marco z Keyboard Func Cursor Mapping Key Message Board eS D Trend Graphics f Pen Color Al Bi All Bitmap eo f Curent f Horizontal i Pen Width E All Vectorlaraph C Clear c Hest C Vertical Background Figure 1 shows the functions related to move the cursor There are eight functions Move up Move down Move left Move right Line head Line tail First Position and Last Position Move up move the cursor up to the previous line if the cursor is on the first line it will remain in current position Move down move the cursor down to the next line if the cursor is on the last line of the Notebook it will remain in current position Move left move the cursor left by one character if the cursor is on the head of a line it will move to the end of the previous line If it is on the head of the Notebook it will remain in current position Move right move the cursor right b
163. ce a maximum of 10 receiving nodes can be configured in the same transmission cable Among all these nodes one is the master node and the others are slave nodes Slave nodes cannot communicate with each other Therefore RS 422 interface supports point to multipoint bidirectional communication Since the 4 wire RS 422 interface adopts independent transmission and receiving channels it is unnecessary to control data direction Any necessary handshaking between different devices can be implemented either in software mode XON XOFF handshaking or in hardware mode a pair of independent twisted pairs A A Pe ache the ec a Smeaton A 4 he B B A A O T es fa sk Sh e oc E Sen a OS a iP a a S Scare ae Nae ys a T i B B i 9 A We We GWG GWG G RILIR RO e3 fe wy ARIER GWG Eyit 339 Chapter 13 Serial Communication RS 422 interfaces support a maximum transmission distance of 4000 feet about 1219 meters and a maximum transmission rate of 10 Mb s Where the length of the balanced twisted pair is in inverse proportion to the transmission rate and the maximum transmission distance can be achieved only at the rate of 100 Kb s The maximum transmission rate can be achieved only within a very short distance In general a twisted pair as long as 100 meters can have a maximum transmission rate of 1 Mb s RS 422 needs a terminating resistor while its resistance is equal to the characterist
164. ceesceueseseceuecceaeces 179 O IOA ARM DO 17 ote er tee ep er ae PTR Er my PETC POE Er oT SO a a OT ER EN 181 620 PRNO O UAE ee eet Rn TRI ene me TIE ETO e Ee TSeT ECE EO ETT nee Ee SR eTEe TT EN Setters ERECT Cer 183 6 2 1 RECIPE DATA ranee a cacy bet te acta Seniesa turns ate aia Dea et sales eae es eer t at 196 6 22 EVENT ENTRY EVENT INFORMATION LOGON sssccsscccsssssssscessccessessssccessccessesssscseesecesseeenees 196 OF alt 4 el BD S a E EEE EE EAE CANES EATER E RNY AAA ERI TAE EEIE mee ENT EEEE mE NIT Senay Sine 200 O24 ALARM BAR masr ne ene Re ene RE ee nRE eee eee Ee eee eee nE ee eee cern ene een 207 fe Ao 1 LEO S COPE Jenn oon ve SED Tee DUD Tee Ee eae eT Tne Ne Se enn ee eR oe 210 A Gees Oy El Seen en Ee Ce er OE Pee eee ee ee ee ee oe 214 602 AEs 1 21 8 IR ws 2 eer rere me tener bere Ene en E eon Te aL en E Ronen ee Re on ee 215 6 20 MESSAGE BOARD NOTE FAD eegun nana A NA 218 6 29 FUNCTION KEY EAEE AEE EEEE EEEE E EE ea AEEA EEE 223 OOTI ER aaa a E E A A E enn eee Ree 233 6 31 VIDEO COMPONENTS ONLY APPLICABLE TO MT5600T MT5700T cccccccccceeessseeceeeessees 239 6 32 BITMAP COMPONENT m ec a A ee 244 6 39 VECTOGRAM COMPONENT nrraninka aaa erection scence Sataeaebnooerence 245 oer E N 27 1 2 A AA E EA E A E A E EE AT 245 6 35 ADDRESS TAG sxe acess ee RS 248 6G od na O 11121 Ieee nen eer ee wee Bn AEE LOE SEOMER URE EN SE ROER Serena ESE OER SETA a SMT ETtER TPT RES RT ETIE Cy 251 6 37
165. ching the task button This window will be always displayed on the screen unless it s hided by a task button So it can be used for placing function keys which switch over windows or other commonly 87 Chapter 4 Windows used objects By default Window 2 is the fast selection window If another window is set to be the fast selection window the window should be of the same size as the fast selection window Common window The common window will always be displayed on the screen A part to be always displayed can be placed in the common window Thus you can view the state or operation of the component at any time By default Window 1 is the common window The function key Change Common window can be used to change other window to be the current common window However there is only one current common window Bottom Window A maximum of three underlay windows can be set for the window in the Window Properties dialog box Normally the bottom window is used to store common components shared by multiple windows such as background images graphs titles and so on Any window can be set as a bottom window Window Attribution findow Safe Level Lowe Special Attribute E Position Use Background Color D y D P width 320 Height 240 Transparence ga Bottom window 1 None ki 3 Frame Pop Window Type W Tracking Monopoly 0 F Color pices ssa W Clipping Coherence Lok As shown in the figu
166. counterclockwise until the gap is wide open insert the wire all the way in and turn the screw clockwise until it s tight Connect positive DC line to the 24V terminal and the DC ground to the OV terminal a Chassis ground must be used DC ground is not directly coupled to earth ground internally It is preferable not to ground DC negative return to chassis ground as poor site earths can introduce noise into a system but if necessary an earth connection should be made from the power supply 452 2 2 3 CE Requirements Appendix Ill Hardware Overview return point to the star earth point Ground conductors should be as short and as large in size as possible The conductors must always be large enough to carry the maximum short circuit current Ground conductors should be connected to a star earth ground point This ensures that no ground conductor carries current from any other branch To make the MT5000 series comply with EMC directives and to reduce susceptibility to electrical interference a separate 14 AWG ground wire should be taken to the chassis ground terminal of the power connector This ground connection should be run directly to the star earth connection point 2 2 4 Safety Guidelines This section presents recommended installation practices and procedures Since no two applications are identical these recommendations should be considered as guidelines Hardware Considerations AN C
167. croll bar Set the scrolling address the same as the address of the scrolling bar component to be associated For details refer to Scroll Bar Time When the Save Time check box is selected the Time box in the lower part of the window will be activated It includes 12 words used to save the time of the latest sampling point The 12 words contain the second minute hour day month year of the start point and the second minute hour day month year of the end point in the current page Each word 185 Chapter 6 Components represents a time point 3 Goto the Channel tab and set related parameters of each track Trend Graph Component Attribution Basic Attribution Trend Graphics Channel Fosition T 1 signed int 0 F 1 1 signed int j A 2 1 signed int 5 5 1 signed int Oo 5 EN Color Designate the color of each track Line Width The width of a line including 8 options Data Type Set the data type with only two options of signed integer and unsigned integer Data type signed int_ signed int Max and Min Value in Y Direction Y zero and Y span Set the corresponding maximum and minimum values of each track line along the Y direction Click OK and adjust the position and size of the trend graph component Examples of a single page trend graph and a multi page trend graph 6 20 1 Single page Trend Graph Firstly create a project and save it Add a single page trend
168. ct Open Project Open an existing project Save Save the current project Save All Active Files Save all the currently opened active files Cut Cut 42 Chapter 3 Description of the eV5000 Software Copy Copy Paste Paste Multiple Paste Multiple copy Delete Delete a component Cancel Cancel the latest operation Restore Restore the latest cancelled operation Print Preview Print preview Print Print Properties Display the properties of an object Show Component Name Show the name of a component About EV5000 version description Multi Copy This function is used to make multiple copies of selected parts which can save more time Select components and click the lt 4 icon to copy multiple components as shown in the following figure 43 Chapter 3 Description of the eV5000 Software aa A CURD Ctrl Copytc Chrl c Address Auto Increase Delete pe Address Increment W Column 3 m E Mulki Copy Interval Horizontal Multi Vin vertical J S Attribution Swot LBO LB Bottom layer A configuration window appears for entering the copy quantity interval of the copies and some other options Attribution To change the attributions of a component select the component double click it or click the icon the Properties dialog box of the component appears The user can make editing in this dialog box Database Toolbar As shown in the following figure the contents
169. ct aa wp File Edit E View ToolsiT LibraryiD 2 Mewin Ctrl ey Open 0 Ctrl C m Savers Ctrl 5 Save 4s Ctrl Alk 5 i Save alla 1 E itextitext O1aa wpj 2 E itextybext O1 btext wpj 3 EN bext O1laa wpj Quiti all the current windows will be closed as shown below 31 Chapter 3 Description of the eV5000 Software FilefFi Edit E view ToolsfTi Libraryilo PLC PartsfP Function Partsi Windowt HelpfH i EF E EE _ ele 1 B h e E LEa aea B a mu me Z LL J 3 Connector Hhil PLE PLC Parts aw S Bit State Bit State Lamp Setting E Bit State Direct Window Switch ao U Multiple State Multiple State Setting Display i un Multiple State Scroll Bar Switch Function Parts Mouse x 396_y 57 te Files recently opened the program automatically remember the most recently opened 3 files name and path the user can quickly open them in the File Menu File Edit E Viewtv ToolstT Library HE Newt Ctrl M ES Open 0 Chrl c zl Savers Ctrl 5 Save 5 Chrl Alk 5 Gl Save Alia Closefic 1 Fiibext O1ybext O1 woj 2 E aalaa wo Exit Select Exit in the File menu to exit the EV5000 configuration software 32 Chapter 3 Description of the eV5000 Software 3 1 2 Edit Undo Use this function to undo the latest operation the screen will return to the state before this operation click the ic
170. ct Hame 447204427 Click OK it will eject the uploading password window as follows w eh EVEanazer Communication Set Download Operate g Communication Type USB port 2 system Operate I Get Version Upload Section Upload User Data Upload Password Dialog Hox Please input upload password 332 Chapter 12 Security Level Default password is 888888 you can change this password as you like Input the password click the button OK A E Eanazer Se a O ej Est Download Operate ce Communication Type B port IP HULL PORT NULL 3 System Operate Serial No MULL Sat a i cl E Get Version Upload Section Upload User Data Hanager 100 E Eanager Nessage Ea Macro File Uploading Upload success After seconds you can get the file pkg as follows aga pke HOW TO USE THE PKG FILE Run the software EVManger select the tab Download Operate configure the parameters right like the upload we did make a choice on the downloading file you want Here we select the file aaaa pkg which we uploaded M E Nanager Communication Set Communication Type USE port J Upload Operate IP MULL EY System Operate Serial NO NULL aye Get Version Download Section LOGO Show Set Download User Data Show LOGO Download Recipe UnShow LOGO Download LOGO 333 Chapter 12 Sec
171. ct Logic series screen RS 232 interface COM0 COM1 6 pin RJ 11 female connector Note Port1 amp Port2 of the DLOS series Port1 amp Port2 of the DL240 series Port1 of the DL250 series Port1 of the DL350 series and Port2 of the DL450 series are all RJ 12 hardware interfaces The wiring method for them is the same as that shown in the above figure Please note that the address of some ports is 1 invariably but the address of some other ports has to be set Make sure the communication protocol of the port is set to K sequence Pin assignment of RJ 11 6 pin Female Connector 2 CPU DL250 CPU Port2 RS232 KOYO PLC eView MT5000 4000 touch DL250 CPU screen RS 232 port2 COMO0 COM 1 15 pin SVGA female connector Note Port2 of the DL250 CPU combines RS 232 electrical interface and RS 422 electrical interface Please pay attention to the setting of the type during use 364 Chapter 14 Connection of eView MT5000 4000 with Common PLCs n 2 1 E 6 68 Pin Array of 15 pin SVGA D SUB Female Connector 3 CPU DL250 CPU Port2 RS422 KOYO PLC eView MT5000 4000 touch DL250 CPU screen RS 422 port2 COMO COM1 15 pin SVGA female connector 11 RTS 14 CTS 12 RTS 15 CTS Note Port2 of the DL250 CPU combines RS 232 electrical interface and RS 422 electrical interface Please pay attention to the setting of the type during use Rts 365 Chapter 14 Connection of eView MT5000 4000 with C
172. d 1 Use Addr Tag wodho 7 Use Addr Tag Description EDO Event Display Component Attribution Basic Attribution Event Display Component Position Row Space 5 Format ColSpace 5 Sequence No Event Trig Time Affimance Double clic Acknowledge Time Return to Normal Time L Extended Time FormatfD Ht I Short Time Format H M I Event Trig Date M D Extended Date Format y M D ad Acknowledge Color E BackTo Normal Color 203 Chapter 6 Components A vectogram is placed under the event display component to serve as the background image Add a bit state toggle switch to control the ON OFF state of the LB10 a static text with the content LB10 and a bit lamp for displaying the status of LB10 Add a static text component to display the content of Current temperature and a numeric input component for displaying and change the value of LW30 Add two Word Setting components for change the value of LW10 which is the input address of the event display component One of the two word setting component adds 1 to LW10 when pressed and the other substract 1 from LW10 current value when pressed The user can use the two buttons for view the event information on the event display area Note that lower and upper limits should be set for LW10 to avoid unpredicted errors Word Setting Component Attribution Basic Attribution Multi State Setting Tag Graphics Position Priority N
173. d Graphit M All Bitmap f Curent Horizonte i Be width 1 a LUMTE H Emig al wi All VectorGraph i Background Message Board Clear Next f Vertical A keypad is composed of a variety of function keys with different ASCII codes 0 1 2 and a b c and special keys such as Enter BS ESC and CLR etc Since any character can be assigned to a function key specialized keypads can be made for any application Keypads are used with the Numeric Input or Text Input components to enter numeric values Create a keypad for numeric input component 1 Create a new window place function key components used for input the numbers and characters 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ENT BS CLR as shown below 231 Chapter 6 Components 4 J 6 CLR rs 9 ESC Set the FK_0 for input digit 1 as follows KA EKE oFKE FF E E Function Key Component Attribution Function Key Trigger Addr Tag Graphics Postion C Switch Window Change O Framef gt Excute Marco Color Black and white f Multicolor Magnify Multiple 10 F Tet P Indicator P Trend Graphics Pen Co MM coo Print Page i mie f Horizontal ane Pen Width 1 F All VectorGraph Clear f Next f Vertical T Background Set other function keys FK_1 FK_14 as follows Other characters 2 9 0 ENT CLR BS LEE p 8 3
174. d eView HMltek Ltd will continuously provide drivers for various brands of printers Note The length of the connection cable of a printer shall not exceed 5m Pin Designations Pin assignment of 15 pin D SUB female parallel printer port Signal 13 DATA1 Output ground 12 13 14 15 DATA6 Output INIT Output PRINTER DATA3 Output nERROR Output GM lca DATAS Output oe jo easy fret DATA7 Output SW1 SW2 Working Mode E OFF JON Touch Screen Calibrate Mode ON OFF Firmware Update and Basic Parameter System Setting Mode In Setting Mode this mode the touch screen OFF OFF Application Online Operation Mode will start a built in system setting interface where the user can set such parameters as IP 2 3 5 DIP Switch address brightness contrast and buzzer A477 Appendix Ill Hardware Overview Touch Screen Calibrate Mode In this mode when you touch the screen the screen will display a sign through which you can calibrate the touch accuracy of the screen Firmware Update and Basic Parameter Setting Mode In this mode the user can update firmware set IP address and perform other lower level operations In general do not use this mode Application Online Operation Mode This is the normal working mode of MT4000 series touch screens The screen will display the starting picture of the downloaded project 2 4 CE Requirements MT 4000 series of touch scr
175. database for storing text contents which can be used as tags of components Text stored in the Text Library can be used for multiple components In this way repeated text input can be avoided To use text in the library select the check box Use Text Library in the Tag tab of the Component Attribution dialog box and select the text content you want to use One of the greatest features of the Text Library component is the multi language column feature Each text entry in the library has four columns where user can input the same text content in four languages The user can change the column being displayed by changing a system reserved register LW9130 The usage of Text Library is discussed in detail in this section Enter text content to the librarye 1 Click the icon or select Project Database gt Text Library and the text object library appears 245 Chapter 6 Components Text label list Languaget Language Language Languaged I language Settir Then press Add and the following text input dialog box appears Enter Name and No of States and click OK Add Text Mame Moname Sta Num 2 In this case the text is added to the text library Press the symbol after the Name and the following figure shows the set No of States Text label list Name Language Language2 Language Languages anguage S ettin 246 Chapter 6 Components 4 Then enter cha
176. ddr Code Type BIN Forma DODOL Code Type Format DOODO Word F Weed w ordNo Description TI Make a numeric input component to modify the LW9000 data Set Address Type to LW and Address to 9000 Set trigger address type to LB and address to 9000 It is shown in the following figure Data Input Component Attribution Basic Attribution Numeric Data Trigger Address Font Graphics Position Friority Input Address Output Address HMI HMIO FLE HMI PLC Addr Type Lw Add S000 Addr T ype Addr Code Type EBIN Format DODD Code Type Format CODD Ward 1 ita 1 WhondNo Description NID To verify whether the data is transferred place a text input component to display the RW300 data Set Address Type to RWI Address to 0 and Word No to 5 Set trigger address type to LB and address to 9000 It is shown in the following figure 277 Chapter 8 Recipe Data Text Input Component Attribution Basic Attribution Trigger Address Font Graphics Position Priority Normal Input Address Output Address HM HIO HMI HMig gt PLC OG Addr Type Ay Addr Addr Type Uw Addr 0 Code Type BIN Format ODDDDD Code Type EIN Format DODDD Word F Use Addr Tag Wordh a Use Addr Tag Description TH Place a keypad The completed project is shown in the figure below RHI G 44166 Save and compile the project run the project in the offline simulation mode Firstly change LW9000
177. de Font Align Language Chapter 3 Description of the eV5000 Software Content Text 16 Left English US4 H Color Text Library Mode In this mode you can use the text pre defined in the text library Text C Graphics Mode C Tag Mode Language Content 16 Left ES Color Font Size 8 16 24 32 48 64 72 and 96 pixels are optional Align The text alignment mode can be Left Right and Center Color Indicates the text display color Content Shows the text content on the part When using the text library the text content can only be edited in the text library For detailed description of the text library refer to Section 6 33 in Chapter 6 Picture This icon can be used to add pictures when creating bitmaps For related contents refer to Section 5 6 Bitmap Switch page Toolbar 52 Chapter 3 Description of the eV5000 Software Add Window SO Tate oo O Zoom Out Previous Window Zoom In Current Window ext Window Add Window Adds a configuration window Previous Page Goes to the previous configuration window Current Page Shows the current configuration window Next Page Goes to the next configuration window Zoom in Zooms in the current window Zoom Multiple 100 200 and 300 are optional Zoom out Zooms out the current window Line style toolbar 1 Pound DOO OOOO g pounds 2 Pounds 7 Pounds 3 Pounds 6 Pounds 4 Pounds
178. dia floppy CD ROM IY Include this location in the search D Program Files eV5000_UNICODE_ENU driver r Dont search will choose the diver to install 7 Choose this option to select the device driver from a list Windows does not guarantee that the driver you choose will be the best match for your hardware Found New Hardware Wizard Please wait while the wizard searches as eview USB Back Hegt gt Cancel 13 Chapter 3 Description of the eV5000 Software Found New Hardware Wizard Please wait while the wizard installs the software eview 1SA Hardware Installation The software you are installing for this hardware eview USB has not passed Windows Logo testing to venfy its compatibility with Windows XP Tell me why this testing is important Continuing your installation of this software may impair or destabilize the comect operation of your system either immediately or in the future Microsoft strongly recommends that you stop this installation now and contact the hardware vendor for software that has passed Windows Logo testing Centre Anay J STOF heaton Found New Hardware Wizard Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard The wizard has finished insta eview USB ing the software for Click Finish to close the wizard eee a lt Back Finish Fante m a 74 Chapter 3 Description of the eV5000 Software Device Manag
179. dow Select Use Background Fill Effect as shown in the following figure Window Attribution Window Na Framed Sale Level Lowe Special Attribute E Position i Use Background Color s OO Y D width 320 Height 240 e 0 z Bottom Window 1 None ha 3 None Frame Pop Window Type w Tracking Monopoly w Clipping Coherence Width Frame Color Select a fill color and background color and then select a fill style as shown in the following figure 54 Chapter 3 Description of the eV5000 Software LEELEE ZNZNZ e ile LL RAR AAR AAA RRA A AR AAR ARERR PEELE OnE OOO N ON ORLA R PEEL OPEOELELIL ILI E SEL E OEE EOE L ELSES ee aaa at alt alt at att at a a ee a a aa al ala oll alt alt at at at a oe a a a MLELEELE COLLEEN E ELSE ELEC LLOLOOLEE EE OS LS RRMA MAAR AAA RA AR AA MAMMAL AREA AR PPEP OSAREEEE CIT OEE EEL OOOLES EEEEI CEES Pitts essssssssssss sa ssassessseseeeeaadd Meee OODLE EIAE DELETE TEGO EOL LET OSES Meee LOPE ELE LIL SLES EL ELEC EL EE ELE LES ee a alot aol at tt a a a ee ea aa al ala alt alt alt at a at a oe a a a MELLEL ECOLIEENE ELSE OL ECE LOLOOLEE EE ES La CRRA RAMA A LL A AAA A AR AAR AAAA ALE AAR WeeEEOSAREEREOCI SEE EELOOOLES EEEEI CEES Pitts EELER LERRET PPEP OOD OREO EIAE IEEE EEEE SEEE TETEE PPPD OPEL ELIS SLES EL EEROR EROE EET LES ee aa alot alt alt at att at a a ee a alot aloo alt alt a a at a ge a a a MELLEL ECOLIEENE ELSE OL ECE LOLOOLEE EE ES La OR I NNN R Pett
180. downloading Communication parameter setting Select communication mode the same as the Tools Setting option in the configuration window Please refer to Chapter 3 of this manual for downloading description Selecting communication mode Click Set the Communication Parameter Setting dialog box appears a Download via Ethernet Valid for MT5000 and MT4000E only In the setting dialogbox select the Ethernet option change the IP address to the IP address of the touch screen do not modify the port number and click OK 418 Chapter 15 Operation Instructions for EVManager pa E Hanager Communication Set ey Communication Type USE port Upload Operate IP Communication Type Communication Set oy O Hetwork TE Serial Fort USE Fort COM b Download via serial port Open the communication setting dialogbox Select the Serial Port option select the serial port number of your PC in the Serial Port No drop down list click OK F A ETET a Communication Set Communication Type erial port Communication Type O Hetwork Serial Fort O USE Port 419 Chapter 15 Operation Instructions for EVManager c Download via USB port The default downloading mode is USB If you use the USB downloading mode it is not necessary to set this option again Pes Moni O J Communi cation Set Communication Type USE port Communication Type O Hetwork O Serial Fort Download selecting sect
181. dress changes Only one screen change can be made every time when the value is changed once Report Printout This operation is used to control the printout of a designated window by use of a WORD register If the content written into this word address is a valid window number the content of the window will be printed out However during the print the window will not be changed to the printed window Please refer to the descriptions of Report Printout in Chapter 10 Write data to PLC Current Base Window No This function make the panel write the window number of the current basic window to a designated register In this way the PLC can know which window is currently displayed on the panel Note When the current basic window is changed the touch screen will automatically send the number of the new basic window to the designated word register 253 Chapter 6 Components General PLC Control The General PLC Control function is used to control the data transmission between the PLC and the touch panel with PLC data registers There are four transmission mode PLC gt RW recipe data memory with the type code of 1 PLC gt LW local data register of the touch screen with the type code of 2 on RW recipe data register gt PLC with the type code of 3 4 LW local data register of the touch screen gt PLC with the type code of 4 The detailed descriptions are as follows Select General PLC Control f
182. dress is stored in the register LW9000 the physical address is the sum of the base address and the offset For example if LW9000 50 the index address RWI 100 will access the data of the addresses of RW 150 100 50 For details refer to Chapter 8 Recipe Data 5 5 Vector graph Shapes and images are organized in libraries in ev5000 software There are two kinds of image Vector Graph and Bitmap Library of vector graph is named as vg file and bitmap laibrary is named as bg file The user can create vector graph with the drawing tools in ev5000 drawing toolbar Vector graphes are suitable for simple shapes like buttons lamps and pipes and so on Each vg or bg file has up to 32 states and 32 different appearance so the user can use one single graph to represent a multi state variable or part vg and bg files are stored in the Shape Library in the Project File Window as shown in the following figure 109 Chapter 5 Basic Design of EV5000 4 Vector Graph lamp 17 vg NUM_KEYOO1 vg NUM_DISP_BAROOL vg NUB_CTRL_BAROO1 g G Lvg e ARROW BLUE1 24 bg ARROW BLUE1 23 bg de ARROW BLUE1 20 bg e ARROW BLUE1 19 bg e ARROW BLUE1 16 bg e ARROW BLUE1 15 bg Bitmap 1 bg Project construct window HMI O HMI 1 IRATA Some shape library files are installed into the ev5000 folder with the program files the user can import these pre made shape into their own projects C
183. dress label A meaningful name can help the user recognize the purpose of that register It is very useful when select address tags from list HMI Select the HMI panel corresponding to the tag PLC No Select the PLC station number corresponding to the tag Data Type Select whether the tag is a Bit or a Word register Address Type Select the address type corresponding to the tag address types of the register vary with the type of PLC Address The address of the tag Code The type of code of the data BIN or BCD 249 Chapter 6 Components 3 Enter the proper values efor the above eparameters eeclick OK and the address tag entry will appear in the library Address Tag Library E x Hame m Pw Data Type Address Type Lamp1 HMIO FLCO 0 Bit LE 0 Temperature HALO PLCO 0 ford Vil 2 Using address tags Select a component open the Component Attribution dialog box check the Use Addr Tag option and select the desired tag in the Addr Type drop down list Bit Setting Component Attribution Basic Attribution Bit State Setting Tag Graphics Position Priority Input Address Output Address Htl PEE Addr Type Addr Code Type Format DODD Code Type wordo wordo W Use Addr Tag Description SB An address tag entered in the tag library cannot be changed in other places To change it the user must open the address tag library and do the desired operation ZN Note The data type of the componen
184. dware manuals provided by Koyo Electronics 9 Data communication unit D2 DCM module of DL205 series D4 DCM module of DL405 series RS422 KOYO PLC DL205 DL405 series DCM unit RS 422 interface 25 pin D SUB female connector eView MT5000 4000 touch screen COMO0 COM1 8 10 RTS 12 CTS 9 11 RTS 13 CTS Note Among all PLCs in the DL205 series only DL240 DL250 CPU supports D2 DCM unit All PLCs of the DL405 series support D4 DCM unit Please pay attention to the settings of the DIP switch It must be set to the DirectNET Slave mode In addition pay attention to the setting of the 368 Chapter 14 Connection of eView MT5000 4000 with Common PLCs communication address For details refer to hardware manuals provided by Koyo Electronics 14 4 Allen Bradley PLC Allen Bradley Rockwell Automation Connection of Allen Bradley Micrologix Series PLC with eView MT5000 4000 Touch Screen EV5000 software setting Recommended Optional Setting Precaution Setting PLC Type AB DF COM COMO COM1 RS232 RS485 Data bits for this protocol are set Data Bits 8 7ors to 8 in a fixed manner Must be the same as the COM Stop Bits 1 1 or 2 port settings of the PLC 9600 19200 38400 Must be the same as the COM Bits per Second 19200 57600 115200 port settings of the PLC Even parity odd Must be the same as the COM Parity None parity none port settings of the PLC Adopt the recommended PLC Station No 1 0 255
185. e assigned during the operation of the macro template will be written into the macro template only when the operation comes to an end The read variable is read only and the write variable is write only Therefore assigning value for read variable or reading the value of write variable by macrocode is invalid operation Likewise if an address has to perform read and write operations it must correspond to two different variable names for example LWO corresponds to LWO0_R and LWO_W A macro template can define temporary variables or arrays or even complex associations However it cannot set global variables or static variables To use a global variable to save data it is necessary to use a local address like LW LB and so on The register served as output must be assigned a value A Note 1 Modify or delete variables in the macros In the Project File Window find the corresponding macro and enter the macro variable window Select a data type right click and then select to add delete or modify the variable 296 Chapter 9 Macro Project Files window 9 test 071116 9 HMI 0 vector Graph Deuble click airers Macrocod e gadog A deleted variable cannot be recovered so be cautious on this operation 2 Deleting a complete macro file In the Project File Window select a corresponding macro and click Delete Project files window 9 best 071116 Pitch on press down the delete key
186. e PLC Input data Engineering Min X Input Max Input Min Engineering Max Engineering Min Input Min Single Float format 32 bits i T S Cia e a a 157 Chapter 6 Components Double Float format 64 bits 0 lt e lt 2047 1 x21023 x4 1 S x 271022 x gf The above format is in accord with IEEE standard 754 and the arithmetic model is specified by the IEEE standard for Binary Floating Arithmetic 6 11 Numeric Display eats 1234 A Numeric Display component displays the current reading of a designated PLC register data No vectogram or bitmap can be associated with this component gt Adding a Numeric Display component 1 Click the numeric display component icon and drag it to the window the basic attribution tab of the component attribution dialogbox appears 158 Chapter 6 Components Data Display Component Attribution Basic Attribution Numeric Data Font Friority Input Address Output Address Hhil HMIg PLC HMI PLC Addr Type Lw Addr Addr Type Addr Code Type BIN Foma DODDOD Code Type Format DDDDD Word 1 z WordNo a Description NDO Priority Reserved function not used for the time being Input Address The starting address PLC word register to be displayed by a numeric display component Data in the register may be interpreted as BIN or BCD format refer to Multi State Display component The No of words is restricted to 1 16 bi
187. e actual range of the PLC may be broader or narrower than this range Detailed wiring diagram Note OMRON CQM series of PLCs covers CQM1 and CPM1H series Where CQM1 CPU11 and CQM1H CPU11 do not provide standard serial ports and have to be configured with OMRON CPM1 CIFO1 RS232 communication adapters or OMRON CPM1 CIF11 RS422 communication adapters to establish the link with the touch screen through the Host Link Other CPUs of CQM series provide RS 232 interface and it can be connected with the touch screen directly they can also be configured with CPM1 CIF0O1 RS232 communication adapters or OMRON CPM1 CIF 11 RS422 communication adapters to establish a link Where CPU51 61 of the CQM1H series support serial communication module CQM1H SCB41 For hardware descriptions refer to manuals provided by OMRON 346 Chapter 14 Connection of eView MT5000 4000 with Common PLCs 1 CPU OMRON PLC eView MT5000 4000 touch CQM1 1H CPU RS 232 screen interface COMO COM1 9 pin D SUB female connector Note The following CPUs can be connected with the touch screen directly CQM1 CPU21 41 42 43 44 and CQM1H CPU21 51 61 For hardware settings refer to the technical manuals provided by OMRON 2 Communication module CPM1 CIF01 OMRON PLC eView MT5000 4000 touch CPM1 CIF0O1 adapter screen RS 232 interface COMO COM1 9 pin D SUB female connector Note Set the mode setting switch of the CPM1 CIF0O1 adapters to the Host Link communication
188. e address entered in the address tag library For details refer to Section 6 34 Description A reference name not displayed that you assign to the multi state display component 2 Go to the Multi State Display tab and set the number of states for multi state display component The user can set a maximum of 32 states Word Display Component Attribution Basic Attribution Multi State Display Tag Graphics Position State Mur z2 Data Mapping T 0 1 1 Data mapping Every state of the multi state display component is linked to a unique value of the designated PLC word register When the register value equals to one of the Map Values in the mapping list the multi state display component will display the corresponding state The mapping detail is listed in the data mapping list the user can view and edit the mapping relationship between state number and register value 138 Chapter 6 Components 3 Goto the Tag tab Fill in text to denote different states or leave it empty Go to the Graphic tab select a vectogram or bitmap to display the state graphic of the multi state display component 5 Go to the Position tab adjust the position and size of the multi state display component if necessary 6 Click the OK button to complete the setting of the multi state display component Note on Data Format Types BIN binary format 15 14131211109 8 7 65 4 3 2 10 BCD binary coded decimal format 1514131211
189. e designated PLC Word register at the time window is minimized Enter the constant in the Set Value box Chapter 6 Components current value of the designated PLC word address if the result is not larger than upper limit The incremental value is set in the Inc Value field Every time the component is pressed the decreased value is subtracted from the current value of the designated PLC word address if the result is not less than lower limit When the component is pressed and held for a time longer than Delay Time the incremental value is added to the current value of the designated PLC word address in every interval of Execution Speed The increased amount is the Incremental Value When the component is pressed and held held for a time longer than Delay Time the decreased value is added to the current value of the designated PLC word address in every interval of Execution Speed The decreased amount is the Decreased Value 3 Go to the Graphics tab Select vectogram or bitmap to indicate the corresponding address states and represent the touch area 4 Go to the Label tab Fill in text to denote states 5 Go to the Position tab adjust the position and size of the word setting component if necessary 6 Click OK button to complete the setting of the word setting component 6 5 Multi State Display NW Multiple State Bplay A multi state display component changes its appearance according to the value of
190. e execution cycle Response Mode Determines whether to execute the operation immediately or delay in execution Executing immediately means it will be triggered immediately when the trigger condition is satisfied Delayed execution means it will be triggered after the delay of an 234 Chapter 6 Components execution cycle once the trigger condition is satisfied Response State Determine whether to trigger the timer by the value of ON or OFF when it is triggered by the register Repeat Times Means the number of repeated operations after the timer is triggered Refer to the description of the execution times for each trigger mode If the Repeat Times is set to 0 the timer will be triggered whenever the condition is satisfied Trigger Address Address of the register to execute corresponding functions when the timer is triggered by the register Note that the address must be a LB address Timer Component Attribution Timer Timer Function Basic Attribution Trigger Address Tigger Mode By req address Htl Exe Cyclej100ms 30 PLC Mo Response Mode Immediate Address Type Response State Off Address Repeat Times Go to the Timer Function tab There are three function blocks Execute Macro Data Transfer and Set Satus 1 Execute Macrocode The macrocode to be executed each time when the timing time arrives 2 Data Transfer Implement data transfer function when the timing time arrives and transfer data o
191. e figure below 438 Chapter 17 Networking of MT5000 Series Touch Screens HiO Ahale A Caution Edit configuration only on the touch screen connected with the PLC When editing PLC components do not select the touch screen number and the PLC number as shown in the figure below Bit State Setting Component Attribute Basic Attribute Bit State Setting Taz Graphies Position Priority Input Address e Dutput Address HMI HMI HIO PLCE o Addr Type Addr Type aia Addr ID Code Type Code Type lulls Format DODOD Wordla Jse Addr Tag WordNo Use Addr Tag Description Compile the component select the Offline Simulation mode select the corresponding touch screen number and click Simulate to perform offline simulation as shown in the figure below 439 Pal EVSimulator HMI Simulation _HMI Station Simulation Seral Port HMI Fort PL Fort COMO Show Information Simulation Type File Fathf pkal Communication Type IP NULL COM NULL Chapter 17 Networking of MT5000 Series Touch Screens HMI Information HMI Port FP Part LOM1 Offline Simulation c documents and settings skinco desktop engsproject 23 We pkg NULL PORT NULL BPS NULL Select corresponding touch screen number and click Download to perform download operation 440 EVDownload Select HMI HMI Station Hbl HMI lt
192. e following dialog box appears 48 Chapter 3 Description of the eV5000 Software Filled Color In this dialog box you may customize any shape color you want we provide more color schemes in the color properties list Filled Color _ Oo x basic colors basic colors hue saturation and luminance mixer hue saturation and luminance basic hue hue saturation and luminance roller red green and blue cube red green and blue mixer gray scale mixer cyan magenta and yellow cube cyan magenta and yellow mixer red axis green axis blue axis cyan ads Magenta ads relly a A The users can customize their own color when needed Selecting components Methods for using selecting components 1 Directly select Click a component to be selected directly 2 Select all components Select Select All Components in the Edit menu and all components in the current screen will be selected When the direct select tool is activated Click a component with the Ctrl key hold will make a copy of the component 49 Chapter 3 Description of the eV5000 Software JN Note To select multiple components or to enter the multiple selecting mode drag the mouse and select at least one part then press and hold the Shift key additional parts can be selected Modifying part size You can click a component to change its size in the following method Click to select a part select anyone among the e
193. e frozen and furthermore the pop up window will be displayed in the topmost layer all the time If a window has the property of Truncate the frame of the window is restricted by its father window that is to say the part displayed outside the frame of its father window will be truncated If a window has the property of Track the window will track the movement of its father window IN Note If Truncate is selected Track must be selected either Window A and Window B in the following are attached to the base window Normally if you touch Window A it will be displayed in the topmost layer However if the property of Coherence is selected for Window A even if you touch Window A it will not appear in the topmost layer Instead it clings to its father window all the time Note After a window is created its number cannot be changed but the name frame and background color can be changed whenever it is necessary Basic window Basic window Security Level Used to set the security level for a window For details refer to Chapter 12 Security Level Bottom layer Window Used to set the bottom window for the current window A window to be assigned as a bottom window must be an existing one In general components shared by multiple windows can be placed here Frame The frame is recommended to use for a pop up window For the frame width select any number amon
194. e screen saver it is set to 0 Brush it is set to ON Message board function determines whether the brush is when the brush isjcurrently selected R W selected Eraser it is set to Message board function determines whether the eraser is ON when the eraser currently selected R W is selected Block Cleanout it is Message board function determines whether the clearing set to ON in _ thel area function is currently selected R W clearing area status Brush width is 1 Message board function set brush width to 1 pixel when the Brush width is 2 Message board function set brush width to 2 pixels when Brush width is 3 Message board function set brush width to 3 pixels when Hide display Fast Hide the Fast Selection Window if it is set to ON and display see Aig in Fast Selection Window if it is set to OFF R W Hide display taskbar Hide the taskbar if it is set to ON and display the taskbar if it Hide display task Hide the task buttons if it is set to ON and display the task Hide display all Hide the Fast Selection Window taskbar and task buttons if Fast Selectionjit is set to ON and display all these contents when it is set Window taskbar to OFF R W task buttons Save When it is set to ON the system will write communications communication parameters saved in the LW10000 area back to the settings to the E PROM on the panel mainboard The parameters will be system available in the next startup only when the
195. ecial functions The MT5000 can support the overlapping of multiple components if these overlapping components are touched the program will execute related operations according to layer order of the individual components The components in the topmost layer are considered to be touched first and the corresponding function will be conducted first and then the second layer and so on For example If six bit state setting change components are overlapped to respectively control register YO the topmost layer to Y5 the bottommost layer when these components are touched the MT5000 will execute the program in the following order 256 Chapter 6 Components Layer 1 First execute Y0 command Layer 2 Execute Y1 command Layer 3 Layer 4 Layer 5 Layer 6 Finally execute Y5 command First eset the ON OFF of YO and set control the ON OFF of Y1 step 2 set the ON OFF of Y2 Step 3 and so on and finally set the ON OFF of Y5 step 6 Please note that when the MT5000 encounters the Change Window command it will bypass the following components and directly change to the target window As shown in the following figure if Y2 is a function key for Change Window Y3 Y5 will be neglected The number of overlapped components should not exceed 32 Layer 1 First execute Y0 command Layer 2 Execute Y1 command Layer 3 execute Y2 command Layer 4 Change Window Layer 5 Components following Y 2 will be bypassed Layer 6 6 39 Notebook Note
196. ed in the corresponding edit box Background color and alignment of the text can be set in the dialogbox also If the labels of the two task buttons can not be fully displayed try to adjust the button area size and the font size of the text 123 Chapter 5 Basic Design of EV5000 HMI Attribution Print Setting Serial Fort O Setting Serial Fort 1 Setting Task Bar HAL Extend Attribution Background Color Button Position Align left Use Touch Control i Undefined Area Color Text Align Align left Include CPU Lamp 0 CPU Lamp Color Hide F S Window Hide Task Bar Ww ecludedlarmLarnp E Alarm Lamp Color Menu Task Bar Include F S win E 1 C Lamp Frame Color En uneWorkspace Color WY T C workspace Color MM co E coo Button reaSize Width 140 Height 32 Font 24 Font 24 Note During operation the Fast Selection window is displayed in the left or right of the screen In the edit window state the Fast Selection window is an independent window Window 2 serves as the Fast Selection window by default For detailed descriptions of the taskbar please refer to Section 7 2 124 Chapter 6 Components Chapter 6 Components Parts Components Parts are designed to meet specific requirements In general a component is designed to implement one function However some components have to be used with other components and objects or a PLC to implement specific functions as shown in the table below Related se C
197. ed where fast temperature variations and or high humidity are present This will cause condensation of water in the device and cause damage to the unit 2 2 Power Connections Make sure all local and national electrical standards are met when installing the unit For details refer to a local dealer 2 2 1 Power Requirements AN A Fusing Requirement Input voltage 24V 15 Current Starting current 4300L lt 1A 4300S lt 1A 4300C lt 1 2A Power Supply 4300T lt 1 2A Working current 4300L lt 500mA 4300S lt 500mA 4300C lt 600mA 4300T lt 600mA the polarity of the DC power is incorrect Check wiring to ensure proper connections and try to power up again 471 If the display does not come on within 2 seconds of power up turn off the power immediately An internal fuse will prevent damage if Caution gt High Voltage Caution gt Emergency Stop Caution gt Supply Voltage Condition gt Caution Wire Routing Connection 2 2 2 Grounding Requirements Appendix Ill Hardware Overview An Internal fuse will prevent damage for over voltage condition however it isn t guaranteed DC voltage sources should provide proper isolation from main AC power A hard wired Emergency Stop should be fitted in any system using the MT4000 touch screens to comply with ICS Safety Recommendations Do not power the MT4000 touch screens and inductive loads or input circuitry to t
198. eens conform to the following CE specifications EMC Directive 89 336 EEC 92 31 EEC 93 68 EEC electromagnetic emissions and immunity Machinery Directive 89 392 EEC 91 368 EEC 93 44 EEC 93 68 EEC machine safety MT4000 series products will be CE marked to indicate compliance with the EMC Directive The MT4000 series has been designed to operate satisfactorily in electromagnetic noise immunity and without emitting high levels of electrical noise into the environment emission The units are designed to meet European Community standards when installed per the wiring instructions in this manual The MT4000 series touch screens have been designed to meet electromagnetic compatibility for industrial environments e CISPR EN 55011 Group 1 Class A Radiated Emission levels e EN61000 6 4 2001 Generic standards Emission standard for industrial environments Compatibility Standards e EN61000 6 2 2001 Immunity for Industrial Environments e EN61000 4 2 3 4 5 6 Electrostatic discharge electrostatic field immunity test electrical fast transient burst surge immunity test immunity to conducted disturbance 3 Programming Software Programming Software EV 5000 V1 0 0 or later 478 Appendix Ill Hardware Overview 4 Product Specifications MT4300 Basic Parameters Case color Black Display 5 7STN 5 7CSTN 5 6TFT 5 7TFT Resolution 320x240 Memory 8M FLASH 16M SDRAM COM port Two RS 232 485 422 one USB SLAVE
199. egistered in the Alarm Entry list Alarm information logon Each message corresponds to a PLC bit register If the PLC bit 179 Chapter 6 Components device activates either ON or OFF the corresponding message is displayed on the Alarm Display This component is only used to enter alarm messages To display alarm messages the Alarm Display component is required gt Procedure to add modify alarm entry message 1 Click the E icon in the database toolbar the alarm message object library will pop up or enter the alarm message entry page in the Library menu in the menu bar Alarm object list Delete Modify 2 Click the Add button to add message or click the Modify button to modify an existing message Alarm Information PLC Address HMI HMIO X PLC No 0 Address Type LB Address 0 Attribution Alarm Status C ON Text Content e Text Labrary Font 16 x G Text Color Cancel PLC Address Designate the PLC bit address to trigger the message Attribute Alarm ON Displays alarm message when bit is ON Alarm OFF Displays alarm message when bit is OFF Content Enter the message content and color and the default font size for messages is 16 3 Click OK and the alarm message will be displayed in the Alarm List After entering alarm message you can edit existing message through the Delete and Modify button Click Exit to exit alarm entry 180 Chapter 6 Components Alarm objec
200. en intelligent building management conference room audible visual control and temperature adjustment With the rapid development of the science and technology more and more machines and field operations need the use of HMls The powerful function of PLC and the complicated data processing also call for the emergence of a convenient matching HMI The development of touch screen is undoubtedly a great innovation in the automation field in the 21 century MT5000 and MT4000 are a brand new generation of industrial embedded touch screen HMls with the following features Embedded RISC CPU featuring high speed and low power consumption Embedded operating system Higher speed and more smooth operation Richer color and finer display The MT5000 fully supports such high speed interfaces as the Ethernet and USB interfaces and the MT4000 supports high speed USB interfaces More resources and lower price eView MT5000 MT4000 Series Touch Screen User Manual Preface Simple easy to use stable and reliable The MT5000 and MT4000 series HMIs have the following new features The 65536 color display mode gives richer color to the touch screen with incomparable display effect With the application of powerful 200 400 MHz 32 bit RISC processor the MT5000 and MT4000 have higher processing speed The product supports simultaneous communications of multiple serial ports The two serial ports of the standard hardware can use different p
201. ending point in the right or lower most part of the scroll bar When you change the value of the first word or double word the scroll bar will move towards the direction set by you from left to right from right to left from top to bottom from bottom to top The step of each motion is 1 and the range of motion is determined by the following two words double words registers Alternatively you need not set the value of the 215 Chapter 6 Components first register instead move scroll bar directly with your hand the system will calculate the current browsing index value and write the first word or single word based on the ratio of the position on the whole scroll bar Address The initial address of the word registers corresponding to the scroll bar Code Type BIN or BCD No of Words No necessary for the user to change the setting disabled here Use Address Label Whether to use the address entered in the address label For details refer to Section 6 35 Description A reference name not displayed that you assign to the scroll bar Go to the Scroll Bar tab Scrollbar Component Attribution Basic Attribution Scroll Bar Position Indes Length WDT D Direction From Left Background Picture Use Vector Dic Image NUM _KEYDOI StateMo O AdiustingE nob Pic Use Vector Dic Image NUM_REYOO1 StateNo 1 Index Length Select word or double word Direction Moving direction of the scroll bar including from
202. eng vg _lamp 17 g _NUM_KEYO01 g NUM_DISP_BAROO1 g _NUB_CTRL_BAROO1 g _ G 1 g de ARROW BLUE1 24 bg e ARROW BLUE1 23 bq e ARROW BLUE1 20 bq de ARROW BLUE1 19 bg e ARROW BLUE1 16 bg de ARROW BLUE1 15 bg To modify any vectogram or bitmap find the shape to be modified in the Project File Window double click to enter the edit window of the shape and you may modify the shape in this window The above line shows the various states of the vg or bg file and the area below the states window is the appearance editing area for the state being selected VG 1 vg amp File Edit E view Tools T Library D Window W Help H ase aP ctaaevec r aa eMegNM r1 cOsvcocsAb m AUA b AT wo 4 ty x xh tau POOOOCOOOGR mg he wee BA BM a REE Bia Zo aos z oD CE l amp E T VN 7 S UX l E EE Graph element window Project files window Connector 4 Yector Graph HAT KJ NUM_KEYOO1 vq KJ NUM_DISP_BAROO1 PLC KJ Nua _CTRL_BAROO1 PLO Parts Fa statel state2 we ARROW BLUE1 24 b s A ARROW BLUE1 23 b e ARROW BLUE1 20 b Y Bit Setting Indicator lamp ram i gt figa ia Component mm w oF Switch Direct Window a PLCO 0 Word Setting Mutiple State Mienke Function Parts Message winodow Mouse x 31 y 90 Width 65 Height 62 UpperCase Number A Note 1 After creating and editing a vg shape click save before close the editing window or you will lose all the changes you ve just made 2 No tex
203. er a Default Lar Upload Key tatata ta ia Save Event Log brit Macre 0 Level Key lateien te rit Addr Init Window FrameQ 1 Level Kep tetetete RecordH Public windo see nimimm atm Use Buzzer Fast el Win Revise the window number Cursor Color ascertain time be loaded with initiation window Common Window No Public Window The window number of the common window in the project window 1 by default Fast Selection Window No The window number of the fast selection window in the project window 2 by default Common Public window Attribution Defines whether the common window of the project is displayed above or under the basic window Pop up Window Attribution Set whether the pop up window is displayed normally the pop up window doesn t make a monopoly of the topmost layer and other windows can be switched to the upmost layer or is always displayed in the topmost layer Upload Password Upload password for programs The password helps prohibit unauthorized person uploading the project file from the panel to PC and hence protects the intellectual property of the project designer and authorized users The initial password is 888888 by default Level 0 2 Password Security password For details refer to Chapter 12 Security Level Save Event Log Check this checkbox if you want to save the event log Initial Address Indicates the start address from which event log will be saved the event log is
204. er yy ol x gt m alela Fl Mice and other pointing devices Ells Modems E a Monitors c E Network adapters p PCMCIA adapters H Ports COM amp LPT E e Processors 4 SCSI and RAID controllers gt 5M Driver c Sound video and game controllers H System devices Universal Serial Bus controllers ef eview USE Intel r 82801DB DBM USB 2 0 Enhanced Host Controller 24CD Intel R 280 1DB DBM USB Universal Host Controller 24C2 Intel R 280 1DB DBM USB Universal Host Controller 24C4 Intel R 280 1DB DBM USB Universal Host Controller 24C7 USB Root Hub USE Root Hub USE Root Hub USB Root Hub Once the driver is installed successfully the user can select My Computer gt Properties gt Hardware gt Device Manager gt Universal Serial Bus Controller to check whether the USB device is connected to and identified by the PC as shown in the following figure The EVIEW USB appears only when the DIP switches 1 and 2 in the rear of the touch panel are set to OFF To configure the DIP switches remove the lit on the back of panel 19 Chapter 3 Description of the eV5000 Software bi bi hii i Gamin DOM m er i te im NAL seater rT Once the driver has been installed successfully no more settings is needed The user can use the eView USB device after connecting and powering on the panel To download through USB cable select USB fo
205. erable range in the above table indicates the operable range of the MT5000 4000 touch screen The actual range of the PLC may be broader or narrower than this range Detailed wiring diagram Note SIEMENS S7 200 series PLCs cover such models as CPU212 CPU214 CPU215 CPU216 382 Chapter 14 Connection of eView MT5000 4000 with Common PLCs CPU221 CPU222 CPU224 and CPU226 All of them can be connected with the eView touch screen through the programming communication port PPI port on the CPUs Where CPU226 has two communication ports either one can be used to connect the touch screen but the communication parameters for them have to be set separately While connecting PLC directly with the touch screen through the CPU pay attention to the setting of communication parameters in the software For detailed settings refer to the technical manuals provided by SIEMENS 1 CPU eView MT5000 4000 touch SIEMENS PLC screen S7 200 series CPU COM0 COM1 PPI COM port 485 485 Connection of SIEMENS S7300 Series PLC with eView MT5000 4000 Touch Screen EV5000 software setting Recommende Optional Setting Precaution d Setting SIEMENS 7 300 HMI SIEMENS Select corresponding adapter 7 300 type according to different SIEMENS 7 300 PC or HMI adapter communication adapters adapter COMO0 COM1 RS232 RS485 Stop Bits Data bits S this protocol Data Bits Torg are set to 8 in a fixed manner Must be the same as the 1 or 2 CO
206. ers 5400T Case color Dark grey off white computer grey Display 7 5CSTN 7 OTFT eins 200MHz RISC 8M FLASH 16M SDRAM COM port 2 RS 232 485 422 1 10 100M Ethernet 1USB SLAVE Printer port 1 DB25 General specifications 21 28VDC_ working current Max 400mA 24V starting current Power supply MAX 600mA 24V Complies with EN61000 6 4 2001 EN55011 EN61000 6 2 2001 CE certification EN61000 4 2 3 4 5 6 standard FCC compatibility Complies with FCC Class A Dielectric strength test 500 VAC 1 minute Insulation resistance Greater than 50MQ 500V DC Shockproof test 10 25Hz X Y Z direction 2G 30 minutes Degree of protection IP65 front panel Operating temperature 0 45 C Operating humidity 10 90 non condensing Dimensions of 462 Appendix IIl Hardware Overview MT5400 Dimensional Drawing Unit mm inch Front View Side View 61 1 2 477 nex 235 9 26 8 9 0 33 o pe o Bs Top View Panel installation Mii AL holddown grrove totally four M Rear View o 0 r 0 i 463 ec4 8 837 Appendix Ill Hardware Overview MT5500 Basic Parameters 5500L 5500T Backlight 1CCFL 2CCFL 4 wire precision resistance network 200MHz RISC 8M FLASH 16M SDRAM COM port 2 RS 232 485 422 1 10 100M Ethernet 1 USB SLAVE Printer port 1 DB25 General specifications 21 28VDC_ working current Max 400mA 24V starting current Power supply Max 600mA 24V Com
207. erstanding the user can add a description to the graphic as a note In this example it is named as Lamp with two states Click Create and the following editing window appears Graph element window Connector HMI FLC PLC Parts 1 A state TR Bit State Bit Stake Lamp Setting Bit State Direct Window Switch li AM The user can add more states to the vector graphics after creating them The procedure is decribed here Double click the vg you want to add states to to enter the drawing window Click the icon to add a new state to the current vg A vg can have up to 32 different states DSJ naaran Be o E Q to BS YNGNZIIl EMNENE yl statel Jl 112 Chapter 5 Basic Design of EV5000 state state 3 Click to select a state the state being selected is outlined by a green frame By default the latest added state is set to be selected after being added Draw lines rectangles and other shapes with the tools in the drawing toolbar to edit the appearance for the selected state After finishing drawing for all states click save and close the drawing window 123 vg MEE a File E EditfE Viewty Toolsf T LibraryiD PLC Parts P Function Parisio 9 wWindowiwy HelpfH x Bedagai Oo Mee pM N Ao oOMYoOoA Ly h bs lle Ta le OOOO Hl E a A Tab E S04 Ge fe ie i agg 100 Gu F Graph element window Project Files window Connector 34 HMI da Cl HMIL whe PLE O AMIO whe PLC Pa
208. es 0 1 2 and 3 are forbidden Once they are deleted the project should not be downloaded into panel or the panel will not operate normally 4 6 Examples for Windows Several basic examples will be given below to explain some basic operations about window Example 1 We often need to write a special value into some registers as soon as a project starts running or an application window is opened to conduct initialization For example when Frame0 starts up LBO is set to ON and LW1 is set to 200 94 Chapter 4 Windows 1 Create a bit setting part with the Address Type set to LB Address to 0 and the Type to Set to ON at window open Bit Setting Component Attribution Basic Attribution Bit State Setting Tag Graphies Fosition Pricrity Hormnal Input Address o tph Address Hl Hti PLC 0 Htl HMO PLC 0 Add Type Add 0 Addr Type Add 0 Code Type EIN FormatDODOD Code Type EIN Format OOOO wordo Use Addi Tag wordo D Use Addr Tag Description SBO Bit setting Component Attribution Basic Attribution Pit State Setting Tag Graphics Position at 95 2 Chapter 4 Windows Create a multi state setting component with the Address Type set to LW Address to 1 Type to Set to ON at window open and Set Value to 200 Word Setting Component Attribution Basic Attribution Multi State Setting Tag Graphics Position P
209. essage Board Frame Width 1 Frame Color W Filled Background Frame Width With the value range of 1 16 select 4 in this example Frame Color Foreground Color Background Color Select your desirable color 4 Adjust the message board to an appropriate size as shown below ae Message Board 5 Add some function keys to the left and lower part of the message board Select function keys FKO FK1 FK2 and FK3 respectively for Pen Eraser Block Cleanout and Clear 221 Chapter 6 Components Screen functions Select FK4 FK5 and FK6 respectively for the pen color of red green and blue Select FK7 FK8 FK9 and FK10 respectively for the brush width of 2 4 6 and 8 as shown below FRen Blue After setting these options save and compile the project perform online offline simulation or downloading The operation effect is shown in the figure below LB9020 LB9022 are reserved by the system to control and identify whether the brush eraser and block cleanout functions are selected LB9030 LB9032 are used to set the pen width 222 Chapter 6 Components LB9006 is used to set message board operation mode LW9007 is used to set the brush thickness LW9008 can select any one color for the brush among all 256 colors For details refer to related parts in Chapter 11 Reserved Register Addresses of the System Note 1 Each HMI panel can use only one message
210. estricted to HMI local words the user can specify address for them 3 Go to the Channel tab and set related parameters of each track Oscillopraph Component Attribution Basic Attribution Oscillograph Channel Position signed int 0 signed int 0 Color Designate the color of each track Line Width The width of a line including 8 options Data Type Sets the data type with only two options of signed integer and unsigned integer Data type signed int_ Ene 213 Chapter 6 Components Max and Min Value in Y Direction Set the corresponding maximum and minimum values of each track line along the Y direction 4 Click OK to complete the setting of the oscilloscope component 6 26 Scale i Scale The Scale is used with trend graph oscilloscope or XY plot components It can also be applied on other occasions Often it is used with meter component gt Adding a Scale 1 Click the Scale component icon and drag it to the window and the Scale Component Attribution dialogbox appears Scale Component Attribution Scale Position Style Equal Divizion Line Length Start Angle End Angle Line Color k Arc 7 10 0 180 Style Set the style of the scale vertical horizontal arc or round As the following figure shows LEFF SUU LI ea ieee Vey n a a Mie P e _ a E EE 214 Chapter 6 Components Divisions Select the number of divisions on t
211. etting Component Attribution Basic Attribution Multi State Setting Tag Graphics Position SettingMode Subvals Set Constant Dec value Set at Window Open Set at Window Close Set at Window Maximized Set at Window Minimized Set at Backlight Uff Set at Enter Success Set at Enter Fail Add value Sub value Setting Mode As shown in the following table Set Constant When the component is pressed touched preset constant data will be written to the designated PLC word register the constant is set in the Set Value box Set at window To initialize the designated Word Register with a constant value at the time open of window open This operation is only applicable for LW local word Enter the constant in the Set Value box Set at window To set designated word register with a constant value at the time of window close close This operation is only applicable for LW local word Enter the constant in the Set Value box Set at window 7 To initialize the designated PLC Word register at the time window is ax maximized Enter the constant in the Set Value box S Set at back light Set when the back light is turned OFF Enter the constant in the Set Set at successful Set when the numeric or text component conduct a successful input Set at input failure Set when the numeric or text component conduct a unsuccessful input NS oom er me meon noe tate 136 et at window Min To initialize th
212. f corresponding length from the source address to the destination address Source Address Starting address of the register containing the data to be transfered Destination Address address of the transfer destination register Data Type Select to transfer data of bit or word type Data Transfer Length Length of the data to be transferred number of the bits or words 235 Chapter 6 Components Timer Component Attribution Timer Timer Function f Execute Macro Set Status Data Transfer Set Mode SACE Destination Htl HMIg Hbl HMO Set Address Hil Data Type PLC No Word Ler Addr Type Value PLO No O FLC No 0 ki Addr Type LE Add Type LE Address 0 Address 0 CodeStyle BIN CodeStye BIN Address CodeS tule Data Type Bit Data Len 3 Set Status Set specific register value when the timing time arrives Set Address address of destination register to be set when the timing time arrives a Set the bit register Set Mode Set value and Periodic Toggle as shown in the figure below Timer Component Attribution Timer Timer Function fn f Execute Macro Set Status C Data Transfer SetMode Setwalue e SAICA Destinatinn A Set value Hal HMI Periodical Toggle HbA AMID Data lype E PLE Ho PLE Wo PLC No D Wod Len 1 Addr Type Addr Type Addr Type LB h Yale Address Address 0 CodeStyle CadeStyle Address CodeStye BIN Data Type Data Len Detailed description of differe
213. f the controller 414 Chapter 14 Connection of eView MT5000 4000 with Common PLCs Must be the same as the COM Bits per Second 9600 9600 19200 port settings of the controller Refer to the operation manuals provided by Kinco Must be the same as the COM Parity None port settings of the controller Operable address range Controller software setting PLC Bit Word Address Operable Range Description Type Refer to operation Dword Word type instructions of Kinco Refer to operation Word type instructions of Kinco This is the address of the controller When using the touch screen pay attention to the rules of Refer to operation word 10 instructions of Kinco word Note addressing For details refer to the description below Address type of the touch screen Depends on the number of bits of the servo and the value can only be 20 10 or 8 Address of the touch screen master address and sub address For example on page 117 in the user manual for Kinco servo driver the address is 2509 sub address is 06 and the number of bits is 20 The addressing diagram of the touch screen is shown as follows 415 Chapter 14 Connection of eView MT5000 4000 with Common PLCs EERE se amet e oe e Tce Rt Sai HALE Sai Co HB AoE HMI PLC ME ate PLC HAI 20 HEIA Hiti SA BIN FA 2 RAAEN FH ia M Haie NIO Detailed wiring diagram MT5000 4000 touch screen Kinco PLC RS 232
214. f the eV5000 Software Za EVSimulator HMI Simulation i Simulate Exit Simulation Serial Fort HMI COMO HMI COM1 1 Show Information Simulation Type Offline Simulation pkg File Fath E textitext_Olaa pkg HULL Communication Type Tr MULL Select an HMI to be simulated and click Simulate the offline simulation screen of the selected HMI panel appears 3 8 Online Simulation The EV5000 provides online simulation operation With the online simulator a project can be simulated on the PC and the configuration simulation screen acts as the actual panel The simulator exchange data with the PLC via MT4000 5000 HMI panel connected to the PC in the indirect mode The data displayed on the simulator screen is the actual data from the PLC registers Using online simulator when debugging the configuration project can save much time for downloading The online simulation function has two modes direct and indirect which will be explained in detail in the following paragraphs 3 8 1 Direct Online Simulation In direct online simulation mode the PLC is directly connected to the serial port of PC running the simulator Its merit is that the PLC data can be obtained dynamically without the transfer and possible delay of the HMI panel The user can even create and evaluate the configuration project without an actual panel on hand which can save the cost for a potential client who just want to try before purchasing The sh
215. fe 2 The bg files and vg files of the same project are stored in the vg folder under the project folder directory The bg file is converted from other images the original images are stored in the image folder under the project folder directory Please do not delete the images in that folder or the corresponding bg files will not be used any more A Note The original image is stored in the image folder when being imported so the image must have a unique file name to avoid confliction If such confliction occurs when editing a new bg file the newer image will not be added to the image folder so the two bg file including the previous and the new one will be linked to the same original image and they may look the same The size and color quality of images in the bitmap library determine the size of the target file and also affect the configuration execution speed Please pay attention to the following points when a bitmap library is created The maximum size for original image being imported is the physical resolution of the panel Any image exceeds this size cannot be imported In this case the image should be cut into the proper size before being imported It is strongly recommended to resize the original image to the same size of the part using that image Doing so will greatly save storage space and ensure the fast run of the panel For example the user want to import an image for a part of the s
216. follows Data Display Component Attribution Basic Attribution Numeric Data Font Data Type Digits Above Decimal Point Digits Below Decimal Point i Min Yalue 0 Mas Value BU Project Data Conversion Pro Min alue 0 Pro Max Value gg 194 Chapter 6 Components Data Display Component Attribution Align Right The operation effect is shown as follows 195 Chapter 6 Components 18 56 14 91 Nenu Task B 6 21 Recipe Data i Recipe Data The Recipe Data component can transfer data from the recipe memory of the touch screen to the PLC or from the PLC to the touch screen For details refer to Chapter 8 6 22 Event Entry Event Information Logon When a particular event occurs a corresponding message will be displayed on the screen if it has been registered in the Event Entry List before The message to be displayed on the Event Display component must first be registered in the Event Entry list A PLC bit or word register controls each message If the PLC bit or word device activates either by ON OFF switch or value limit exceeding the corresponding message is displayed on the Event Display component This component is only used for event entry To display an event message the Event Display component is required gt Procedure to add modify event entry message 1 Click the icon and the event message object library pops up or enter the event message entry page in the Library men
217. format refer to Multi State Display component The No of words is restricted to 1 16 bits or 2 32 bits Address The PLC word register address corresponding to the numeric input component Code Type BIN or BCD No of Words Select 1 or 2 for input address Use Address Tag Whether to use the address entered in the address tag library For details refer to Section 6 34 Description A reference name not displayed that you assign to the numeric input component 2 Go to the Numeric Data tab Data Input Component Attribution Digits Above Decimal Point Digits Below Decimal Point Min Value 0 Max Yale 9999 Project Data Conversion Fro Min Yalue Fro Mas value 7 74 Data Type Control the input format of data including Signed integer Unsigned integer Hex Binary Mask Single float and Double float For details refer to Numeric 153 Chapter 6 Components Display Format later in this section Numeric Setting Set the position of the decimal point number of digits max value and min value Project Data conversion Engineering data conversion Applicable only to two data types of Signed integer and Unsigned integer Go to the Trigger Address tab Enter the trigger bit address which enables the numeric input component Only when the trigger bit address is ON will the numeric input operations be valid Since LB9000 9009 are internal re
218. g 0 through 16 If the frame width is not 0 select other color for the frame 92 Chapter 4 Windows There are two ways for changing the window properties 1 Double click the blank area in the window 2 Donot select any component in the window Click the 4 icon on the toolbar Liew e Menu Task 4 3 Creating a Window Click a in the Window Toolbar to create a new window as BM SREB ol pE E a 1m F TEELE ZNZN GZ lll IMs lle 4 4 Opening a Window After a window is created make selection in the dropdown menu in the Window Toolbar all existing windows can be selected from the list You may also click the icon to display the previous window Click the sx icon to display the next window If you use a mouse with a wheel you can directly roll the wheel to change the window number 93 Chapter 4 Windows 4 5 Deleting a Window Project construct window OF O Framed OF 1 Framei I 2 Framez R 3 Frames I 4 Framet To S Frames I 6 Framed Ia Frame I amp Framed PLC fii PLC1 0 i PLCO d As shown in the above figure in the Project Construct Window select a window to be deleted and press the Delete key in your keypad In this case an alert box appears Select Yes to delete the window all the components in the window will also be deleted Be careful when using this function Confirm to delete window Framed A ioie The deletion of base windows Fram
219. g box appears Then modify the settings of communication parameters again a E Eanager Communi cation Set ey Communication Type USE port Upload Operate IF HULL a System Operate Serial WO NULL Get Version Download Section Download User Data O Show LOGO Download Recipe UnShow LOGO LIH Show Set Download LOGO Click BACK and NEXT to switch between Download Operate Upload Operate and System Operate 15 3 Upload Operate Upload processing is used to transfer data files from the touch screen to a PC Communication parameters must be properly set before uploading Communication parameter setting the same as those described in downloading processing Upload section in this area the user can select the file type of uploading data Upload user data upload the data stored in the panel to the PC the uploaded file will be saved as pkg file the same as the user data file for downloading Click Upload user data button 424 Chapter 15 Operation Instructions for EVManager a dialog box appears and prompt the user to enter the HMI description which can help the user distinguishi different panels Figure Select Data File must be selected the user can select logo file and recipe file also click OK Select a file saving path enter a file name and click Save The user data file is saved as pkg file The Upload Password dialog box appears Enter the password this password can be set in the
220. g figure 1234 wpj a Filef F EditfE Vviewi Toolsi Librarvif PLE Parts P Function Parts Windowl y HelpiH Graph element window Project files window Saas SS cs ee 5 Ea i i 7 HMI HMI a HMIL whe PLC E wh O HMIO whe PLC Parts O alll and ector Graph image library NUB_CTRL_BARO01 vg TR o NY are blank o NUM_DISP_BAROOL vg eee EEE Sm AUM_KEYOOL g Bit State Bit State Lamp l Setting LON Bit Stake Direct Window O rs HMI and PLC Sitch all blank ai CE 7 E Multiple State Multiple State eee E ee Oe ar fi PLC1 0 Setting Display cae ee ee a eee a E PLEO r ig J Function Parts Ready Mouse x 336 v 222 B l Once the PLC and HMI icons are dragged into the project window related information will be displayed in the Project File Window and Project Construct Window as 60 Chapter 3 Description of the eV5000 Software shown in the following figure a Filef F EditfE Vviewi Toolsi Librarvif PLC Parts P Function Parts Window HelptH of X 4G ae Bae 2 oOoOwy oo sw Og ee i g z a k ma 1 RH RHAa DMNA j Sagen ia Z aoge oe eT E Seen een eee E 2 e HHE ee ee ee oe eee Nd Graph element window ki Project files window 2 Connector of 1234 HMI HMI ar oO AMID whe FLE O HMIO whe PLC Parts 4 vector Graph z Touch screen displays NUB_CTRL_BAROOL vg e corresponding NUM_DISP_BAROOL vg iu z contents om MUM_KE
221. g of the moving component 6 9 Animation a Animation The Animation Component is used to place an object on the window at a specified location determined by a predefined path and data in the PLC The state and the absolute location of the shape on the window depend on current reading value of two continuous PLC registers Typically the first register controls the state of the object and the second controls the position along the predefined path As the PLC position register changes value the vectogram or bitmap jumps to the next position along the path 148 Chapter 6 Components 9 ANID j 0 mn Q 3 Predetermined 2 path Graphics is roaming on the predefined path when read address 1 0 1 2 3 4 gt Adding an Animation component 1 Click the Animation icon 2 Click on screen to define the path and the moving nodes for the object to travel click on each moving node one by one to set the path and then right click to complete the setup of path 3 Double click on the animation component and the following dialog box appears Fill in the Basic Attribution tab Animation Component Attribution Basic Attribution Animation Tag Graphics Friority Input Address Output Address HMI HMId PLC HMI PLC Addr Type Lw Addr 0 Addr Type Addr Code Type BIN FormatDDODo Code Type Format OOO0D Word T Use Addr Tac WordN a m Description ANID Priority Reserved function
222. g the Modbus RTU protocol and serial communication can be connected with such touch screens They support 01 05 and 16 commands of the MODBUS RTU protocol For detailed functional commands refer to manuals provided by Modicon For related hardware and software settings refer to the technical manuals provided by related controller manufacturers 397 Chapter 14 Connection of eView MT5000 4000 with Common PLCs 1 MODBUS port RS 232 eView MT5000 4000 touch MODBUS RTU screen controller COMO0 COM1 RS232 COM port 2 MODBUS Port RS422 485 eView MT5000 4000 touch MODBUS RTU screen controller COMO0 COM1 RS422 485 COM port 14 12 MODBUS ASCII Controller Connection of MODBUS ASCII Controller with MT5000 4000 Touch Screen EV5000 software setting Recommended Optional Setting Precaution Setting PLC Type Modbus ASCII Must be the same as the Data Bits 7ors COM port settings of the controller 398 Chapter 14 Connection of eView MT5000 4000 with Common PLCs Must be the same as the Stop Bits 1 1 or 2 COM port settings of the controller Must be the same as the 9600 19200 3840 Bits per Second COM port settings of the 0 57600 115200 controller Must be the same as the Even parity odd Parity Even parity COM port settings of the parity none controller Must be the same as the PLC Station No 1 0 31 COM port settings of the controller Controller software setting It is necessary to set the commun
223. g the switch shown on the panel screen with your finger Up to now the making of the switch is completed The making of other components is similar For details refer to the introduction to related components in Chapter 6 For detailed operations of offline simulation and download refer to Chapter 3 25 Chapter 3 Description of the eV5000 Software Chapter 3 Description of the EV5000 Software 3 1 User Interface of EV5000 Run the EV5000 software create an empty project by the procedures described in Chapter 2 the EV5000 interface will show the contents as shown in the following figure The name and function of each item are described as follows You may also right click in the View or toolbar to view the toolbars as shown in the following figure C Basic toolbar F Position toolbar E Lib toolbar J Fill Style toolbar M Graph Element Window 1 Turn to page toolbar G System toolbar D Drawing toolbar 2 pag ro THANG whe Ez mi Eie Edhi Westh Took Liters Wikii Heii x IF dg Qe i 1 ah uHe p S100 v0 SAR O N E e Bg H Line width toolbar bie aa o i TE EAEN ETDs BREA MA i A ggg Bos E orat TA wom EEEE tt L Line style toolbar z E TPE beat he Wenz ic haagoge Graph ekmanii rarah l Prokat ia erda Connactar T Tag position toolbar new E Hei 5 Vector Graph O Project file window Project construct vini S Configuration window Ez bext 0 N Project c
224. ge after importing to make it fill the edit box When using the bitmap graphic in configuration window you can stretch the outline of the part or enter the size in the Position tab of the component attribution dialogbox In these two method you can retrim the bitmap to its correct ratio image needed 5 7 Creating a Label A label refers to a text displayed on the surface of switches lamps or other components gt Adding a label 1 Select Label tab in the Component Attribution Dialogbox of the part selected 2 Check the option Use Label 3 As shown in the following figure fill the content to be displayed on the label in Content bit setting Component Attribution Basic Attribution Bit State Setting Tag Graphics Fosition wW UseTag Language Chinese PR China 1 Tag List Set such display properties as alignment mode font size and color Click OK to finish the setting State No The State No is only valid for components with multiple states The text of each state can be displayed independently The user can set the text content font size color and the alignment for corresponding states separately Content Enter the text to be displayed on the surface of the component If there are multiple 121 Chapter 5 Basic Design of EV5000 lines press the Enter key to start a new line Font Size The variable font size range is 8 16 24 32 48 64 72 and 96 pixels Alignment If the text input of a l
225. ght Rotate for 90 degrees rotate anticlockwise for 90 degrees T J T T Horizontally Flip Vertically and Rotate 902 in the Edit menu or select the icon i Sk to flip the component 41 Chapter 3 Description of the eV5000 Software 3 1 3 View view Yh Toolsi LibraryiD Windowlw l HelptH Basic Toolbar S Cerl 4lk 5 Component Labrary Window Ctrl Alt Graphics Toolbar D Chrl Alk Turn To Page Toolbar P Ctrl 4lk P Position Adjust Toolbart At Ctrl 4lk 4 Line Width Toolbar t Ctrl Line Style Toolbart Chrl alk System Toolbar T Cerl Alt T State Toolbart Ctrl Alk 1 Database ToolbartL Ctrl 4lk B6 Code Edit Toolbar B Chr AIE ED Filled Effect Toolbar E Ctr alk H Project Structure Window Ctrl alk C Project File List Window F Ctrl Alt F Compile Information WindowhT Ckrl 4lk M Component List Windows Ctrl Alk E The View menu provides control over the display of various toolbars and windows To make the expected toolbars and windows visible in the user interface check the corresponding item on the View menu Standard toolbar As shown in the figure the contents of the standard toolbar correspond to the contents in the menu in turn New IS hdg kaange Ee About Open Display Components Sace Attributes Name Save All Print rint Preview Cut Multi Redo Copy Copy Undo Paste Delete New Project Create a proje
226. gures and numerals to process or monitor manage and deal with the multifunctional display screen which may display ever changing information anytime With the rapid development of the mechanical equipment old operation interfaces can only be operated by skilled service trained professionals and furthermore the operation is difficult and the working efficiency can not be improved However the application of the HMI can make clear indication and inform the operator of the current conditions of the machine so that the operation will be simple and visual misoperations can be reduced and even a new operator can operate the entire machine easily Furthermore the use of the HMI can also implement standard and simple cabling of a machine and meanwhile the number of I O points necessary for the PLC Programmable Logic Controller can be reduced and the added value of the entire set of equipment can be relatively improved due to the compact size and high performance of the control panel at the same time when the production cost is reduced As a new kind of HMI touch screen has attracted wide attention since its emergence With its simplicity operational convenience powerful function and excellent stability it is applicable to industrial environments and even can find wide application in our daily life For example automatic parking equipment automatic car washer roller bridge lifting and hoisting control production line monitoring amp control or ev
227. h failures or the inadvertent errors that might be introduced if programs are changed while the equipment is in operation The ICS 3 304 81 Safety Recommendations are reproduced by permission of the National Electrical Manufacturers Association from NEMA ICS 3 304 2 3 Communications Connections The ports as you look at the back of the case are the ports for connecting to a printer a PLC or some other external device Controller Connectors 2 3 1 Connection with External Devices Cable Different cables are required for various devices requirements Restrict cable length to less than 150m for Rs 485 422 devices and 15m for RS 232 devices to avoid communications problems Caution 7 The display will give a prompt of PLC no response for each communications fault until the communication resumes normal The COM ion pannon indicator on the front panel will light up in each communication Do no insert or _ i i Shielded cables must be used for long lengths or cables run in an u ou j i electrically noisy environment cable while the Do not run cables next to AC power lines or near sources of electrical noise power is on Be sure that the cable ends have been inserted all of the way into mating connectors and are secure Pin Pin assignment of the 9 pin male D SUB COMO This port is used to Designations connect the MT4000 series touch screens and provides RS 232 485 422 port controller 4321 937 6 Note Thi
228. hange of the sampling values in the current page It does not allow the extension of the trend graph If the user selects multiple page display it allows the extension of the trend graph Data is displayed in the same way but when the trend graph rolls forward the previous sampling data will not be lost Historical data will be saved to the memory for future reference Please note that a maximum of 31 pages of historical data are available which is determined by the No of pages parameter Attribute Start from left or start from right In other words it determines whether the graph is displayed from the left to right or from the right to left when displaying the sampling data Sampling Time Time interval between two sampling points in seconds No of Sampling Points Number of sampling points displayed for one curve No of Pages When the Type is set to Multiple Pages this box is available Channel Number of tracks to be displayed corresponding to the number of word registers of the PLC data One word register corresponds to one track Hold Keep The bit register that controls the start or stop of the trend graph in other words the sampling data stops when the Hold bit is turned ON and the sampling continues and trend graph will be dynamically displayed when the Hold bit is turned OFF again Scroll This address has to be used with the scrolling bar component that is the user can view the trend graph by directly moving the s
229. he controller with the same power supply Note The 24 VDC output from some controllers may not have enough current to power the MT4000 Wire lengths of DC power should be minimized Maximum 500 m shielded 300 m unshielded twisted pairs Twisted pairs are recommended for use If wiring is to be exposed to lightning or surges take appropriate lightning protection measures and use appropriate lightning arresting devices Keep AC high energy and rapidly switching DC wiring separate from signal cables Equip ungrounded DC supplies with a resistor and capacitor in parallel to earth ground This provides a path for static and high frequency dissipation Typical values to use are 1 MOhm and 4700 pF To make a connection strip about 3 8 of insulation off the end of the wire furcate terminal recommended turn the connector screw counterclockwise until the gap is wide open insert the wire all the way in and turn the screw clockwise until it s tight Connect positive DC line to the 24V terminal and the DC ground to the OV terminal 1 Chassis ground must be used DC ground is not directly coupled to earth ground internally It is preferable not to ground DC negative return to chassis ground as poor site earths can introduce noise into a system but if necessary an earth connection should be made from the power supply return point to the star earth point Ground conductors should be as short and as
230. he double word variable select 2 in the corresponding component address properties dialog box 2 The operable range in the above table indicates the operable range of the MT5000 4000 touch screen The actual range of the PLC may be broader or narrower than this range Detailed wiring diagram Note Modicon Compact Momentum Quantum series PLCs can be connected with the eView touch screen through the communication port on the CPUs and by the Modbus RTU protocol Where the 171 CCS 960 XX in the Compact A E 984 series does not support Modbus serial port and cannot communicate with the touch screen directly instead it can be connected with the touch screen through the communication module 171 JNN 210 32 For detailed settings refer to the technical manuals provided by Schneider Electric 1 CPU Compact Momentum series PLC RS232 375 Chapter 14 Connection of eView MT5000 4000 with Common PLCs Modicon PLC eView MT5000 4000 touch Compact Momentum series screen CPU COM0 COM1 COM port 8 pin RJ 45 female connector Note Two Modbus serial ports of the CPU E984 258 265 275 285 in Compact series and the COM1 of the CPU 171 CCS 700 760 780 in the Momentum series are all RJ 45 hardware interfaces The wiring diagram is shown in the above figure For related software and hardware settings refer to the technical manuals provided by Schneider Electric RJ45 Pin 1 Pin assignment of 8 pin RJ 45 female connector 2 CPU M
231. he interface setting is the same as a PC interface The MT4300 series provides a 15 pin print interface 12 13 14 15 Parallel Print Port 15 pin D SUB Female Connector The user can print window events texts and bitmaps online 12 Chapter 1 Installation of EV5000 1 Printer setting In the Project Structure Window double click the HMI icon and the HMI Attribute dialog box appears Enter the Printer Settings window as shown in the following figure HMI Attribute Hh Task Bar HMI Extend Attribute Print Setting Serial Port 0 Setting Serial Port 1 Setting Printer SPAT SP ONT6PH Print Number Print Time Print Extend Timefd h rn Print Date Print Extend Datefyyyy min dd Check Window Errors For printing methods please refer to Chapter 10 which details the print settings and printing methods 1 2 4 USB Interface Our MT5000 and MT4000 provide you with a high speed download channel that is the USB interface The USB interface will greatly increase the download speed without the need of knowing the IP address of the target touch screen in advance Therefore you are recommended to use the USB interface for downloading For download operations please refer to Section 3 9 13 Chapter 2 Making a Simple Project Chapter 2 Creating a Simple Project Ease of use is one of the most outstanding advantage of our EV5000 configuration software In this chapter a step by step instructio
232. he logo should not larger than the size of the panel For MT4300 5300 the size is 320 240 for MT4400 4500 5400 5500 the size is 640 480 In the following figures we use the logo of Stepservo as an example 84 Chapter 3 Description of the eV5000 Software Look ir fe My Pictures da E File name defaultlog Files of type Graphics File brp gif ipa Cancel After selecting the image and click Open the logo image is imported into the editing window and you can ajust the size and position of it When the adjustment is done save it and close the window to return to the project window Connect the HMI panel and PC compile the project and click download icon the dialog box we have discussed above appears ee EVDownload Select HMI HMI Station HI Information Download File Path E tertitert_Dl aa pkg Communication Type USE port Download Exit Select LOGO File checkbox and click Download If the user only want to download the logo and don t want to download the user data file unselect the User Data File checkbox DownLoad 67 Uncompile FILE Downloading a coe 85 Chapter 3 Description of the eV5000 Software After the download is finished click OK DownLoad 100 EVDownload Message Ed Flash Writing Please wait Download success cancel Reset the
233. he operation effect of the pointer Refer to the description of scale later in this document 3 Click OK and adjust the position and size of the meter component 6 16 Indirect Window E Indirect Window The Indirect Window component pops up a registered window over the current screen Refer to section 4 3 for the creation of a new window Usually the size of windows invoked by an indirect window component is made smaller than full screen size or equal to the full screen size The Indirect Window component calls up a window that is specified by a word register spefified by the Input Address There is no absolute limitation to the maximum registered Indirect Windows components in the EV5000 However at run time only 16 windows at the most can be displayed simultaneously To close an indirect window change the value of the Input Address register to 0 174 A indow 20 175 Chapter 6 Components Address of window Chapter 6 Components Nenu Task B Press the button to close the window Nenu Task B gt Adding an Indirect Window 1 Click the indirect window component icon and drag it to the window the Basic Attribution tab of the component attribution dialogbox appears 176 Chapter 6 Components Indirect Window Component Attribution Basic Attribution Position Priority Input Address Output Address Hal HiO PLCE Htl PLC Addr Type Li Addr 0 Addr Type Addr Code Type BIN Foma
234. he scale Mark Length Select the length of scale mark Starting Angle Ending Angle Starting angle and ending angel of the arc Go to the Position tab and adjust the size and position of the scale component Position and size of it can also be set by using the mouse to drag the component Click OK to complete the setting 6 27 Scroll Bar z f Scroll Bar The Scroll Bar is used to control the scrolling of a selected graph usually trend graph or oscillograph in multiple page mode It includes word or double word register to define the scrolling scope of the scroll bar gt Adding a scroll bar Click the Scroll Bar icon and drag it to the window the basic attribution tab of the component attributions dialogbox appears Scrollbar Component Attribution Basic Attribution Scroll Bar Position Priority Input Address a Output Address a Hl PLE HM HMIO PLC 0 Addr Type Addr Addr Type Code Type Forma DODDO Code Type BIN Foma DOCOO Word is ddr Ta wordho E Description SCR Output Address The first word or double word register is used to save the current position value the second word or double word is used to save the position value of the starting point that is the starting point in the left or upper most part of the scroll bar depending on the scroll direction of the scroll bar the last word or double word is used to save the position value for the end of the scroll bar that is the
235. he user want to delete some windows or parts click to select and press DELETE key on the keypad the selected frame or part will be deleted PLC Attribution Pico oe PLCLO oe PLC2 D o ipea _ I C com tomi om iii PLC Attribution x The first digit indicates the number of PLC that is the number designated to the PLC The digit after the colon indicates the station number of the PLC 3 5 Compile Information Window The Compile Information Window displays the complie progress and the compiling results indicates the errors when they occur as shown in the following figure Message winodow Compilation Done Error When a project is open the Compilation Information Window will display the loaded information of the project When a project is being compiled the Compile Information Window will display the compilation progress and error messages if there are any 65 Chapter 3 Description of the eV5000 Software 3 6 Component List Window Select Component List Window under the View menu to open the Component List Window Viewty Toolsi Libraryi D Window HelptH Basic Toolbar S Chrl Alk 5 Component Labrary Window Ctrl Alt Graphics Toolbar D Ctrl alk Turn To Page Toolbar P Ctrl lk P Position Adjust Toolbar 4 Ctrl 4lk 4 Line Width Toolbar w Cbrl FAlt L Line Style Toolbarty Ctrl alk System Toolbar T Ctrl Alk T State Toolbar G Ctrl Alk 1 Database ToolbarfL Ctrl 4lk 6 Code
236. hen the value of LB9100 is 1 the system switches to method in the case Pinyin input method when the value is 0 the system of Pinyin input switches to English input method method co CO CO Cc CO Cc CO O O CO co oe CO O gt oO NO Keypad control bit The whole screen of the MT5000 4000 is divided into four equal parts as shown below 315 Chapter 11 Reserved Register Addresses of the System Left Top Right Top LB9 62 ToptLB908 gt LB9066 Rondon Pe i a t n s Eea manan nnn D fe L a P Left LB9664 lt LB0068 Right LB9664 Bot ton Lef t Bot tom R ight LB9663 Bottom LB9681 gt lt LB9 67 gt Nenu isk Bar i P When LB9060 is used to control the keypad and if text input or numeric input in the left part of the screen is triggered the keypad will appear in a direct window In general the direct window is designed to appear in the right part of the screen so it will not overlap the input component in the left Likewise when LB9080 is selected and the text input or numeric input in the upper part of the screen is triggered the direct window including the designated keypad will appear 11 2 Local Word LW registers reserved Eo a a 9000 9001 Recipe data index RWI and RBI use this two words to store index address address R W for accessing recipe data the lower word is 9000 and the higher word is 9001 R W 9002 9003 upper limit of thejlt ind
237. hernet Interface The MT5000 MT4000 does not have any Ethernet interface has an adaptive 10M 100M network interface which can implement such functions as program download online simulation and interconnection of multiple devices With the use of the Ethernet we can conduct the following operations 1 Downloading programs from a PC to the HMI The download is much faster than download through an RS232 or USB port 2 Implementing networking and interconnection of multiple HMIs 3 Implementing communications between the HMI and field equipment The settings of the Ethernet interface are as follows 1 In the Project Window double click the HMI icon and the following dialog box appears HMI Attribute Print Setting Seral Port Setting Seral Port 1 Setting HMI Task Bar HMI Extend Attribute Network Setting IP Address IBA 165 0 253 Port Number 2009 subnet Mask gud ea eon else Gate ay 1d ibe O 1 Display Setting Screen Display Mode Horizonts Vertical Description rea 2 Set the IP Address and Port Number Note that the IP addresses over the same network 10 Chapter 1 Installation of EV5000 should not be the same 3 After saving the compilation download the IP address of the HMI through the serial port or USB port After download the IP address on the screen will change to the IP address set in the above figure Compile amp Download Option Compile W
238. iable frequency drivers and switching power supplies Their input and output cables should be screened to a star earth point 2 1 2 Making a NEMA 4 Mounting 470 Panel Details NEMA 4 Installation Caution Note Appendix Ill Hardware Overview The MT4000 series of products can be mounted into panels with a depth of over 105 mm It is recommended that the product be installed on the front panel of a steel enclosure To enable the user to open the front panel of the panel smoothly allow a clearance of at lease 25 mm around the sides of the installed product To ensure smooth and easy connection of power supply and cables it is recommended that a panel with a depth of at least 105 mm should be adopted Put the unit through the panel holes Slide the clamps into the 4 holes provided around the case Tighten the clamping screws in an even pattern until the unit is secured in the panel Do not over tighten mounting clamps Specifications Note To seal to NEMA 4 specifications all supplied mounting clamps must be used and panel cannot flex more than 0 010 2 1 3 Environmental Considerations i The MT4000 series are to be used indoors as built in LCD displays Make sure that the displays are installed correctly and that operating limits are followed See Hardware Specifications Do not operate the unit in areas subject to explosion hazards due to flammable gases vapors or dusts The unit should not be install
239. ic impedance of the transmission cable The terminating resistor is not required for short distance transmission within 300 meters The terminating resistor is connected to the farthest end of the transmission cable The pinout of the eView MT5000 4000 RS 485 4 wire is shown as follows Description Data receiving signal cable A Data receiving signal cable B Data transmission signal cable A Data transmission signal cable B Grounding signal cable 13 4 RS 485 Since RS 485 is developed on the basis of RS 422 many electrical specifications of the RS 485 are similar to those of the Rs 422 Both of them adopt balanced transmission mode and the transmission cables have to be configured with terminating resistors RS 485 supports 2 wire and 4 wire modes The 2 wire mode supports real multipoint bidirectional communication where the Enable signal controls the transmission and receiving of data as shown in the figure below 340 Chapter 13 Serial Communication A A O e e See e O Q nna l B B O Se o O TON o E E ese cere es TX a ENABLE ENABLE e 4 at JA pe O RX w w e e ee GWG GWG A Q O 9 i G B O 9 TX G RI IKZ Z ENABLE e R a A RX 0o fA Sth R B YW Cet Ha LAR HE GWG Eyit Wie a gu E
240. ically attached to the ports when both ends are attached to one port of a device the connection is established Note The connection port number should be consistent with the actual physical connection 8 Click the HMIO icon the following dialog box appears 16 Chapter 2 Making a Simple Project HMI Attribute Print Setting Seral Port Setting Seral Port 1 Setting HMI Task Bar HMI Extend Attribute Network Setting IP Address 192 168 0 253 ee 2008 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 Gateway 192 166 Display Setting Screen Display Mode Horizonte Description Set the IP Address and Port Number of the touch panel in this dialog box If there is only one touch panel in your design and you will not use the function of indirect online simulation or download the project file to the panel via Ethernet you can simply skip this step If you use functions such as multi HMI interconnection via Ethernet or Ethernet download please allocate a unique IP address to your touch pannel according to the actual situations of the LAN Local Area Network If there is no conflict over the network it is recommended not to change the default port number 9 Double click the PLC icon set Station No to be the corresponding PLC station number 17 PLC Attribute 10 Set connection parameters Chapter 2 Making a Simple Project Double click the HMIO icon to show the HMI Attribute window Click the
241. icates the maximum input value when the numeric numeric input part input is activated it is set to 0 when the numeric input is not activated R 9004 9005 lower limit of thej it indicates the minimum input value when the numeric numeric input part input is activated it is set to 0 when the numeric input is not activated R 9007 Brush definition Message board function select the width for the brush 0 1 pixel 1 2 pixels 2 3 pixels R 90 Brush color 0 255 Message board function the user can select any color corresponding tojamong 256 colors by entering a number R 256 color standard color palette 316 9006 Message board Message board function select current operation tool on operation mode the message board 0 Brush 1 Eraser 2 Block Cleanout R 08 Chapter 11 Reserved Register Addresses of the System Interference When the lower byte of this LW register is not zero the value will be sent as an INT byte in MEMORY_LINK protocol value range Ox20 OxFE after successful sending the byte will be cleared to O 9034 9035 System time in the Double word Displays the time in the unit of 0 1 second unit of 0 1 second R 9040 9041 Security level Double word Refer to related part in Chapter 12 ee eee 9042 Security level Display the security level of the current Base Window oN peke oraait ont ea toe 9043 Forced switchover of Forced switchover from a higher level for example level security level 2
242. ication protocol of the communication port of the controller to Modbus ASCII mode Please refer to the specifications provided by Schneider Electric related to MODBUS protocol and user manuals provided by related controller manufacturers Reference website Http www modicon com Http www modbus org Operable address range PLC Address mete Operable Range Description Type System internal external 1 9999 DDDD output node System internal external 1 9999 DDDD input node 1 9999 DDDD Analog input data register Ls 1 9999 DDDD Data register Note D indicates decimal notation If it is necessary to operate the double word variable select 2 in the corresponding component address properties dialog box The operable range in the above table indicates the operable range of the MT5000 4000 touch screen The actual range of the PLC may be broader or narrower than this range 399 Chapter 14 Connection of eView MT5000 4000 with Common PLCs Detailed wiring diagram Note The eView MT5000 4000 series touch screens can communicate with the controller through the Modbus ASCII protocol so all controllers supporting the Modbus ASCII protocol and serial communication can be connected with such touch screens They support 01 05 and 16 commands of the Modbus ASCII protocol For detailed functional commands refer to manuals provided by Modicon For related hardware and software settings refer to the technical manuals prov
243. icon i Equal horizontal space This function can be used to implement the equal horizontal space between multiple selected components and shapes First select a shape or component to be operated and then select Equal Horizontal Space in the Edit menu or click the icon 4 The effect is as follows Equal vertical space This function can be used to implement the equal vertical space between multiple selected components and shapes First select a shape or component to be operated and then select Equal Vertical Space in the Edit menu or click the icon ia Horizontal center This function is used to place multiple selected components or shapes in the horizontal center position of the window First select a shape or component to be operated and then select Horizontal Center in the Edit menu or click the icon as shown in the following figure ovvi 40 Chapter 3 Description of the eV5000 Software Vertical center This function is used to place multiple selected components or shapes in the vertical center position of the window First select a shape or component to be operated and then select Vertical Center in the Edit menu or click the icon The figure is omitted Flip and Rotate Only shapes drawn by drawing tools can be flipped such as straight lines circles and polygons Other components cannot be flipped First select a shape to be flipped and then select Flip Flip Horizontal flip left ri
244. ided by related controller manufacturers 1 MODBUS port RS 232 eView MT5000 4000 touch screen COMO0 COM1 MODBUS ASCII controller RS232 COM port 2 MODBUS port RS 422 485 eView MT5000 4000 touch screen COMO0 COM1 MODBUS ASCII controller RS422 485 COM port 400 Chapter 14 Connection of eView MT5000 4000 with Common PLCs 14 13 VIGOR PLC Connection of VIGOR VB Series PLC with eView MT5000 4000 Human machine Interfaces EV5000 software setting Recommended Optional Setting Precaution Setting COMO COM1 RS232 RS485 Must be the same as the COM port settings of the PLC Must be the same as the COM Stop Bits 1 1 or 2 port settings of the PLC 9600 19200 38400 Must be the same as the COM Bits per Second 19200 57600 115200 port settings of the PLC Even parity odd Must be the same as the COM Parity Even parity parity none port settings of the PLC Must be the same as the COM PLC Station No 0 255 port settings of the PLC PLC software setting Data Bits T Torg Please note that the setting of the PLC station No must be consistent with that of the touch screen software Operable address range PLC Aree Operable Range Format J Deserpton O gt 028 emaa 02s 0 meae Ou ome o at ann ae at sess ooo Ses ain rode rt o m ee 200 255 DDD Counter buffer double 9000 9255 DDD Special data register 401 Chapter 14 Connection of eView MT5000 4000 with Common PLCs
245. igh Voltage Caution e Emergency Stop 1 J Caution Appendix Ill Hardware Overview An Internal fuse will prevent damage for over voltage condition however it isn t guaranteed DC voltage sources should provide proper isolation from main AC power A hard wired Emergency Stop should be fitted in any system using the MT5000 touch screens to comply with the ICS Safety Recommendations Do not power the MT5000 touch screens and inductive loads or input circuitry to the controller with the same Supply Voltage power supply Condition gt Caution Wire Routing Connection 2 2 2 Grounding Requirements Note The 24 VDC output from some controllers may not have enough current to power the MT5000 Wire lengths of DC power should be minimized Maximum 500 m shielded 300 m unshielded twisted pairs Twisted pairs are recommended for use If the wiring is to be exposed to lightning or surges take appropriate lightning protection measures and use appropriate lightning arresting devices Keep AC high energy and rapidly switching DC wiring separate from signal cables Equip ungrounded DC supplies with a resistor and capacitor in parallel to earth ground This provides a path for static and high frequency dissipation Typical values to use are 1 MOhm and 4700 pF To make a connection strip about 3 8 of insulation off the end of the wire furcate terminal recommended turn the connector screw
246. ight green pints of the component and drag with your mouse as shown in the following figure MID E a m E E i E a Part Fill and Frame To change the change the color of the part outline or the filling color select a component and click the arrow after Line Color icon to change the frame color To change the fill color click the arrow after the black box as shown in the following figure O EO DOSL Custom Color Text Click the text icon the text dialog box appears as shown in the following figure 50 Chapter 3 Description of the eV5000 Software Text Attribute Text Position C Graphics Mode Vector Font Content Tag Mode ved Font 16 Y Align Lett a Language English US4 Content Shows the text contents on the parts When entering text you can press the Enter key to start a new line Graphics Mode In this mode you can change the font size font font style and so on Click Vector Font to show the font property setting dialog box as shown in the following figure Font Font style SIZE MS Sang Serf Regular E MS Sans Sent MS Serf 10 OMY Boli 12 O Palatino Linotype Bold Italic 14 Aaa 16 Roman 2d Script Cancel Effects Sample Strikeout A abby Underline eee Color Script Westem Tag Mode In this mode you can only change the font size align mode and color 51 Text Attribute Text Position O Graphics Mode Tag Mo
247. imit The operation becomes active when the window Is open The incremental Value is added to the current value of the designated PLC word register at regular intervals as specified by the Execution Cycle until the Upper Limit is reached Then the incremental value is subtracted from the designated PLC word address until zero is reached This cycle is repeated unconditionally 237 ess apter 6 Components wes Upper Limit gt Ye again The operation becomes active when the window is open At every break time interval the value in the designated PLC word register is added 1 until upper limit reach After then the value is reset to its lower limit and start e y s The operation becomes active when the window is open At every break time interval the value in the designated PLC word register is subtracted 1 until lower limit reach After then the value is reset to its upper limit and start again Step down Upper gt l Limit NO Limi When the component is pressed preset constant data is written to the Set Constant designated PLC word address Enter the constant in the Set Value box 3 Click OK to complete the setting and adjust the position and size of the timer component 238 Chapter 6 Components 6 31 Video Components Only Applicable to MT5600T MT5700T Video components are used for real time emonitoring They can be used for real time monitoring on industrial fields l
248. in text to denote states 4 Go to the Graphics tab Select a vectogram or bitmap to indicate the touch area and touch status whether this component is pressed or not 5 Go to the Position tab and adjust the position and size of the bit setting component if necessary 5 Click OK to complete the setting of the bit setting component 6 3 Switch Bit State piel The switch is a combination of Indicator Lamp and Bit Setting components It indicates the ON OFF status of a PLC bit register and defines a touch area when activated it may change the status of a designated bit register The input address and the output address can be the same or different gt Adding a switch component 1 Click the switch icon and drag it to the window the Basic Attribution tab of the Component Attribution dialogbox appears Bit Control Component Attribution Basic Attribution Switch Tag Graphics Position Friority Input Address Output Address Hh HIO PLC HMI HIO PLE o Addr Type LB Add Addr Type LE Add JO Code Type Format DDDDD Code Type Format ODDOD Word Use Addr Tz Word ia Description Swoi Priority Reserved function not used now gt input Address Bit address of the PLC register that controls the switch state shape and label information gt Output Address Bit address of the PLC register whose ON or OFF state is controlled by the switch Address Input output address of the register cor
249. indowFr ame4 ford Library waphics Library jacrocode rompile HMIZ findowFr ame findowFramel findowFr amez findowFr ames 448 Appendix II Troubleshooting Refer to Chapter 14 for address range of PLC components or refer to related PLC data to modify the PLC component address 2 Macro programming error as shown in the following figure Simulation of a wrong macro k E x 1 2 3 include macrotypedef h 4 include math h 5 6 int MacroEntryt T S a int 56 g 10 return O 11 12 lt i gt Parameters x Tata type Param name PLO Ho PLO Address type Address Ho of Word Opthade Message window Compile Pa Compile HMIO E W indowFr amel W indowFr amel W indowFr amec WindowFr ames WindowFr amet ford Library Graphics Library Pre compile HMI macro_ c Macrocode macro_ ce macro O c 8 error C2143 syntax error missing before constant macro O c In function macro main macro _O 65 error parse error before numeric constant macro _O c In function macro main macro O 6 error parse error before numeric constant macro O c In function macro main macro _0 6 error parse error before numeric constant macro _O c In function macro main macro _O 65 error parse error before numeric constant macro O c In function macro main macro _0 6 error parse error before numeric constant macro O c In function macro main m
250. ine Simulation F Te Indirect Online Simulation hift F5 Direct Online Simulation h Ctr F5 Options O Alt F7 Zs AEE HMI Simulation HMI Station HMI Information Simulation Serial Fort HMI COMO HMI COMI Show Information Simulation Type Offline Simulation pkg File Fath Fi htext_Olitext_Ol pkg HULL Communication Type Tr HULL _ HULL 19 Chapter 2 Making a Simple Project Click Simulate the simulation window of the empty project we have created appears as shown in the following figure Nenu Task E The project does not have any components and cannot execute any operations To exit the simulation program right click in the simulation window area and click close or directly press the Spacebar 2 2 Adding a Switch Component gt Part 2 Adding a switch component to the project 1 In the Project Structure Window select the HMI icon and right click click Edit Configuration in the shortcut menu as shown in the following figure 20 Chapter 2 Making a Simple Project CubiD He I Copic Ctrl C Delete Pastel P Ctrl V Multi Copy Exchange Serials Ports Init Boot Window 2 The program switches to the window editing mode as shown in the following figure HEIO vhe as File E Edit E View Tools T Library D PLC Parts P Function Parts S Window W Help H fX ERSA E IR eee 254 Bie se DOOMNY oo ma EA 2 OCS RORO EO
251. ine dot rrow Style 3 Dashed line dot dot rrow Style 2 Arrow Style 1 Position adjustment toolbar Left by 1 F a Fb lE ait at a a 2 oo oo iT siti Rotate by 90 Right by 1 Flip Vertically Up by 1 Flip Horizentally Down by 1 Align Vertical Center Align Left Align Hori Center Align Right Same Vertical Space Align Top Same Horizental Space Align Bottom Ungroup Align Hori Midli Group Align Vertical Midline Set to Bottom Same Width Set to Top Same Height Same Size Move Left by One Pixel Sets a component to move left by one pixel Move Right by One Pixel Sets a component to move right by one pixel Move Up by One Pixel Sets a component to move upward by one pixel Move Down by One Pixel Sets a component to move downward by one pixel Left If the text content exceeds two lines the text lines will align to the left also applicable to 45 Chapter 3 Description of the eV5000 Software components Align Right If the text content exceeds two lines the text lines will align to the right also applicable to components Align Top Sets multiple components in top alignment mode Align Bottom Sets multiple components in bottom alignment mode Vertical Center If the text content exceeds two lines the text will be arranged in the vertical center alignment mode also applicable to components Horizontal Center If the text content exceeds two lines the text wil
252. ing IP address and port number If LB9050 is set to ON some system parameters will be restored to factory default settings Note When the local addresses exceed 10000 the system does not support dynamic modification function in simulation mode however the addresses can be read For example the address is LW10005 and the offline simulation displays as 2006 However the value cannot be modified in the offline simulation mode and it can be modified when run on the actual panel The offline simulation mode does not support backlight control function The offline simulation mode does not support the use of video components The offline simulation mode does not support print function 320 Chapter 12 Security Level Chapter 12 Security Level Security level is used to set different access rights for different users and only the user with high level password can access windows with high security levels which greatly enhances the security of application projects In the Window Properties window there is a Security Level option In other words we can set the security level for any window as shown below Window Attribution windo Na Framer Special Attribute Position Init Pos 4 0 Width 320 Height 240 Bottom Window Use Background Color 1 None 2 Hone 3 Nome Frame Pop Window Type E W Tracking Monopoly i 0 F Col pen Fe W Clipping Coherence Please not the security level setting
253. ing and decimal point are disabled Data Input Component Attribution Basic Attribution Numeric Data Trigger Address Font Graphics Position Data Type 7 Digits Above Decimal Point 4 Digits Below Decimal Point j Min Yalue 0 Max Value 65535 Project Data Conversion Fro Min Value 0 Pro Max Value bake Fa In case of Hex and binary formats the maximum and minimum input values are regarded as unsigned binary data 4 Password Display only for any reading value This is used for password input scaling and decimal point are disabled 156 Chapter 6 Components Data Input Component Attribution Basic Attribution Numeric Data Trigger Address Fort Graphics Position Data Type Digits Above Decimal Paint Digits Below Decimal Paoint Min Yalue 0 Mas Value 9395999595955 Pro Min Yalue Fro Maxs Value 5 Single float Data from the controller register is translated from a 32 bit IEEE Floating Point format to a decimal number and displayed 6 Double float Data from the controller is translated from a 64 bit IEEE Floating Point format to a decimal number and displayed When input data the Input Min and Input Max limit the range of valid input data and Engineering Max and Engineering Min limit the range of valid input data if Project Engineering Data Conversion is selected If Project Engineering Data Conversion is selected the value written to th
254. ing ensure normal operation of the product AN To ensure normal operation of the product do not install MT5000 series touch screens in the environment where severe mechanical vibration or Mechanical l shocks are present environment 2 Installation Instructions 2 1 Installation Instructions 2 1 1 Location Considerations Care should be taken when locating any equipment behind the MT5000 series of products to ensure AC power wiring PLC output modules contactors starters and relays and any other source of electrical interface are kept away from the back of these products Particular care should be taken to the position of variable frequency drivers and switching power supplies Their input and output cables should be screened to a star earth point 2 1 2 Making a NEMA 4 Mounting 450 Panel Details NEMA 4 Installation Caution Note Appendix Ill Hardware Overview The MT5000 series of products can be mounted into panels with a depth of over 105 mm It is recommended that the product be installed on the front panel of a steel enclosure To enable the user to open the front panel of the panel smoothly allow a clearance of at lease 25 mm around the sides of the installed product To ensure smooth and easy connection of power supply and cables it is recommended that a panel with a depth of at least 105 mm should be adopted Put the unit through the panel holes Slide the clamps into the 4 holes provided around the
255. ing the DB10 For detailed settings refer to the technical manuals of SIEMENS 1 HMI adapter 6ES7972 0CA10 0XA0 SIEMENS PLC eView MT5000 4000 touch S7 300 series HMI screen adapter COMO COM1 RS 232 interface 385 Chapter 14 Connection of eView MT5000 4000 with Common PLCs 2 PC adapter 6ES7972 0CA23 0XA0 eView MT5000 4000 touch SIEMENS PLC screen S7 300 series PC adapter COM0 COM1 RS 232 interface 3 MPI adapter MT5 S7 300 eView MT5000 4000 touch SIEMENS PLC screen eView compatible PMI adapter COMO COM1 MT5 S7 300 RS 232 interface 5 GND 14 8 LG PLC LG Industrial Systems LG Industrial Systems Connection of LG Master K Series PLC with eView MT5000 4000 Touch Screen EV5000 software setting Recommended Optional Setting Precaution Setting LG MASTER K300S CPU Select different PLC type LG MASTER K LG MASTER K Cnet LG according to different MODBUS RTU PLCs 386 Cnet Chapter 14 Connection of eView MT5000 4000 with Common PLCs COM port settings of the a ee ee eee Must be the same as the Stop Bits 1 1 or 2 COM port settings of the Must be the same as the 9600 19200 38400 Bits per Second COM port settings of the 57600 115200 PLC Must be the same as the Even parity odd Parity None COM port settings of the parity none PLC Must be the same as the PLC Station No 0 31 COM port settings of the PLC Note In the case of Master K 80S series set LG MASTER K3
256. ion The same as the downloading in the configuration edit program Refer to the downloading described in Chapter 3 Download User Data Files Download compiled configuration project data files pkg to the touch panel Click Download User Data File 420 Chapter 15 Operation Instructions for EVManager mi EVManager aca Communication Type Network J Upload Operate a j IF 255 255 255 255 PORT 21845 OGO Show Set Show LOGO O UnShow LOGO 123 pkg File name 123 Files of type User Data Files pkg Cancel 3 mlj p Open as read only daon io Select a compiled configuration project file pkg and click Open If your configuration project consists of multiple touch panels as shown below te bet fl a Siemens 57 200 HMO Siemens 57 U0 Select the HMI number corresponding to your target panel and click Download 421 Chapter 15 Operation Instructions for EVManager E Download Select Section Select HMI eee Data File HMI Station HMI Information LC Recipe File Locd File Download File Path ci documents and settings yazhou Communication Type USE port EF Downloading recipe Click Download Recipe select a compiled recipe file rcp file click Open to download the file TAr g Ts T aag Communication Set 3 E Nanager Communication Type USB port Download Section LOGO Show Set Download User Data Show L
257. ion of the oscillogram If the user selects multiple page display it allows the extension of the oscillogram The data is displayed in the same way but when the oscillogram rolls forward the previous sampling data will not be discarded Previous data will be saved to the memory for future reference Please note that a maximum of 31 pages of historical data are available which is determined by the No of Pages parameter Attribute Start from left or start from right In other words it determines whether the oscillogram is displayed from the left to right or from the right to left when displaying sampling data Sampling Time Time interval between two sampling points in seconds Sampling Ratio When selecting values other than 1 for this parameter the oscilloscope will read the multiple groups of data at a time and display them For example if the input address is LW10 number of channels set to 3 and sampling ratio set to 2 the oscilloscope component actually read data from 6 registers LW10 LW15 at a reading operation The six registers form 2 groups group 1 is composed of LW10 LW11 and LW12 while group 2 covers the other three When the sampling time is 1 second it will read these two groups of data in each second It is required that the PLC should prepare these two groups of data in advance ata sampling speed of 0 5S and store them in the corresponding addresses The oscilloscope can read display two 0 5S
258. ion on the event display area window 4 pops up The user can close the window or toggle the state of LB10 Note that the event information which has been acknowledged is shown in different colors which are designated in the event display component attribution dialogbox 206 Chapter 6 Components View e Close 13 45 LB16 is on i ge Ei Current LEIG Q D Temprature Figure 3 When the Current Temperature register is set to 99 above the limit of 80 the LW30 event is triggered and the corresponding event information is displayed on the window Touch the information will pop up window 5 on the screen Note that the color of event information O has been changed to white which means the LB10 register has returned to its normal state Note a Do not select the print function if the panel doesn t connect with a printer On Trigger Return to Normal If the print function is selected but no printer is connected once the event is triggered the touch screen will display Print error which will flicker on the screen b Pop up windows will only be displayed when the corresponding event information is acknowledged by the operator To close the pop up windows place a function key component with the function of closing window on it For details about function key components see section 6 6 24 Alarm Bar Alarm Displ AN BAW The Alarm Bar displays triggered alarm messages
259. is valid only for base windows and not available for other windows A project has three security levels namely high 2 medium 1 and low 0 When creating a new window the default security level is low In the HMI Properties window the user can set the password for each security level When a user is in a high security level he can access windows with lower security levels however if the user is in a low security level he cannot access windows with higher security levels It helps to enhance security For example important keys can be configured in a window with high security level therefore a user cannot access such keys in general and can only access such contents after entering the password of high security level The following is an example on the use of security level Firstly select File gt New Project to create a new project Then double click HMI in the Project Structure Window In the HMI Properties window click the Touch Screen Extended Properties tab and then set password for three security levels Here we set the password for level 1 security to 1111 as shown below 321 HMI Attribution Print Setting Hal ScreenProtect TextLab Lan Serial Port 0 Setting Task Bar Public Win Attribution Pop Window Attnibution Chapter 12 Security Level Seral Port 1 Setting Hl Extend Attribution Display below the basic windoy Display on the top layer F stetet stats Save Event Log Defa
260. isplays the touch lamp color when touching a working area 264 Chapter 8 Recipe Data Hide fast selection window and Hide taskbar The texts entered in these two boxes are the texts to be displayed in the Display Hide Fast selection Window and Display Hide Taskbar window Button Position The position for fast selection window buttons and taskbar buttons is set here only two options are provided aligning to the right or aligning to the left If the Align Right option is selected the fast selection window buttons and taskbar buttons will be displayed in the lower right corner of the screen otherwise they will be displayed in the lower left corner Text Alignment The alignment mode of the texts in the fast selection window buttons and taskbar buttons You can enter a name in the fast selection window and taskbar like Start Taskbar Button Area Size Select the width and height of the button area Font Size Select the font size of the labels of the fast selection window button and taskbar button 7 3 HMI Extend Attributions HMI Attribution Print Setting Senal Port 0 Setting Seral Port 1 Setting Htl Task Bar HM Extend Attribution ScreenProtect Public Vin Attribution Display below the basic windoy TestLab Lan 4 Pop Window Attribution Display on the top layer ka Default Lan Upload kep SOggo0 Save Event Log a 0 Level Key alata ta taia Init amp ddr Init window Frame 1 Level Rey 111111 Record Public Windo
261. it may cause a communication failure 271 Chapter 8 Recipe Data A Note If the selected PLC protocol is a slave protocol that is the HMI serves as a slave station the station No cannot be set PLC Attribution Fort 2007 2 2 Chapter 8 Recipe Data Chapter 8 Recipe Data The recipe data transmission component can activate the data transmission of a consecutive register It supports downloading data from the memory of the recipe card to the PLC as well as uploading data from the PLC to the memory of the recipe card The size of the transmission data can be set For MT5000 HMI a 256K Byte memory card can be selected to store recipe data For MT4000 HMI the capacity of the recipe memory is 128K byte 8 1 Creating a Recipe Data Transmission Component A EON I Recipe Data 1 Press the recipe data transmission component icon and the following window appears Enter related contents in the Basic Attribution tab Recipe Component Attribution Basic Attribution Recipe Data Tag Graphics Friority Input Address Output Address HbA PLC Hil HMD 0 Addr Type Addr Addr Type EW T Code Type Format OODDD Code Type BIN Format OOobo Ward E WordNa i Description ACPO Output Address Refers to the initial address of a consecutive PLC register the word addresses designated by the Data Length after this address can be used to transmit data Address Address corresponding to the recipe da
262. ith the timer trigger to implement multiple triggering modes of register triggering timing triggering and window initialization triggering 4 PLC control macro Set the PLC control component as shown below Select the Execute Macro Instruction option In this way a segment of macrocodes can be executed when a PLC register is set to 1 PLE Control HM HID PLC No Addr Type w Address 0 Code Type Format OODD im Control Type Execute Macro Program Macro Number macro_0 c Open Address Tag Labrary Cancel 5 Event triggered macro Set the event triggered macro as shown below In this way a segment of macrocodes can be triggered when a condition is satisfied Address Hl PLE Mo Data Type Add Type Address o Format DDDDD E Attribution Event Trigging Cond Pint On Trig Return to Noral Trig Function i Execute Macrocode imacra_O c Pop Window macio Uc Write Data HMI PLC No Addr T ype Address g 16 Ea Test Color Open Text Library Open Address Tag Labrary 9 4 Examples The following sections will present a further explanation on macros with several interesting 298 Chapter 9 Macro examples Example 1 Touch Screen Bouncing Ball In this example it uses macros to implement the moving of a ball in a display area The ball will be bounced back when it touches the border of the display area The moving speed of the ball can be adju
263. ize 100x60 but the size of the original image is 200x120 Since the image size doesn t exceed the smallest panel resolution 320x240 the image can be imported and used for that part but it will be displayed as a 100x60 part which means the a original image of the size 100x60 will have the same effect Resize the larger original image will certainly save 3 4 storage space and small file will save the time for the panel CPU Always take your time to resize the image to proper size will make the project file smaller and run faster Images are stored in lossless compression mode in the panel so any image of the loss 120 Chapter 5 Basic Design of EV5000 compression format for example jpg will be converted to lossless compression file which may make the file larger than original image The actual size of an image depends mainly on the number of pixels For example for a 100x60 color picture its size before compression is 100x60x2 12000 bytes and the compression rate in lossless compression mode is 10 80 depending on the specific images Therefore to reduce the project size reasonable optimization of the image size and colors is the best way When importing a bitmap if there is no special requirement try to make the outer frame of the bitmap fit the outline of the edit box otherwise a blank area will appear in the bitmap Suppose the user import a 100x50 original image to a edit box of the size 100x100 the user should stretch the ima
264. key Go to the Position tab set the size of the key to 25 x 25 165 Chapter 6 Components a Add other function keys in the same way adjust their position to line them up a RRS ZN ZS Z Illl ill Add a text display component according to the above description of the register LW9060 LW0975 if the font alignment mode for the text display component is set to Align Right the data starts from the highest word that is LW9075 Since the text input component covers 5 words the input address of the text display component is LW9071 LW9071 to LW9075 are used for saving the content the user has just input Goto the Font tab and set the alignment mode as Align Right 11213 1415 6 1718 9 1 TE pallens Text Display Component Attribution RARBG Text Display Component Attribution Input Address Output Address PLC Hm HMI Addr 9071 Addr Type LW Font Size 24 T Align Right r Fomat DODDOD Code Type BIN Use Addr Tag WordNo 166 Chapter 6 Components 3 Add a direct window component on window 0 The input address is LB9068 see chapter 11 for details Go to the direct window tab to designate window 4 for this component Go to the Position tab set the size of the DW component the same as that of window 4 250 x 125 M29 Maa A p gt S 2S S Z lll Sill Direct Window Component Attribution Basic Attribution Direct Window Position Priority
265. knowledge of the C language Instead it focuses on the creation and usage of macros through examples 9 1 Getting started A Simple Macro Template The following section describes how to compile a simple macro template and the macro template will implement the following simple operation functions Read two signed numbers divide LWO with LW1 and place the result of a double float in the four words of LW2 LW5 Click the macro icon J in the toolbar of the database or select the Add Macrocode command in the File menu LibrarviD Window wd HelpfH Text Labrary T Address Tagi Alarm Information Logon 4 al a Event Information Log ntE PLO Control P New Graphicsta Import Graphics LabraryviTi EJ m fe Macrocode iM The following dialog box appears New Macrocode Hh HIG canel 290 Chapter 9 Macro Select an HMI number and enter a file name in the File Name text box Click Create to enter the macro editing window as shown below 1 include macrotypedef h Project Files window x include math h test 071116 4 int MacroEntry HMI 5 Vector Graph 6 return 0 Fi 5 lt gt Data type Param name PLC Station Reg Addre Address No of Word OptMode Project construct window a Es test 071116 HMI O Hmo 9 PLC ai PLCO 0 lt Before compiling macrocodes define input and output variables Right click in the Mac
266. l Midline amp Horizontal Midline Align Horizontal Centera Ctrl I Align Vertical Centeri Ctrl g Select All Component B Select Componett 4 36 Chapter 3 Description of the eV5000 Software Edit E View Toolsi D Library Di Wine Undotz Ctrl z d Cut D Ctrl x Ha Copyich Ctrl Nudge d 2 Lek Make Same Size t ol Right Layer Fat Top io Groupia Ctrl 6 JJ Bottom He vertical Midline Ea Horizontal Midline Align Horizontal Center S Ctrl I li Align vertical Center T Chrl 0 Select All Component Select Componett 4 After the Left operation the two parts line up to the left side Size To make multiple components have the equal width equal height or equal size press the corresponding icons for adjusting component size or select the related menu items The related icons are S00 og which respectively indicate equal width equal height and equal size The default component for size reference is the component in the left Adjust other components to be of the same width height or size as this one To designate a component as a reference component press and hold the Shift key to select the reference component and then select other components 37 Chapter 3 Description of the eV5000 Software EditiE Views ToolsiT LibraryiD Wine Undolz Ctrl z Cuti D Ctrl Copy Ctrl C Mudge
267. l be arranged in the horizontal center alignment mode also applicable to components Equal Width Sets equal width for multiple components Equal Height Sets equal height for multiple components Equal Size Sets equal size for multiple components Top Sets a component to be located in the topmost layer Bottom Sets a component to be located in the bottommost layer Group Includes multiple components into one group Ungroup Dissects the grouped parts into multiple discrete parts Equal Horizontal Space Sets equal horizontal space for multiple components Equal Vertical Space Sets equal vertical space for multiple components Flip Vertical Flip up down Flip Horizontal Flip left right Rotate for 90 Rotate for 90 degrees counter clock wisely Tag Position toolbar ee m a el Ew Some component has a tag on it By default the tag is in the center of the component But when the component has been stretched or resized the tag may no longer lay in the center To position the tag more precisely click the tag to select it then the tag position tools are enabled The tools listed here are Align the tags to the left to the right to the top to the bottom align horizontal midline and align vertical midline Drawing toolbar 46 Chapter 3 Description of the eV5000 Software Select Swe ht OM ET Co E A BAN m RGB Grayscale switch Line NTransparent Color
268. lamp part belongs to in this field PLC Select a PLC If this HMI is connected with more than one PLC select the PLC containing the expected register Address Type Select the address type corresponding to the lamp that is the address type of the register being monitored The address type varies with PLC type Besides the 126 Chapter 6 Components PLC registers you can also use the bit registers within the HMI panel For internal register address of HMI refer to Section 5 4 Please note that some internal addresses of the HMI are reserved by the system Do not use these system reserved addresses For details refer to Chapter 11 Address Bit address corresponding to the lamp Use Address Label Whether to use the address entered in the address label For details refer to Section 6 34 Description A reference name not displayed that you assign to the lamp 2 Goto the Lamp tab Bit State Lamp Component Attribute Basic Attribute Bit state Lamp Tag Graphics Position Function Rate value 1 Blinking on state 0 value 1 Blinking on state 1 value 1 switch Blinking on state 0 or 1 value Blinking on state U value Blinking on state 1 value O switch Blinking on state 0 or 1 gt Function Normal Just display state graphic in static state Blinking on state 0 The lamp will Blink the shape corresponding to state O when the bit status is OFF The blinking period is set in the Rate text box When the bit satus i
269. large in size as possible The conductors must always be large enough to carry the maximum 472 2 2 3 CE Requirements Appendix Ill Hardware Overview short circuit current Ground conductors should be connected to a star earth ground point This ensures that no ground conductor carries current from any other branch To make the MT4000 series comply with EMC directives and to reduce susceptibility to electrical interference a piece of separate 14 AWG ground wire should be taken to the chassis ground terminal of the power connector This ground connection should be run directly to the star earth connection point 2 2 4 Safety Guidelines This section presents recommended installation practices and procedures Since no two applications are identical these recommendations should be considered as guidelines Hardware Considerations AS Programming Considerations A Caution The system designer should be aware that devices in controller systems could fail and thereby create an unsafe condition Furthermore electrical interference in an operator interface such as an MT4000 touch screen can lead to equipment start up which could result in property damage and or physical injury to the equipment operator If you or your company use any programmable control systems that require an operator or attendant you should be aware that this potential safety hazard exists and take appropriate precautions Although the s
270. lected the component will move horizontally along the Y axis only but the user can set relative movement position by set input register value limits 147 Chapter 6 Components and scaling value limits for example when the read PLC register value range is 0 1000 but the relative moving position range on the screen is 0 640 The lower and upper limits of the scaling value can be set to 0 and 640 respectively the lower and upper limits of the input value can be set to 0 and 1000 respectively The first register stores component state and the second register stores position l The function is the same as the X scaling but at an opposite X Reverse Scaling a direction l The function is the same as the Y scaling but at an opposite Y Reverse Scaling Sa direction When scaling is used scaling is performed as follows Display value Current position Reading value Input Min x Scaling max Scaling Min Input Max Input Min When reverse scaling is used scaling is performed as follows Display value Current position Input Max reading value X Scaling max Scaling Min Input Max Input Min 3 Go to the Label tab Fill in text to be displayed 4 Go to the Graphics tab Select vectogram or bitmap to represent motion or to display states 5 Go to the Position tab and adjust the position and size of the moving component if necessary 6 Click OK to complete the settin
271. lecting this type of Backlight Open the control Bit will be automatically cleared after the backlight being turned on Screen Hardcopy This operation is used to control the printout of the content of current screen by use of a bit address If the bit register is triggered from OFF state to ON state the current screen will be printed out In the Print Settings interface that appears by selecting HMI Properties in the 255 Chapter 6 Components communication configuration interface the valid printer type should be set Please refer to the descriptions of Screen Hardcopy in Chapter 10 Execute Macro Program If the designated bit address state is ON the selected macro will be triggered PLC Control Htl HMIO PLE No o Addr Type LB Address 0 Code Type Format ODI Use Address Tag Control Type Execute Macro Program Macro Number Open Address Tag Labrary Cancel eAddress Type Address The address of the register triggering the execution of the macro instruction If this bit is set to 1 the macro code will be executed if it is set to 0 the macro instruction will not be executed Macro No The number of the macro code to be executed note This function can be used only when macrocodes are added to the project For the adding of macrocodes please refer to Chapter 9 6 37 About Overlapping of Components The overlapping of multiple components will generate many sp
272. lectrical characteristics of the RS 485 are as follows Logic 1 is indicated by the voltage difference of 2 6 V between two cables logic 0 is indicated by the voltage difference of 2 6 V between two cables RS 485 supports a maximum transmission rate of 10 Mbps RS 485 interface adopts a combination of balanced drivers and differential receivers to enhance its capability of preventing common mode interference featuring better noise suppression and anti interference performance The standard maximum transmission distance is 4000 feet but it can achieve an actual distance of 3000 meters In addition the bus of the RS 232 interface can be connected with only one receiver that is the single station capability However the bus of the RS 485 can be connected with a maximum of 128 receivers that is the multi station capability Therefore the user can set up an equipment network with a single RS 485 interface Since the RS 485 interface has excellent noise suppression and anti interference performance long transmission distance and multi station capability it is widely applied Because the half duplex network established through the RS 485 interface needs two connection cables the RS 485 interface adopt shielded twisted pairs for transmission cables Pinout of the eView MT5000 4000 RS 485 2 wire is shown as follows 341 Chapter 13 Serial Communication Description Data receiving transmission signal cable A Data receivi
273. lick Download as shown in the figure below 288 Chapter 8 Recipe Data Recipe Card Group B Recipe Data RHI RHI 4 Rcapansneee ane e ee fe LW960 Subtraction Overlay LH SUB LH9000 ADD Overlay LHGO ADD 4X100 4X104 We can see that the data of 4x100 changes to KKKKKKKK 1234 The change in the memory is shown as follows oono moan waw O o 4x100 4x103 KKKKKKKK 4x104 1234 After learning the preparation process of this project we should learn the basic project design of recipe data The user can make full use of the diversified features of the EV5000 configuration software to produce better projects 289 Chapter 9 Macro Chapter 9 Macro Code Macro instructions are a kind of advanced touch screen control method which strengthens the functions of the touch screen The touch screen will have the same logic and arithmetic operations as the PLC by the programming of macros Flexibly use of macros will enable the touch screen to implement many powerful functions that cannot be supported by many regular components and to make your human machine interfaces more perfect The EV5000 provides totally new macros different from the macro script language modes of other human machine interfaces The macro is fully compatible with standard C language ANSI C89 Since abundant documents and data on the C language are easily available this chapter will not describe syntax and basic
274. lick OK and adjust the position and size of the Function Key 223 Chapter 6 Components 6 29 1 Switch Window Function Key Component Attribution Function Key Trigger Addr Tag Graphics Position fe Switch Window C Framedl Excute Marco f Keyboard Func Change A f Map Keyboard lapping Key C Message Board a Move ta Magnify Multiple Print Page a a If the function key component is used to manipunate the window select the Switch Window option there are some specific window operation options in the list on the right Among them are Change basic window goto previous change common window change fast selection window popup window close window move task bar and minimize window Change Basic Window If the this option is selected when the function key is pressed the current basic window including all of its sub windows will be terminated and it will display the basic window designated by the window number selected from the list on the right The basic window to be switched to must be an existing one so it can be selected in the list Goto Previous Window This function closes the current basic window and recalls the last active basic window It is only valid for basic windows For example if basic window 21 is the basic window displayed just before window 32 and window 32 had a function key defined as Return to Previous then when the function key is pressed the screen will be clear and display
275. lick the cil Import Shape Library icon on the toolbar and the following dialog box appears Import Graphics Program Files Common Files ComPlus Applications Bii e 5000_UNICODE_ENU 4 123 C Program C Program C Program C Program 1234 Filesse V5000_ UNI FilesseVSO00_ UNI Files eVS5000_UNI Files e V5000_UNI bq_ q_lib BG 7 j VG alarm gt arrow C Program C Program C Program C Program 3 conveyor FilesveV5000_ UNI Files eVS000_ UNI Files eV5000_ UNI Files eVS000_UNI nature OSHA C Program C Program C Program C Program i door O filter hopper C lamp E pipe FilesseVS000_ UNI Filestew S000_UNI Fieste 5000_ONI FilesteYS000_UNI 3 pump a i signpost i stirrer O symbol z si a 1 I Type Yector graph vq State Then find the LIB vg file under the software installation directory the vg files are classified into different categories stored in corresponding folders for easy browsing Select a vectogram to be imported click Import the vectogram will be copied to the vg folder under the current project directory It supports the simultaneous import of multiple vectograms or bitmaps For shapes in the same folder you only need to select all shapes to be imported and click Import All the vectograms and bitmaps imported or created for the entire project will be displayed in the Shape 110 Chapter 5 Basic Design of E
276. lid line The style of lines arcs and the outline of rectangles are also set by this toolbar For details refer to the descriptions in Section 3 1 4 Graph element window The Graph element window has five optional columns Connector Used to select the type of communication link HMI Used to select the HMI type PLC Used to select the PLC type PLC parts Used to select various configuration parts related to PLC registers Function parts Used to select various functional parts Project construct window The Project construct window shows the tree relationship between project windows and parts of the PLC and HMI in the entire project with a tree diagram For details refer to the descriptions in Section 3 4 Project files window The Project files window indicates the relationship between the touch panel and bitmap files of the project in tree structure For details refer to the descriptions in Section 3 3 Compile information window For details refer to the descriptions in Section 3 5 28 Chapter 3 Description of the eV5000 Software q Component list window For details refer to the descriptions in Section 3 6 r Status bar The Status bar shows the current mouse position width height of the target object edit status and so on s Configuration window The user can draw the configuration in this window A Note To change the color of the fonts and the fill color of the window and rectangles directly click the
277. limits will be obtained from the PLC register described later in this section and the values for such limits are changeable If this check box is not selected the upper and lower alarm limits depend on the values set in the Upper Alarm Limit and Lower Alarm Limit text boxes in the figure If the value of the Input Address is between the upper and lower limits the bar graph will not generate an alarm otherwise it will generate an alarm The color will vary with the settings of the Alarm Color Thus the user can use different colors for normal data and data exceed Variable Alarm Checked Unchecked Read Address Bar graph data Bar graph data alarm limits Read Address 1 Lower alarm limit Read Address 2 Upper alarm limit Maximum Value Minimum Value Set the corresponding maximum value and minimum value for the bar graph Upper Alarm Limit Lower Alarm Limit If the Variable Alarm check box is not selected these two text boxes are valid Under this condition the panel use the two panel registers instead of two PLC registers to store the alarm limits Color Set bar color for normal value bar color for values exceed alarm limits background color and frame color Go to the Graphics tab Select vectogram or bitmap to enhance display effect 171 Chapter 6 Components The filled bar percentage is calculated as follows Percentage of filled bar Reading value Min value x 100 Max value Min value
278. line color button O 3 1 1 The File Menu New Project Select New Project in the File menu or click the icon ie to create a new project HMI0 whe File Edit E Viewtv ToolstT Library Newih Crit EF Open fo chro Savers Ctrl 5 Save 5 Chrl Alk 5 Ge Save Alia Closefic 1 Fiibext O1 bext O1 woj 2E aalaa wpj 3 dd wpj uite Enter a project name Press OK a new project will be created Open Project Select Open Project in the File menu or click the icon to open an existing project 29 Chapter 3 Description of the eV5000 Software HMI0 whe File Edit E view ToolstT Library Ho Mewt Ctrl Open 2 Chrl c Savers Ctrl 5 Save S Ctrl Alk 5 Save Alia Closefic 1 Fiibext O1ytext O1 woj 2 E aalaa wo 3 dd wpj Quigg Look in C 4422C 4422CE File name api Files of type Ev5000 Project File pj Cancel Select a project file wpj file to be opened click Open or double click the project file to open it Close Project Select Close Project in the File menu the current project will be closed If it has not been saved before the program will ask the user to save it 30 Chapter 3 Description of the eV5000 Software File Edit E Viewtv ToolstT Library Ey Mewin Ctrl E Open 0 Creo A Savers Ctrl 5 H Save alla Closefic 1 Fiibext O1ytext O1 woj 2 E aalaa Woy 3 dd wpj Quigg After clicking Close Proje
279. loading is saved The user have to have the proper panel to perform the simulation Connect the panel to PC with USB cable or MT4000 5000 downloading cable or Ethernet cable Connect the PLC to the panel with the required communication cable For more information about the communication cable refer to chapter 14 After the compiling the project and connecting the PLC HMI panel and PC properly click the le button the following dialog box appears 68 Chapter 3 Description of the eV5000 Software Fa EVSimulator HMI Simulation HMI Station HMI Information s Simulation Serial Fort HMI COMO HMI COMI Show Information Simulation Type HULL pkg File Fath NULL Communication Type PE COM Select an HMI to be simulated click Simulate to start simulation Note 1 The MT5000 panels can perform indirect online simulation via the Ethernet USB or serial port 2 The MT4000 panels can perform indirect online simulation via the USB or serial port 3 9 Download After a project is compiled it can be downloaded to the touch panel for actual operation The MT5000 panels provide three download methods USB Ethernet and serial port The MT4000 panels provide two download modes USB and serial port Downloading via the Ethernet is the fastest way while downloading via the serial port and USB is a bit slower Before download upload the users must set the communication parameters first Set the communication p
280. local data register LW of the touch screen during transmission The offset is referred to 0 For example in the above example if the data of the register 4X103 is 100 the start address of the data block in the touch screen during the transmission is RW LW 100 0 100 Application examples Suppose that we need a PLC to control the transmission of 30 words from registers starting with 4X10 in the MODBUS PLC to the data block of the same size starting from RW200 in the recipe memory of the touch screen The implementation is described as follows 1 Designate four data registers starting with DM10 to be used to control data transmission Thus first we need to input an entry of PLC control component to the PLC Control Library select General PLC Control for the type and set the Input Address to 4X10 254 Chapter 6 Components 2 Next determine the data block size and the address offset Set 4X11 to 30 indicating that the size of the transmitted data block is 30 words Set 4X12 to 86 indicating the source start address of the operation is 4X100 14 86 of the PLC Set 4X13 to 200 indicating the destination address is RW200 0 200 3 Finally based on the data transmission direction set the transmission type code to execute the transmission process 4X10 should be set to 1 indicating that the data of the PLC data block with the set start address
281. lose them The basic window must be of the full screen size The fast selection window supports pop up windows but the Truncated feature of the pop up windows invoked by fast selection window can not be selected when setting the property of that pop up window 7 Pop up windows are attached to the windows which contain the parts that invoke those pop ups So pop up windows invoked by parts in the common window will exist until the common window parts turn them off 4 2 Window Properties To set the window properties double click on the blank area of the window or click the icon to show the window properties setting dialog box 90 Chapter 4 Windows Window Arino findow Sate Level Lowe Special Attribute E Position Use Background Color s D Y E width 320 Height 240 Transparence Oe Bottom window 1 None k 3 Frame Pop Window Type W Tracking Monopoly th 0 Frame Color gt width z EA W Clipping Coherence The descriptions of the window properties are as follows Name A unique name allocated to each window for the convenience of differentiation and remembering The name here can be changed whenever it is necessary to do so Number The valid window number ranges from O to 65535 The window number is automatically allocated by the system when a window is created The user cannot change it The window numbers may not be consecutive due to the deleting adding operations Position If a window is
282. mal times The use of the Real Time Clock RTC or reading time from the PLC is required for proper display of the time This component is only used to display event messages To enter an event message the Event Entry component Event Information logon is required gt Adding event display 1 Click the Event Display component icon and drag it to the window the basic attribution tab of the component attribution dialogbox appears Event Display Component Attribution Basic Attribution Event Display Component Position Priority Input Address Output Address HMI HMO PLC HMI Addr Type Lw Add Addr Type Addr Code Type BIN Foma DODDO Code Type Format DDDOD Word Use WwiordN a Mm Use Description EDO Input Address The Input Address controls the scrolling up and down of the event display window All active event messages are sorted by time the new events are displayed on top and the older ones are put on the bottom If the register value is N the number N message of the order of arrival is placed on the first line of the display window Address The word register address corresponding to the event display component Code Type BIN or BCD No of Words The default value is 1 for input address Use Address Tag Whether to use the address entered in the address tag library For details refer to Section 6 34 Description A reference name not displayed that you assign to the event display compone
283. n holes Weight Cooling method Natural air cooling i IN on 466 Appendix IIl Hardware Overview MT5600 Dimensional Drawing Unit mm inch Front View Side View 47 1 85 max 350 13 78 264 10 39 Top View Rear View 328 12 91 242 9 53 467 Appendix Ill Hardware Overview MT5700T Basic Parameters MT5700T Case color Metallic grey 400MHz RISC 8M FLASH 16M SDRAM COM port 2 RS 232 485 422 1 10 100M Ethernet 1 USB SLAVE Printer port 1 DB25 General specifications 21 28VDC_ working current Max 750mA 24V starting current Power supply Max 900mA 24V Complies with EN61000 6 4 2001 EN55011 EN61000 6 2 2001 CE certification EN61000 4 2 3 4 5 6 standard Dimensions of 468 Appendix IIl Hardware Overview MT5700 Dimensional Drawing Unit mm inch Front View Side View 4511 77 say 12 0 47 406 5 16 00 313 5 12 34 Top View 0086 a 8808 m A000 a 0088 Rear View 388 15 28 295 11 61 469 Appendix Ill Hardware Overview Installation of MT4000 Series Touch Screens 1 Installation Overview 1 1 Installation Environment The MT4000 series touch screens are industrial products designed for Applicat factory applications They are designed to work stably in most industrial ication Be environments at 32 113 F 0 45 C They may not be applied to some environment T o specific outdoor environments For
284. n of creating a simple project containing only one switch control part is given which makes the user getting started with the basic procedure of project making More sophisticated projects can be created with similar methods 2 1 New an empty Project gt Part 1 New an empty project 1 After installing the EV5000 software find the corresponding executable program under the directory Start gt Programs gt eview gt EV5000 and click the EV5000 icon gt fg EYSOOO_UNICODE_ENL E YS000 User Manual if Games Startup a amp Internet Explorer Er EyS5000_enu oa EVManager_enu BA EVPLCAddressview gy Uninstall yi MSN Explorer ot 2 The following window appears File E Edit E View v T a da noa ht P Bn ae ools T Library D PLC Parts P Function Parts S Window Help H Progect Sites singe E Project construct window X Mouse x d y d Width d H 14 Chapter 2 Making a Simple Project 3 Choose New Project in the File menu the following dialog box appears Name the project you want to create You may also click gt gt to select a path for storing the new project files In this example the project name is test_01 Click Create Hew Project Project Name test_Ol Content C Program Files eV5000_UHICODE_EWUtest_0O1 OF Cancel Browse for Folder x Seleck Folder E G My Documents E 9 My Computer E HA 3t Floppy C40 H Loc
285. n tab of the component attribution dialogbox appears 178 Chapter 6 Components Direct Window Component Attribution Basic Attribution Direct windows Position Pricrity Input Address Output Address HMI HlO PLC HMI Addr Type LB Add Addr Type Addr Code Type Format DODDO Code Type Format ODODD Word E i wordHo E Description pwi Priority Reserved function not used for the time being input Address Bit in the PLC that activates the direct window Address The bit address corresponding to the direct window component Use Address Tag Whether to use the address entered in the address tag library For details refer to Section 6 34 Description A reference name not displayed that you assign to the direct window component 2 Go to the Direct window tab and select a target window number in the Window No drop down list box Direct Window Component Attribution Basic Attribution Direct Window Fosition Window No O Frame0 E 3 Click OK and adjust the position and size of the direct window component The size of the window limits the area of display The area of pop up window out of the direct window boundary will not be displayed Function Key can be assigned to the window to enable repositioning and minimizing features Refer to Window Bar and Minimize Window in the Function Key 6 18 Alarm Information Logon Messages to be displayed on the Alarm Display component must be r
286. nd Graphics Channel Position Type Mlulitip Att Start fromLe Sam Time 1 PageNum 15 W Save Time Sam Flot 21 Channel 4 7 gt Control Address HhAl PLU No Add Type Address CodeTypeordLen Format ODDDD Eo iT Ww Keep HMIC O LB 100 WwW Aol Het o bw 100 BIN 3 TB Use Addi Tag if Time HME 0 Owo 110 BIN 12 Use Adde Tag The settings for the track lines remain unchanged as shown in the figure below 190 Chapter 6 Components Trend Graph Component Attribution Basic Attribution Trend Graphics Channel Position signed int 0 signed int 0 signed int 0 0 signed int Add two scale components and five vertical lines One scale component is horizontal and the other is vertical and each is divided into 20 equal scales Place them together to form a network and place the trend graph component on the top Please note that the size of these three components 2 scale components and 1 trend graph must be the same and they must be overlapped with each other as shown in the figure below FED y NOG MET MOZ NDS PERE FEEF PEER EREE THO TH The Ths Settings for four timer components remain unchanged Add two multi state setting word setting components to control the increase and decrease of LW100 so as to control the page up or page down operation For the multi state setting component controlling the value increase set outp
287. nel tab and set related parameters of each track XY Graph Component Attribution Basic Attribution W Graphics Channel Position 0 5 0 5 1 signed int 0 Color Designate the color of each track Line Width The width of a line including 8 options Data Type Sets the data type with only two options of signed integer and unsigned integer signed int Max and Min Value in X Direction Set the corresponding maximum and minimum values of each track line along the Y direction When a read value from the corresponding register is greater than the maximum value or less than the minimum value the maximum value or the minimum value will be displayed on the graph Max and Min Value in X Direction Set the corresponding maximum and minimum values of each track line along the X direction When a read value from the corresponding register is greater than the maximum value or less than the minimum value the maximum value or the minimum value will be displayed on the graph 4 Go to the Position tab and adjust the position and size of the XY graph component if necessary 5 Click OK to complete the setting of the XY plot component 6 8 Moving Component a Moving emponent The Moving Component tool is used to place a vectogram or bitmap on the window at a location specified by the PLC register The state and the absolute location of 144 Chapter 6 Components the shape on the window depend on current reading value
288. ng a machine tool or where the machine cycles automatically consideration should be given to the use of an electromechanical override or other redundant means independent of the programmable controller for starting and interrupting the cycle If provision is required for changing programs while the equipment is in operation consideration should be given to the use of locks or other means of assuring that only authorized personnel can make such changes These recommendations are intended as safeguards against the failure of critical components and the effects of such failures or the inadvertent errors that might be introduced if programs are changed while the equipment is in operation The ICS 3 304 81 Safety Recommendations are reproduced by permission of the National Electrical Manufacturers Association from NEMA ICS 3 304 2 3 Communications Connections The ports as you look at the back of the case are the ports for connecting to a printer a PLC or some other external device Controller Connectors 2 3 1 Connection with External Devices Different cables are required for various devices Cable requirements Restrict cable length to less than 150m for Rs 485 422 devices and 15m for RS 232 devices to avoid communications problems Caution 7 The display will give a prompt of PLC no response for each communications fault until the communication resumes normal The Caution COM indicator on the front
289. ng the panel System parameter settings ee ee ee 10010 Startup window number 0 65535 10011 Screen saver time Set to 0 will disable the screen saver Value larger setting backlight and energy than O will enable the screen saver The valid saving range is 1 600 minute If the value is 10 the panel will enter screen saver after 10 minites with no touch operations 10012 Buzzer 0 Disable 1 Enable 10013 Common indow pop up 0 Normal 1 shown above other windows OO on T T 10014 Common window properties 0 Below base window cei aeon 10016 RTC source 0 PLC Local Word 1 Internal RTC Security Level Mapping 10020 Use security level setting O Disable 1 Enable 1 10022 10023 Password level O 1 Occupy double words 10024 10025 Password level 1 1 Occupy double words 10027 Password level 2 1 Occupy double words Communication Parameter Mapping 10030 10033 IP address 1 Each WORD occupies a field with a value range of 0 255 10034 Port number download portilt is to save the download port number instead number 1 of the communication port number a ac SS 319 Chapter 11 Reserved Register Addresses of the System HMI station number when HMI is used as a slave device ee eer cc iA Kai csc ccc aioe OO ed Eos i S a i station number when HMI is used as a slave device 1 If LB9044 is set to ON communication settings will be written back to the system E PROM includ
290. ng transmission signal cable B Grounding signal cable 342 Chapter 14 Connection of eView MT5000 4000 with Common PLCs Chapter 14 Connection of eView MT5000 4000 with Common PLCs 14 1 OMRON PLC OmRON Sensing tamorrow Connection of OMRON C Series PLC with MT5000 4000 Touch Screen EV5000 software setting Recommended Optional Setting Precaution Setting COM0 COM 1 RS232 RS485 Must be the same as the ee Data Bits Torg port settings of the PLC Must be the same as the COM Stop Bits 1or2 port settings of the PLC Bits per anne 9600 19200 38400 Must be the same as the COM Second 57600 115200 port settings of the PLC Even parity odd Must be the same as the COM Parity Even parity parity none port settings of the PLC PLC Station ere Must be the same as the COM No port settings of the PLC PLC software setting Set the communication protocol of the COM port to Hostlink Please refer to related PLC programming software user manual of OMRON Reference website HT TP oeiweb omron com oei TechManuals PLC htm Operable address range PLC Operable Address Description Type Range 0 65535 65535 DDD BB HR a AR 0 65535 DDD BB R 0 65535 DDD BB Link relay TC 0 255 DDD Timer counter dis coat 343 I O and internal WO and intemal relay a relay Auxiliary relay Chapter 14 Connection of eView MT5000 4000 with Common PLCs Note D indicates decimal notation
291. nt 200 Chapter 6 Components 2 Goto the Event Display Component tab Event Display Component Attribution Basic Attribution Event Display Component Position Row Space Format ColSpace 9 L Sequence No CJ Event Trig Time I Acknowledge Time J Return to Normal Time L Extended Time Format DH M E Acknowledge Color L Short Time Forrnat H M CJ Event Trig Date M D J Extended Date Format y M D Affiimance Click S BackTo Normal Color E Select Area Color Row Spacing Column Spacing The spacing between different rows or columns Acknowledge Mode Click or Double click Color Acknowledge The color after the event message is acknowledged Return to normal The color off the event message after it returns to the normal state Select Box The color of the dashed line that indicates which message the user has selected Format Display format of event messages All added contents for example sequence No trigger time and so on will be displayed before the message Sequence No The number of the event Event numbering starts at 0 Event Trigger time The time that the message was triggered Acknowledge time The time that the message was acknowledged Return to normal time The time at which the conditions causing the eee event returned to a non triggering state 201 Chapter 6 Components Sequence No D Trigger time Acknowledge time Return to normal time Event content A Note Be su
292. nt functions is as shown in the table below Set Value Set the designated bit register to 0 or 1 when the timing time arrives Periodic Toggle The value of the designated bit register flips its status ON OFF when the timing time arrives b Set word register Set Mode Periodical JOG Periodical JOG Periodical Bounce Step up Step down and Set Constant value as shown in the figure below 236 Chapter 6 Components Timer Component Attribution Timer Timer Function P C Execute Waco Set Status t Data UE ia Set blode Periodical JOG 7 Ounce Destination a HI Htl A Periodical JOG Penodical JOG PLC No PLC No HMI Penodical Bounce Step up PLC Ho Addr Type Addr Type Step Down Addr Type Letconst value Address Address 0 Code Style CodeStyle Address CodeStile BIN Data Type Data Len Detailed description of different functions is as shown in the table below Periodical JOG Periodical JOG Periodical Bounce Description Automatically the incremental value is added to the current value of the designated PLC word register in every interval The interval is defined in Execution Cycle When the value reaches the upper limit it starts at 0 again Automatically the subtracted value is subtracted to the current value of the designated PLC word register in every interval The interval is defined in Execution Cycle When the value reaches the lower limit it stops at the lower l
293. nting error detection function is provided in the HMI Properties window HMI Attribution Hh Task Bar HMI Extend Attribution Print Setting Serial Port 0 Setting Serial Port 1 Setting Printer Epon Stylus C65 7 SPAT SP ON16FH iy Print H E z0 Stylus CER gooo CENAE Frint Extend Timeld h m Print Date Print Extend D atefyyyy mm dd iM Check Window Errors When the printer encounters an error the following dialog box appears 309 Chapter 10 Print When the printer has an error set LB9016 to ON The LB9017 can control the on off status of the printer When the LB9017 is set to ON the printer will be disabled 310 Chapter 11 Reserved Register Addresses of the System Chapter 11 Reserved Register Addresses of the System The system reserves some areas of Local Word LW Local Bit LB and Recipe Word RW for special purposes The user must use these addresses according to related description Local Bit LB Reserved range LB9000 9999 Local Word LW Reserved range LW9000 9999 Nonvolatile Local Word Reserved range LW10000 10256 11 1 Local Bit LB registers reserved Note The letter R and W indicates the available operation for the address R means readable and W means writable So a register with the mark R W can be read and write sc Is ae S 9000 9009 Set ON during These bits can be used to initialize some components to be ha i ON upon system startup R W 9010 Recipe downl
294. ntrol entry Click Modify if you want to modify the PLC control entry and by clicking Delete you can delete the selected entry 3 Correctly fill in the contents in the PLC control component dialog box PLC Control x HMI HMIO r FPE Ho 0 i Addr Type Li Address OU Code Type BIH ia Format IDIDI ford Len Use Address Tag Soa pr Macro Number Report Printout Write Data to PLC Current Base General PLC Control z E E ka Open Address Address Type Designate the address type of the register to conduct these PLC control operations Address Designate the address of the register to conduct these PLC control operations Code Format BIN or BCD Control Type Designate the operation behavior The following operations are supported Change Window Report Printout Write data to PLC Current Base Window General PLC Control Back Light Open Close With or without Write back Screen Hardcopy and Execute Macro Program Their functions are described later Macro No It refers to the number of the macro code to be executed when the Control Type is set to Execute Macro Click OK to exit the PLC control component dialog box Click Exit again to exit the PLC Control Object List Change eWindow This operation needs the use of two consecutive word registers When the register corresponding to the Input Address address specified in the PLC Control dialog box is changed t
295. number input keypad and basic window 4 They are in the project after creating and cannot be deleted After creating the project the window shown in 4E 1 Framel edit area Double click in the blank area of a window will envoke the Window Attribution the edit area is window 0 use to change the window shown in the dialog box of that window Shift to window 2 the default fast selection window and double click to show the Window Attribution dialog box There you can see that the window is 100 pixels a to add a new window wide and 220 pixels high with a frame of the width of 5 pixels Click into the project the new window will be designated widnow 5 Open the window attribution dialog box to set the size of window 5 the same as window 2 and add the same kind of frame Add two more window window 6 and window 7 Window 6 will be used as a basic window and window 7 will be a pop up window Change the size of window 7 to 200 pixels wide and 150 pixels high 3 Place three function keys on window 2 that is two Change Basic Window function keys can switch to basic window 0 and basic window 4 respectively and a Change Fast Selection Window function key can switch current fast selection window from window 2 to window 5 Add tags for these function keys for indicating the operator the function they will conduct when pressed the finished window 2 is shown as below 6 gH indos 4 Fast Select Window 5 4 Click A onthe drawing toolbar
296. numeric display component in an appropriate position 6 12 Text Input Text Input A Text Input display current value of the PLC register data as decoded by the standard ASCII character table If the Trigger Address is active turned ON when the shape area is touched text input will be available through an keypad Entered data is put into consecutive PLC registers starting with the Input Address The ASCII code stored in the lower byte is displayed on the left and the one stored in the higher byte is displayed on the right WA AAAAAAA Touch the shape area to activate the text input Enter data from keypad gt Adding a Text Input Component 1 Click the text input component icon and drag it to the window the basic attribution tab of the component attribution dialogbox appears 160 Chapter 6 Components Text Input Component Attribution Basic Attribution Trigger Address Font Graphics Position Priority Input Address Output Address HMI HIO PLC Hbl FLC Addr Type Lw Addr Addr Type Addr Code Type BIN FormatDODDD Code Type Format DODD Word 1 i wordo im Description TIO Priority Reserved function not used for the time being Input Address The PLC word address registers to be displayed and modified by the text input component a maximum of 16 words with each word containing two ASCII characters Address The initial address of the word registers corresponding to the
297. o a valid window number the current window will be closed and the designated window will be displayed The number of this designated window is read from the register of the Input Address Then that number will be written to the Input Address 1 register of the PLC Input address Designate the target widow number Input address 1 Write the target window number here 252 Chapter 6 Components PLC Control Hal HMO PLENo OU Addr Type Liat Address Code Type BIN Format ODI Use Address Tag Control Type Change Window Macro Humber Upen Address Tag Labrary Cancel As shown in the above figure we use LWO to change window Assume that the current window is Window 0 If LWO changes to 4 the current screen will change to Window 4 and then the value 4 will be written back to register LW1 Notes on Change Window function The Change Window operation carried out by the PLC control is similar to the Change Window operation carried out by Function Key component The only difference is that it is triggered by the PLC register instead of the touch operation If the value of the Input Address register changes to a new valid window number the current window will be closed and the window designated by the Input Address will be displayed Then that number will be written into back to the register located at Input Address 1 This operation will be triggered only when the value of the Input Ad
298. o the technical manuals provided by MITSUBISHI 354 Chapter 14 Connection of eView MT5000 4000 with Common PLCs 1 CPU MITSUBISHI PLC FX series CPU RS 422 interface eView MT5000 4000 touch 8 pin DIN round female screen COMO0 COM 1 connector Pin assignment of 8 pin DIN round female connector MITSUBISHI PLC Communication module RS232BD FX series RS 232 BD 2 eView MT5000 4000 touch module screen RS 232 interface COMO0 COM1 9 pin D SUB female connector 355 Chapter 14 Connection of eView MT5000 4000 with Common PLCs 3 Communication module RS485BD MITSUBISHI PLC eView MT5000 4000 FX series RS 485 BD touch screen module COMO0 COM1 RS 422 interface 5 pin terminal block Connection of Mitsubishi FX3U Series PLC with MT5000 4000 Touch Screen E V5000 software setting Recommended Optional Setting Precaution Setting PLC a Mitsubishi FX3U i S RS 232 RS232 SS Must be the same as the 7or8 COM port settings of the controller Must be the same as the Stop Bits 1 or 2 COM port settings of the controller Data Bits Must be the same as the 9600 19200 38400 Bits per Second 9600 COM port settings of the 57600 115200 controller Must be the same as the Even parity odd Parity Even parity COM port settings of the parity none controller Must be the same as the PLC Station No COM port settings of the controller 356 Chapter 14 Connection of eView MT5000 4000 with Common PLCs
299. oad The bit address can be used to indicate the download indication progress of the recipe In the process of download it is set to ON upon completion of download it is set to OFF R 9011 Recipe upload The bit address can be used to indicate the upload progress indication of the recipe In the process of upload it is set to ON upon completion of upload it is set to OFF R 9012 Recipe These bit addresses can be used to indicate the download upload download upload progress of the recipe R et 9013 Touch creen Set it to ON when touching the Touch Screen Indicator R ee eee 9014 CPU indicator Set it to ON when touching the CPU Indicator R 9015 larm indicator J Set it to ON when touching the Alarm Indicator R S 9016 Printer error It is set to ON in case of a print error and to OFF if printing is 9017 Printer control To disable the print function set it to ON to enable the print function set it to OFF In the system parameters all printing options must be set to ON first otherwise this bit address is invalid R W 9018 Enter screen saver When the system enters screen saver backlight and status energy saving the bit is automatically set to 1 when the system exits the screen saver it is set to 0 9019 Exit screen saver When the system exits screen saver backlight and energy status saving the bit is automatically set to 1 when the system 311 Chapter 11 Reserved Register Addresses of the System Pp enters th
300. oader or narrower than this range Detailed wiring diagram 1 CPU MITSUBISHI PLC Q series Q00 Q01 CPU232 port 6 pin DIN round female connector eView MT5000 4000 touch screen PLC COM0 COM1 2 Communication module eView MT5000 4000 MITSUBISHI PLC touch screen Q series QJ71C24 COM0 COM1 RS455 interface 361 Chapter 14 Connection of eView MT5000 4000 with Common PLCs MITSUBISHI PLC eView MT5000 4000 Q series QJ71C24 touch screen RS232 interface COM0 COM1 9 pin D SUB male connector Koyo Electronics Connection of KOYO Direct Logic Series PLC with eView MT5000 4000 Touch Screen EV5000 software setting Recommended Optional Setting Precaution Setting KOYO PLC Type DIRECT Set it according to the type of COM COM0 COM 1 RS232 RS485 COM port actually in use Data bits for this protocol are Data Bits 7ors set to 8 in a fixed manner Must be the same as the COM Stop Bits 1 1 or 2 port settings of the PLC 9600 19200 38400 Must be the same as the COM Bits per Second 9600 57600 115200 port settings of the PLC Even parity odd Must be the same as the COM Parity Odd parity parity none port settings of the PLC PLC Station i E Set this parameter according to No the recommended settings PLC software setting 1 The security password function must be disabled 2 The COM port must adopt K sequence protocol 3 Set the switch of the CPU with working mode setting switch to the TERM state
301. ode 0 9999 DDD Internal auxiliary node 0 9999 DDD Sequence control node 0 9999 DDD Timer node 0 9999 Counter node Counter buffer double word 32 bits M 0 9999 DDDD Data register Note D indicates decimal notation O indicates octal notation and the value range is 0 7 CV2 232 255 The operable range in the above table indicates the operable range of the MT5000 4000 touch screen The actual range of the PLC may be broader or narrower than this range Detailed wiring diagram Note DELTA DVP series PLCs covers such models as DVP 14 24 32 60ESO0O and DVP XXES01 All of them can be connected with the eView touch screen through the programming 395 Chapter 14 Connection of eView MT5000 4000 with Common PLCs communication port on their respective CPUs For detailed hardware description refer to the technical manuals provided by Delta 1 CPU Delta PLC eView MT5000 4000 touch DVP series CPU screen RS 232 interface COMO0 COM1 8 pin DIN round female connector 4 RXD 5 TXD 3 8 GND Mini Din 8 Pin Port 14 11 MODBUS RTU Controller Connection of MODBUS RTU Controller with MT5000 4000 Touch Screen EV V5000 software setting Recommended i i i Optional Setting Precaution Setting Must be the same as the Data Bits 7or8 COM port settings of the controller Must be the same as the 1or2 COM port settings of the controller Stop Bits 9600 19200 38400 Must be the same as the Bits
302. ode This is the normal working mode of MT5000 series touch screens The screen will display the starting picture of the downloaded project 2 4 CE Requirements The MT 5000 series of touch screens conform to the following CE specifications EMC Directive 89 336 EEC 92 31 EEC 93 68 EEC electromagnetic emissions and immunity Machinery Directive 89 392 EEC 91 368 EEC 93 44 EEC 93 68 EEC machine safety MT5000 series products will be CE marked to indicate compliance with the EMC Directive The MT5000 series has been designed to operate satisfactorily in electromagnetic noise immunity and without emitting high levels of electrical noise into the environment emission The units are designed to meet European Community standards when installed per the wiring instructions in this manual Compatibility Standards The MT5000 series touch screens have been designed to meet electromagnetic compatibility for industrial environments e CISPR EN 55011 Group 1 Class A Radiated Emission levels e EN61000 6 4 2001 Generic standards Emission standard for industrial environments e EN61000 6 2 2001 Immunity for Industrial Environments e EN61000 4 2 3 4 5 6 Electrostatic discharge electrostatic field immunity test electrical fast transient burst surge immunity test immunity to conducted disturbance 3 Programming Software Programming Software EV 5000 V1 0 0 or later 459 4 Product Specific Appendix Ill H
303. of One Touch Screen with Two PLCs of Any Brands Communication mode of these two PLCs can be 232 485 or 422 It is shown in the figure below One MT5300T touch screen with COM1 connected with a Siemens S7 200 PLC and COMO connected with an OMRON PLC A Caution 1 Since COM1 is connected with a Siemens S7 200 PLC COM1 must be set with the communication parameters of the Siemens S7 200 PLC Since COMO is connected with an OMRON PLC COMO must be set with the communication parameters of the OMRON PLC Parameters on the right are default parameters and they will be created after the touch screen is connected with the PLC Only an advanced user can modify these parameters otherwise it may cause communication errors 2 The settings of these communication parameters depend on the internal communication parameters of the PLC so they may vary in different situations 432 Chapter 17 Networking of MT5000 Series Touch Screens Set the communication parameters of the Siemens S7 200 PLC as follows Communication mode RS485 2 Bits per second 9600 data bits 8 parity check even parity stop bits 1 as shown below HEI Attribute HMI Task Bar HMI Extend Attribute Frint Setting serial Port O Setting Serial Fort 1 Setting Type 15405 2 FPLC Communication Time Out 1 Baud Fate 9600 Protocol Time Out 1 I Data Bit g Frotocol Time Out 2 1 Parity Mas interval of Block packi ORCS Stop Bit Max interval of block pack BIT 5S
304. of eView MT5000 4000 with Common PLCs Detailed wiring diagram 1 Emerson port RS 232 eView MT5000 4000 touch screen PLC RS 232 interface 9 pin D SUB female connector Emerson Controller RS232 COM port 2 Emerson port 485 eView MT5000 4000 touch Emerson screen Controller PLC RS 485 port 485 COM port 9 pin D SUB male connector 14 15 KEYENCE PLC KEYENCE xeynece Connection of KEYENCE KV1000 Series PLC with MT5000 4000 Touch Screen EV5000 software setting 405 Chapter 14 Connection of eView MT5000 4000 with Common PLCs Recommended Optional Setting Precaution Setting KEYENCE KV 1000 COM RS232 RS232 RS485 Must be the same as the COM Data Bits 7ors port settings of the controller Must be the same as the COM Stop Bits 1 1 or 2 port settings of the controller PLC Type Bits per Sane 9600 19200 38400 Must be the same as the COM Second 57600 115200 port settings of the controller Even parity odd Must be the same as the COM Parity Even parity parity none port settings of the controller PLC Station Must be the same as the COM No port settings of the controller Controller software setting Please refer to user manuals provided by Keyence Reference website http china keyence com Operable address range PLC Operable ae Bit Word Address Description Range m a CTC High speed counter comparator 406 Chapter 14 Connection of eView MT5000 4000 with Common
305. of three continuous PLC registers Typically the first register controls the state of the component The Second register controls the horizontal position X and the third register controls the vertical position Y X amp Y position is lt controlled by l PLC gt Adding a moving component 1 Click the moving component icon and drag it to the window the Basic Attribution tab of the Component Attribution dialogbox appears Moving Component Attribution Basic Attribution Moving Component Tag Graphics Position Friority Input Address Output Address HMI HiO PLE G Ht PLC Addr Type Lw Add Addr Type Addr Code Type BIN FomatDDODOD Code Type Format DODOD Word Uze Addr Tac wordo Use Addr Tag Description Mw Priority Reserved function not used for the time being gt Input Address The initial address of the word registers that controls the state shape and label information of the moving component in the PLC The first register is at the lowest address Address The initial address of the word registers corresponding to the moving component Code Type BIN or BCD No of Words Select 3 for input address It is automatically set by system disabled for edit Use Address Tag Whether to use the address entered in the address tag library For details refer to Section 6 34 Description A reference name not displayed that you assign to the moving 145 Chap
306. offline simulation 443 Chapter 17 Networking of MT5000 Series Touch Screens E EVSimulator Saks HMI Simulation HMI Station HMI Information Simulation Seral Port Hl Port PC Port HMI Port FC Part Show Information Simulation Type Offline Simulation File Fathf pkal c documents and settings skinco desktop engsproject 23 We pkg Communication Type NULL IF NULL PORT NULL COM NULL BPS NULL Select the corresponding touch screen number and click Download to perform download operation 444 Chapter 17 Networking of MT5000 Series Touch Screens EVDownload a m X Select HMI m Select Section HMI Station Heal Information Data File O LOGO File Download File Path c documents and l settings skinco desktop eng prec 2351 23 pkg Communication Type USE port IF PORT MULL NULL any COM NULL BPS NULL Eit 17 2 Mutual Download Between Different Touch Screens Downloading between different touch screens must be conducted via a PC Firstly upload from a touch screen to the PC and then download from the PC to another touch screen For upload methods refer to related descriptions in Chapter 15 A Caution Only MT5000 series support networking function 445 Appendix System Messages Appendix System Messages MT5000 4000 System Messages Table Messages Description PLC no response cc pp d PLC
307. og ak 3 All Bitmap t Curent Horizontal f Pen Width f Clear i Wext f Vertical 3 In Frame4 place a video component with the input address type set to LW the address to 0 change the size of the window to 700 in width and 474 in height in the Position tab Video Frequency Component Attribution Basic Attribution mee Priority a Input Address Output Address HMI HiO PLC Hl PLC Addr Type Lw Addr 0 Addr Type Addr Code Type BIN FormatDODDD Code Type Format DODOC Word Use Addr Tag wordo Description DO Video Frequency Component Attribution Basic Attribution Position 39 FH 18 El 700 E afd El 4 Place a word setting component with the output address type set to LW the address to 0 the Setting Mode to Add Value the Inc Value to 1 the Upper Limit to 2 since there are only two video channels for switching and the Tag set to Channel 241 Chapter 6 Components Word Setting Component Attribution Basic Attribution Multi State Setting Tag Graphics Position Priority Input Address Output Address HMI PLE Htl HMIO PLC Addr Type Addr Addr Type E9 Code Type Format DODOD Code Type BIN Word ia WordHo 7 Description oWwDO Word Setting Component Attribution Basic Attribution Multi State Setting Tag Graphics Position SettingMode Add value j lnc value 1 Upper Limit e Place a wo
308. olled by the component in the upper left part of the window Keypad control bit i R the pop up of the keypad is controlled by the component in the lower left part of the window Keypad control bit R the pop up of the keypad is controlled by the component in the right part of the window Keypad control bit R the pop up of the keypad is controlled by the component in the right part of the window Keypad control bit R the pop up of the keypad is controlled by the component in the upper right part of the window Keypad control bit R 9063 9064 9065 9066 9067 the pop up of the keypad is controlled by the component in the lower right part of the window 9068 Keypad control bit R the pop up of the keypad is controlled 314 Chapter 11 Reserved Register Addresses of the System by any component Keypad control bit R the pop up of the CO O O keypad is controlled by any component of the window Keypad control bit i R the pop up of the keypad is controlled by the component in the upper part of the window Keypad control bit i R the pop up of the keypad is controlled by the component in the lower part of the window Increase LCD Decrease LCD Set the corresponding bits ON the system will execute the a ae of increasing decreasing brightness contrast Upon Increase _ backlight completion the bit will be cleared Decrease backlight Used to switch input W
309. omal Input Address Output Address HMI HMI PLO 0 HMI HMIO PLC 0 hi Addr Type LW Add 0 Addr Type Addr 10 Code Type BIN Fomat DDDDDO Code Type BIN Fomat DDDDD The completed window 0 is shown in the figure below 204 Chapter 6 Components By Current iy emprature Edit window 4 as shown in the figure below resize the window to 320x85 place a bit toggle switch to change the state of LB10 The position of window 4 is 0 0 so it will appear on the top half of the window when LB10 event information is pressed Window Attribution x Window Name No 4 Safe Level Lowest hi Special Attribute Print page Disable Map Keyboard Foston Use Background Color x 0 Y 0 Width 320 Height 85 Create window 5 as shown in the figure below resize the window to 320x85 place a numeric input component for setting the LW30 register The window will appear on the top half of the window when LW30 event information is pressed Save and compile the project then perform online offline simulation or downloading The operation effect is shown in the figure below 205 Chapter 6 Components 15 45 LB16 is on 310 i Current PEIN Q Temprature Figure 1 LB10 event is triggered and displayed on the event display area Crew oi Ar if Current S re Temprature 2 Figure 2 When the user touch the event informat
310. omentum series PLC RS485 l Modicon PLC eView MT5000 4000 touch Momentum series CPU screen COM port COMO COM1 8 pin RJ 45 female connector 376 Chapter 14 Connection of eView MT5000 4000 with Common PLCs 3 CPU Compact Quantum series PLC RS485 l Modicon PLC eView MT5000 4000 touch Compact Quantum series CPU screen COM2 COMO COM1 9 pin D SUB female connector Note Modbus serial ports of the CPU A984 and E984 241 245 251 255 of the Compact series and the Modbus serial ports of the Quantum 140CPU series are all 9 pin RS 232 hardware interfaces Where A984 131 141 and E984 241 251 of the Compact series and the 140CPU 434 534 of the Quantum series have two Modbus ports The wiring diagram is shown in the above figure For related software and hardware settings refer to the technical manuals provided by Schneider Electric 4 Communication module 172 JNN 210 32 applicable to Momentum series l Modicon PLC eView MT5000 4000 touch 172 JNN 210 32 adapter screen COM port COMO COM1 8 pin RJ 45 female connector 377 Chapter 14 Connection of eView MT5000 4000 with Common PLCs eView MT5000 4000 touch Modicon PLC screen 172 JNN 210 32 adapter COMO COM1 COM port 8 pin RJ 45 female connector Note When the 172 JNN 210 32 adapter is configured with CPU 171CCS 780 or 171 CCC 780 the RS 485 port on the adapter becomes unavailable For related software and hardware settings refer to the technical manu
311. ommon PLCs 4 CPU DL430 DL440 DL450 CPUPort0 RS232 KOYO PLC DL405 series CPU RS 232 interfaceO 15 pin D SUB female connector eView MT5000 4000 touch screen COMO0 COM1 5 CPU DL430 DL440 DL450 CPU Port1 amp DL350 CPU Port2 RS232 KOYO PLC DL305 405 series CPU RS 232 interface 25 pin D SUB female connector eView MT5000 4000 touch screen COMO0 COM1 366 Chapter 14 Connection of eView MT5000 4000 with Common PLCs 6 CPU DL430 DL440 DL450 CPU Port amp DL350 CPU Port2 RS422 KOYO PLC DL305 DL405 series CPU unit RS 422 interface 25 pin D SUB female connector eView MT5000 4000 touch screen COMO0 COM1 18 RTS 23 CTS 7 CPU DL450 CPU Port3 RS422 KOYO PLC eView MT5000 4000 touch DL405 series CPU unit screen RS 422 interface3 COMO COM1 25 pin D SUB female connector 367 Chapter 14 Connection of eView MT5000 4000 with Common PLCs 8 Data communication unit D2 DCM module of DL205 series D4 DCM module of DL405 series RS232 KOYO PLC DL205 405 series DCM unit RS 232 interface 25 pin D SUB female connector eView MT5000 4000 touch screen COM0 COM1 Note Among all PLCs in the DL205 series only DL240 DL250 CPU supports D2 DCM unit All PLCs of the DL405 series support D4 DCM unit Please pay attention to the settings of the DIP switch It must be set to the DirectNET Slave mode In addition pay attention to the setting of the communication address For details refer to har
312. ommunications between PC and the touch panel USB port USB A type port 1 1 or 2 0 Operating system Windows 2000 with SP4 Windows XP with SP2 Installation procedure 1 After Inserting the EV5000 setup disk into the optical drive the setup program will automatically run or you may manually run the Setup exe file under the root directory of the CD The following interface appears Chapter 1 Installation of EV5000 EV5000_UNICODE_ENU InstallShield Wizard Preparing Setup Please wait while the InstallShield Wizard prepares the setup EYS000 UNICODE ENU Setup is preparing the InstallShield Wizard which will guide you through the rest of the setup process Please wait 2 2 Follow the instructions of the InstallShield Wizard click the Next button enter the user s information as shown in the following figure EVS000_UMICODE_ENU InstallShield Wizard Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for E 5000 UNICODE ENU The InstallShield Wizard will install EVS000 UNICODE ENU on your computer To continue click Nest Cancel 3 Click Finish to complete the installation 4 Torun the program find the executable program under the directory of Start gt Programs gt Stepservo gt ev5000 Chapter 1 Installation of EV5000 fay EYSOOO UNICODE EMU E YS000 User Manual Er EVSO00_enu a EVManager_enu EVPLCAddressiew gy Uninstall Startup a amp Internet Explorer Wo MS
313. omponent Description Component Object Function key Keypad created by Function key Text input Function key Keypad created by Function key Indirect window part must point to an existing Indirect window Window window Direct window part must point to an existing Direct window Window window Alarm Alarm information displayed on the screen or the Alarm display information banner must be entered in the system by using Alarm banner logon the alarm information logon function Alarm information displayed on the screen or the Alarm display Alarm information logon banner must be entered in the system by using the alarm information logon function Alarm information displayed on the screen or the Alarm banner Alarm information logon banner must be entered in the system by using the alarm information logon function Event Event information must be entered by using the information Event display Event information logon tool before it can be logon displayed Event information must be entered by using the Event display Event information logon Event information logon tool before it can be displayed Function defined by PLC control part is invoked PLC control PLC or controlled by PLC registers Most components support bit or word addresses Such components as numeric input and scroll bar can perform double word operation Since some PLCs have
314. on or select Undo in the Edit menu will activate this function Redo Use this function to redo the operation which has just been undone by the Undo operation Click a or select Redo in the Edit menu The Undo Redo support the following operations 1 Drag a component from a component library window 2 Draw a static component 3 Move an object 4 Adjust the size of an object 5 All operations on the position toolbar 6 Line width line style and arrows 7 Fill style of an object 8 Frame color of an object 9 Fill color of an object 10 set to Top layer set to bottom layer 11 Group and ungroup of multiple parts 12 Cut copy paste and delete of objects 13 Multiple copy To add any component to the screen or to make any change to the screen the user can use the Undo Redo function As shown in the following figure add a switch component to the screen 33 Chapter 3 Description of the eV5000 Software Press Undo The switch part disappears leaving a blank screen Then click Redo The switch re appears A The software supports the Undo Redo operation of the latest ONE operation Cut copy paste and delete Select one or more components you can conduct such operations as Cut Copy and Paste Their corresponding icons are Their demonstration is omitted here 34 Chapter 3 Description of the eV5000 Software Nuage Select a part the position of the object can be adjusted by using the N
315. on protocol They can also be connected with the touch screen through the AlC communication module provided by Allen Bradley For related software and hardware settings refer to the technical manuals provided by ROCKWELL 1 CPUMicrologix1000 1200 1500 Allen Bradley PLC eView MT5000 4000 touch Micrologix series CPU screen RS 232 interface COMO0 COM 1 8 pin DIN round female connector Mini Din 8 Pin Port Pin assignment of 8 pin DIN round female connector 370 Chapter 14 Connection of eView MT5000 4000 with Common PLCs 2 Communication module AlC part No 1761 NET AIC RS232 Allen Bradley PLC eView MT5000 4000 touch Micrologix series AlC screen communication module COMO COM1 RS 232 interface 9 pin D SUB female connector Allen Bradley PLC Micrologix series AlC eView MT5000 4000 touch screen COMO0 COM 1 communication module RS 232 interface 8 pin DIN round female connector Connection of Allen Bradley SLC500 Series PLC with eView MT5000 4000 Touch Screen EV5000 software setting Recommended Optional Setting Precaution Setting Select different protocols for PLC Type AB DF 1 AB DF1 AB DH485 different ports COMO COM1 RS232 RS485 Data bits for this protocol are Data Bits Torg set to 8 in a fixed manner Must be the same as the Stop Bits 1 1 or 2 COM port settings of the PLC Bits per sone 9600 19200 38400 Must be the same as the Second 57600 115200 COM port settings of the PLC Even
316. onstrunct window P Compile information window Fonction Farts re cee WIPER iid Add eci iri BLE Wrta Adict Lead PLCOO Leo WA BOD LB ai LAGOT e L004 Q Component list kiea Dali window Monee y 3 WidthesD Heght 50 R Status bar 26 Chapter 3 Description of the eV5000 Software Tools Library Window HelpiH Component Labrary Window Chrl Ale Graphics Toolbar D Chrl Alt o Turn To Page Toolbar P Chrl 4lb P Position Adjust Toolbar 4 Crrl Alk 4 Line Width Toolbar iw Ctr Alt L Line Style Toolbar Ctrl alk System Toalbar T Ctrl Alt T State Toolbar Ctrl Alk I Database Toolbar L Chrl 4lt 6 Code Edit Toolbar B Ctrlalt D Filled Effect ToolbartE CtrHealt H Project Structure Windowiil Cr Alk Project File List Window Ctrl 4lE F Compile Information Window Cerl Alk M Component List Window Ctrl Alt E Title bar Menu bar The menu bar provides menus for selecting various groups of commands If one of these menus is selected the corresponding dropdown menu appears Each dropdown menu provides a group of related commands Basic toolbar The basic toolbar provides tool icons like Create Project Open Project Cut and Paste For details refer to the icon descriptions in Section 3 1 4 Drawing toolbar Each icon stands for a drawing function as it shows The drawing tools include line tool rectangle tool ellipse circle tool arc tool polygon tool and text tool Fo
317. op up menu They should not be placed in the base window For the window where the video component is located the Video Page option in the Window Attribution dialog box should be selected 239 Chapter 6 Components Window Attribution Val ein a Frame Ho O Safe Level Lowe W Special Attribute Print page Disable Map Keyboard Position Video age l Init Pos 0 width 1024 Height 768 3 Bottom Wirdouy Use Background Color 1 WN 2 W 3 WN ki Ai adis aia Filed Color Background Fame O Pop Window Type W Tracking Monopoly wat E e IM Clipping Coherence An example for using Video Component 1 Create a new project Select MT5600T or MT5700T as the HMI Any PLC type in the PLC list is supported and can be used In this example we select FACON FB HMID Bai em re Lee Di e e ee ee Exchange Serials Parts Replace HMI Type E Init Start Window Import Recipe Ca i Attribute 2 Place a function key in Window 0 and select pop up Frame4 240 Chapter 6 Components Function Key Component Attribution Video Window Function Key Trigger Addr Tag Graphics Position Switch Window 4 Frame4 b Keyboard Func Enter d E g Black and whit ae olor z ack ana While s Message Board a fae Ri ulticolor B Tet Tool Pen Magnify Multiple 10 P Indicator Trend Graphics Pen Colo Colo Print Page
318. or Color Zoom The value range is 1 0 2 0 Page Range Current Page Next Page Select the page to be printed Landscape Portrait Select the print mode Print Content 1 Print text 2 Print meter 3 Print trend graph 4 Print all bitmaps 5 Print all vectograms 6 Print background color A Caution When you select the Next Page option in the Page Range frame the printer will skip the current page and start printing from the next page The print function key can be used to print screen data conveniently The data is outputted from the standard printer port as graphics 10 2 Screen Printout The background component PLC Control gt Screen Printout uses a bit address to control the printout of the current screen The printout of the current screen starts when the bit address changes from OFF to ON 306 Chapter 10 Print PLC control object No REG Address Contralevent PLE Control Hh HMIO PLC No 0 Addr Type LE Address 0 Code Type El Format OOI 1 Control Type Macro Number Buen fddiess Tiga Lakay Ok Cincel Delete Modify As shown in the above figure if LBO is set to control the Screen Printout operation when LBO changes from OFF to ON the current screen will be printed out Upon the completion of printout the LBO automatically returns to OFF The print format is controlled by LW9054 When the LW9054 are the following numbers it will
319. or Graph NUM_KEYOOL vg NUM_DISP_BAROO1 vg NUB_CTRL_BAROOL vg cc te Click the symbol or To edit the file in the folders double click it in the left of the icon to expand or collapse the directory tree P caution The configuration recipe file RCP can only be imported and deleted but cannot be edited To edit such a file use other binary editing software Shape Library Shape Library folder contains all the vector graph and bitmap files imported to the current project Vector graph files are shown as vg files and bitmap files are shown as bg files For the description of vectogram and bitmap please refer to Sections 5 5 and 5 6 in Chapter 5 3 4 Project Window and Project Construct Window The Project Window is used to show the structure of the entire project HMI panels PLCs and connection wires are shown in this window as shown in the following figure E a ea ee ao e aLiLoLoLoLouwdLoLule omens 87 2 00 COMO Scones oat LoL S a a a LL LL eg ere ere ee Dee 4 4 8 4 EE 2 ama aca l co Kt EEERTEL 63 Chapter 3 Description of the eV5000 Software HMI One HMI icon represents one actual HMI panel the number after HMI helps the user distinguish those panels Right click on the HMI icon will popup its own shortcut menu the user can select in the menu to take expected operations on the corresponding panel PLC One PLC icon represents one actual PLC The number after PL
320. or the Control Type in the PLC control component setting dialog box and select the type and address of the control data register in the Input Address column which should be in units of words The system will automatically set the four consecutive PLC data registers starting from the Input Address to be Data Transmission Control Register for controlling the data transmission Their detailed meanings and usage are as follows 1 Input Address It indicates the transmission mode As mentioned above there are four modes This register is used to store the codes of the control type When new control codes are written into the register the system will immediately execute related transmission After the transmission is completed the register will reset to 0 Input Address 1 It indicates the size of the transmitted data block that is the number of words to be transmitted Input Address 2 It indicates the offset of the data register address of the PLC during transmission Please note that this offset is referred to register located at Input Address 4 as its reference origin For example suppose that we use a MODBUS PLLC If the Input Address set for the PLC General Control component is 4X100 and the data in the register 4X102 is 4 the start address of the data block in the PLC during the transmission is 4X108 100 4 4 Input Address 3 It indicates the address offset of the recipe register RW or the
321. ord zE 426 Chapter 15 Operation Instructions for EVManager Hanager 345 User data FILE Uploading EVManager Message Ed b s i Upload success Click Upload Recipe select a file saving path enter a file name and then click Save Recipe file is uploaded and saved as a separated rcp file in this method Click Upload LOGO select a file saving path enter a file name and then click Save Logo file is uploaded and saved as a separated logo file in this method Note The file name and file saving path of the uploaded file are determined by the user 15 4 System Operate System Operate is mainly used for refreshing the embedded OS files and testing Communication parameter setting the same as those described in download operate Get IP PORT Information To obtain the IP and port number information of the touch panel only MT5000 series support this function click Get to display the IP address and port number of the target panel kg E Eanager Communication Set ES Download Operate Communication Type USE port Upload Operate IF HULL Get version Get HMI IF PORT information E 192 166 D u gm Refresh IF PORT F Return Section Return User Application Status Return Set Application Status PORT FORT Refresh Section rite ened Update IP PORT Modify the IP address and port number of the touch screen Only MT5000 427 Chapter 15 Operation Inst
322. ortcoming is that only the PLC with an RS232 interface can be used in this mode To debug the PLC with an RS485 interface an RS232 to 485 422 interface convertor is required Note 1 The maxim test time for the direct online simulation is 15 minutes After 15 minutes the system will prompt simulation timeout please simulate again and the simulator will shutdown automatically 67 Chapter 3 Description of the eV5000 Software 2 Only the RS232 communication mode can be used for direct online simulation After the compiling configuration project and establishing the physical connection between PLC and PC click the button the following dialog box appears Faj EVSimulator HMI Simulation HMI Station HMI Information Simulation Serial Port HMI COMO HMI COMI Show Information Simulation Type HULL pkg File Fath ULL Communication Type IF COM Select the touch panel to simulate select the COM ID of the computer to be connected to the PLC and click Simulate to start direct online simulation Note Use the programming cable of PLC to connect PLC and PC and perform the simulation 3 8 2 Indirect Online Simulation In indirect online simulation mode the simulator exchanges data with the PLC via the HMI panel connected to PC The simulation screen acts as the actual panel clicking on the screen is the same as touching the real panel With indirect online simulator lots of time for down
323. oumermeroy Woa meranen oze oD Tne aia meron To e e Word 01999 1999 DDDD Data memory _ liis data Word memory Note D indicates decimal notation The operable range in the above table indicates the operable range of the PLC Some register addresses are reserved by the system and cannot be used For details refer to Keyence KV 16DT user manual Please note that this protocol does not support batch transfer of bits or words Detailed wiring diagram MT5000 4000 touch screen PLC RS 232 interface 9 pin D SUB male connector KV CPU Port RJ 12 port 14 16 OEMAX PLC ar OEMAX Connection of OEMAX Series PLC with MT5000 4000 Touch Screen 408 Chapter 14 Connection of eView MT5000 4000 with Common PLCs EV5000 software setting Recommended Optional Setting Precaution Setting PLC Type OEMAX COM RS232 RS232 RS485 Must be the same as the er Data Bits Torg port settings of the controller Must be the same as the COM Stop Bits 1 1 or 2 port settings of the controller 9600 19200 38400 Must be the same as the COM 57600 115200 port settings of the controller Even parity odd Must be the same as the COM Parity None parity none port settings of the controller Must be the same as the COM PLC Station No 1 port settings of the controller Controller software setting Refer to OEMAX PLC user manuals Reference website http www oemax com Bits per Second Operable address
324. ow Current level Input Passyord Change level Henu isk Bor Press the function key and the system changes to window 4 If the user enters the value 0 in the Change Level frame the current security level changes to 0 immediately and then the system cannot switch to window 4 as shown in the figure below 329 Chapter 12 Security Level es i oe Nindow Current level Input Password Change level Nenu isk Bar The design of different passwords for different security levels assigns different operation authorities to different operators which enhances the security of the application system Uploading password is set as follows HMI Attribution Print Setting Seral Port 0 Setting Seral Port 1 Setting Hl Task Bar HMI Extend Attribution ScreenProtect Public Wir Attribution Display below the basic windoy T extLab Lan 4 Pop Window Attribution Display on the top layer k Default Lan 1 Upload Key 000008 l Save Event Log Init Macro OLevel Rey OOgoo0 Init Addr 0 Init Window Framed 7 Level Rey telesales Record U Public Window Frame 2 Level Rey OOgoo0 Use Buzzer The following graphic shows how to use this uploading password double click the EVManger select the Upload operate then configure the communication parameters here default USB 330 Chapter 12 Security Level ka E Eanager Communication Set ES Download Operate Communication Type Hetifork
325. panel it will show the logo just been downloaded during the power on stage If no logo file has been downloaded the panel will display LOGO Error instead 86 Chapter 4 Windows Chapter 4 Configuration Windows lamp 19 ve ge N ctate w Be 4 1 Window Type Window is the basic elements of an EV5000 project Each display is composed of a number of windows There are three types of windows Basic common and fast selection A basic window can be used as a pop up window after changing its size All windows can be assigned as underlay windows Basic window Basic window is the normal type of window that would be displayed during HMI runtime When using Change Window command to switch to a basic window the current screen will be cleared all windows except the common window and fast selection window will be turned off When the parts in the base window invoke the pop up window the original information of the base window will be kept while the invoked pop up window will be attached to the current base window The relationship between all such pop up windows and the base window is a kind of father son window relationship Upon the switchover from base window N to base window M all sub windows of window N will be closed while window M and sub window of window M are displayed The base window should be of the full screen size Fast selection window The fast selection window is a window activated by tou
326. pecific design steps depend on your particular application the following precautions generally apply to installation of solid state programmable control devices In addition these precautions conform to the guidelines for installation of controllers as recommended in the NEMA ICS 3 304 Control Standards To conform to ICS Safety Recommendations checks should be placed in the controller to ensure that all writable registers that control critical parts of plant or machinery have limit checks built into the program with an out of limit safe shutdown procedure to ensure safety of personnel ICS 3 304 81 Safety Recommendations Consideration should be given to the use of an emergency stop function which is independent of the programmable controller Where the operator is exposed to the machinery such as in loading or unloading a machine tool or where the machine cycles automatically consideration should be given to the use of an electromechanical override or other redundant means independent of the programmable 473 Appendix Ill Hardware Overview controller for starting and interrupting the cycle If provision is required for changing programs while the equipment is in operation consideration should be given to the use of locks or other means of assuring that only authorized personnel can make such changes These recommendations are intended as safeguards against the failure of critical components and the effects of suc
327. per Second 9600 COM port settings of the 57600 115200 controller 396 Chapter 14 Connection of eView MT5000 4000 with Common PLCs Must be the same as the COM port settings of the controller Even parity odd parity none Must be the same as the PLC Station No COM port settings of the controller Controller software setting It is necessary to set the communication protocol of the communication port of the controller to Modbus RTU mode Please refer to the specifications provided by Schneider Electric related to MODBUS protocol and user manuals provided by related controller manufacturers Reference website Http www modicon com Http Awww modbus org Operable address range PLC Address ee Operable Range Description Type System internal external 1 9999 DDDD output node System internal external 1 9999 DDDD input node 1 9999 DDDD Analog input data register E 1 9999 DDDD Data register Note D indicate decimal notation If it is necessary to operate the double word variable select 2 in the corresponding component address properties dialog box The operable range in the above table indicates the operable range of the MT5000 4000 touch screen The actual range of the PLC may be broader or narrower than this range Detailed wiring diagram Note The eView MT5000 4000 series touch screens can communicate with the controller through the Modbus RTU protocol so all controllers supportin
328. plies with EN61000 6 4 2001 EN55011 EN61000 6 2 2001 CE certification EN61000 4 2 3 4 5 6 standard Dimensions of 464 Appendix Ill Hardware Overview MT5500 Dimensional Drawing Unit mm inch Front View Side View 61 6 2 43 max 300 11 81 10 0 39 226 8 90 Top View Panel installation holddown grrove totally six Rear View 289 11 38 215 8 46 465 Appendix Ill Hardware Overview MT5600T Basic Parameters MT5600T Case color Metallic grey Display 12 1TFT Resolution 800x600 200 cd m 64K color 2CCFL 4 wire precision resistance network Brightness Color Backlight Touch screen CPU 400MHz RISC 8M FLASH 16M SDRAM 2 RS 232 485 422 1 10 100M Ethernet 1 USB SLAVE 256K WORD 1 DB25 Memory COM port Recipe memory Printer port General specifications 21 28VDC working current Max 600mA 24V starting current Max Power supply 800mMA 24V Complies with EN61000 6 4 2001 EN55011 EN61000 6 2 2001 EN61000 4 2 3 4 5 6 standard Complies with FCC Class A CE certification FCC compatibility Dielectric strength 500 VAC 1 minute test Insulation resistance Greater than 50MQ 500V DC 10 25Hz X Y Z direction 2G 30 minutes IP65 front panel Shockproof test Degree of protection Operating temperature Operating humidity 10 90 non condensing Case materials Aluminum alloy Dimensions 350x264x47 mm Dimensions of 328x242 mm installatio
329. ponent The Textbook Component has some special attributions as the following fugure shows Hotepad Component Attribution X Basic Attribution Notepad Font Trigger Address Graphies Position Display Unes Words Line a Total Lines The value indicates the total of lines of the Notebook component Display Lines This value indicates the number of lines displayed on the screen the user can use LW9170 to scroll pages if the Display Lines value is less than the Total Lines value The value of the LW9170 register indicates which line is displayed as the first line in the textbook input area By changing the value the user can scroll pages of the textbook component 260 Chapter 6 Components Words Line Number of words per line must be an even number A word corresponds to two ASCII characters 261 Chapter 8 Recipe Data Chapter 7 System Parameters The panel attributions must be properly set before it can work In this chapter we introduce the setting of the HMI attribution setting dialog box including the setting of taskbar extensional attribution printer setting and serial ports setting These parameters are required for correct PLC connection and other operations Double click HMI icon in the configuration project window to show the HMI attribution dialogbox HMI Attribution Print Setting Serial Port 0 Setting Seral Fort 1 5 etting HMI Task Bar HMI Extend Attribution Network Setting
330. porting image to bitmap library please refer to Section 5 6 The EV5000 supports the display of images in 65535 colors It can display beautiful and vivid color pictures so that your operator interface looks more beautiful and pleasant How to add a bitmap component to the window Bit 1 Click the wa icon and drag it to the window Select a bitmap you want to use from the drop list as shown in the following Bitmap Component Attribution Graphics Position if Use Bitmap Ce Import Graphics Graphics State 0 Click OK adjust the position and size of the bitmap in the window if necessary For details about importing an image to a bitmap library please refer to Section 5 6 244 Chapter 6 Components 6 33 Vectogram Component Vectogram Component is similar to Bitmap Component You can directly place any vectograms already in the vectogram library in the window without the need to designate any components 20 a Vector Graph 1 Click the Vectogram icon and drag it to the window Select the vectogram you want to use from the drop down list as shown in the following figure Vector Graph Component Attribution Graphics Position i Use Vector Graphics Import Graphics Graphics State Press OK and adjust the position and size of the vectogram in the window if necessary For the creation of a vectogram please refer to Section 5 6 6 34 Text Library The text library is a
331. r 13 Serial Communication length of a connection cable is 147 feet that is about 44 m The value may be larger in the case of a shielded cable and the value may be smaller when the cable is used in an environment with considerable interference Since RS 232 C interface standard was developed in an earlier time it has the following defects 1 The signal level value of the interface is high which may easily cause damage to chips of the interface circuitry 2 The transmission rate is low with a baud rate of 20 Kbps in asynchronous transmission mode 3 The interface uses a signal cable and a signal return cable to form a common ground transmission mode This common ground transmission may easily lead to common mode interference Therefore the noise suppression and anti interference capability is low The higher the baud rate is the lower the anti interference capability will be 4 The transmission distance is rather limited 13 3 RS 422 RS 422 and RS 485 are different from RS 232 For RS 422 and RS 485 data signals are transferred in differential transmission mode that is balanced transmission mode It uses a pair of twisted pair cables with one cable defined as A and the other defined as B In general the positive level between the transmission drivers A and B is at 2 6V which indicates a logic state while the negative level is at 2 6V which indicates another logic state In addition there is a signal ground
332. r Adds Trigger Mode By reg address HF E xe Cycle 1 0 ma a PLE No Response Mode Immediate Address Type Response State Address Repeat Times Then we make six macro templates which are to be triggered by the above mentioned six timer 302 Chapter 9 Macro components in sequence LB100 triggered timer corresponds to macro_0 c LB101 triggered timer corresponds to macro_1 c and so on The codes of macro_0 C are to change the state of the first domino The codes are as follows int MacroEntry LB1 W LB1_R LB101_ W 1 return 0 The variable is defined as follows Parameters Data type Param name PLC Station Reg 4ddre Address Mo of Word OptMode bit LEIDI ii T LE 101 1 write bit LEI yy T LE 1 l Write bik LEIR T LE 1 1 Read When macro_0 is triggered it will change the state of LB1 and set LB101 to 1 which will then triggers macro_1 The macro_1 will change LB2 and set LB102 to 1 macro_2 macro4 will be set in a similar way Macro_5 is different Its codes are as follows int MacroEntry LB6_W LB6_R LB100_W 1 return 0 That is macro_5 will trigger macro_0 Make a bit setting component and set LB100 to ON Change the label to START to trigger the first timer The edited configuration window is shown below 303 Chapter 9 Macro AA al JE Ey Perform simulated operation and click START The dominos will fall down one by one from left to right
333. r Download Device as shown in the following figure ToolsiT LibrarviD PLC Parts P Function Part Ea compile Ctrl F a Downloadi Ot Ctrl D se Offline Simulation E F5 Indirect Online Simulation Shift F5 76 Chapter 3 Description of the eV5000 Software Compile amp Download Option Compile W Compress Bitmap Sizes 1Ue4 Download Download Device USE Serial Ho IP Address Fort Screen Grid Space a Compress Large Bitmap In the numeric input box the user can specify the limit of the original file size of the bitmap which is imported into the project The file size is counted by bytes When the bitmap file exceeds that limit the complier will compress the bitmap for downloading Compression will save the storage space on the panel This option is selected by default 2 Ethernet For MT5000 panels only The Ethernet interface can be used for the downloading of the HMI configuration the setting of the HMI system parameters and the indirect online simulation of the configuration Furthermore multiple HMIs can be interconnected via the Ethernet to form a multi HMI application TT Chapter 3 Description of the eV5000 Software Compile amp Download Option Compile Ww Compress Bitmap Size gt 1024 Byte Download Download Device Serial Ho IP Address Fot 1845 Screen Grid Space Pe 20 Cancel IP Address Refers to the IP address of the HMI to be do
334. r detailed information refer to Section 3 1 4 Fill effect toolbar This toolbar provides tools used for filling the screen background or areas within a enclosed barriers such as rectangle ellipse and sector Each icon represents a filling style For details refer to the descriptions in Section 3 1 4 Position adjustment toolbar It is used for adjusting the position of components such as Align Top Align Bottom Justify Align right Equal Size Cascade Group flip and so on For details refer to the descriptions in Section 3 1 4 2 Chapter 3 Description of the eV5000 Software System toolbar It is used for compiling downloading and simulating a project For details refer to the descriptions in Section 3 1 4 Line width toolbar It is used for adjusting the line width For details refer to the descriptions in Section 3 1 4 Turn to page toolbar It is used for scrolling forward and backward within the pages of a project For details refer to the descriptions in Section 3 1 4 Database toolbar It includes text library tool alarm messages tool address labels tool PLC control tool and event messages tool For details refer to the descriptions in Section 3 1 4 Code compilation toolbar It is used for controlling the compilation of codes For details refer to the descriptions in Section 3 1 4 Line style toolbar This toolbar is used for selecting the line style with or without an arrow be a dotted line or so
335. racters for each state as shown in the following figure Text label list Language Language Languages Larguage4 Delete language Settin 5 If you use two states enter the corresponding characters in State 0 and State 1 After adding the text click Exit Text label list Language Languages Languages Language4 Delete guage Setin L 6 Finally you can use the previously added text in places where the Use Text Library can be used shown as follows 247 Chapter 6 Components Bit Setting Component Attribution Basic Attribution Bit State Setting Tag Graphies Position Use Tag Language W Use Text Labrary Noname 7 Tag List State No Font Color If have not added any text to the text library the Use Text Library is not acativated and in grey all the time It is enabled only when you have added a text 2 Language Setting e The languages corresponding to different values of the LW9130 LW9130 0 Language 1 Contents in the Language 1 column will be displayed LW9130 1 Language 2 Contents in the Language 2 column will be displayed LW9130 2 Language 3 Contents in the Language 3 column will be displayed LW9130 3 Language 4 Contents in the Language 4 column will be displayed LW9130 gt 3 Language 1 Contents in the Language 1 column will be di
336. rd setting component with the output address type set to LW the address to 0 the Setting Mode to Sub Value the eDec value to 1 the Lower Limit to 0 and the Tag to Channel Place a word setting component with the output address type set to LW the address to 1 the Setting Mode to Add Value the Inc Value to 8 the Upper Limit to 255 value range 0 255 and the Tag set to Brightness Place a word setting component with the output address type set to LW the address to 1 the Setting Mode to Sub Value the Dec value to 8 the Lower Limit to 0 and the Tag to Brightness Place a word setting component with the output address type set to LW the address to 2 the Setting Mode to Add Value the Inc Value to 8 the Upper Limit to 255 value 242 Chapter 6 Components range 0 255 and the Tag set to Contrast 9 Place a word setting component with the output address type set to LW the address to 2 the Setting Mode to Sub Value the Dec value to 8 the Lower Limit to 0 and the Tag to Contrast 10 Place a word setting component with the output address type set to LW the address to 3 the Setting Mode to Add Value the Inc Value to 8 the Upper Limit to 255 value range 0 255 and the Tag set to Chroma 11 Place a word set
337. rdware Wizard i Found New Hardware Wizard Chapter 3 Description of the eV5000 Software Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard Windows will search for current and updated software by looking on your computer on the hardware installation CD or on the Windows Update Web site with your pennission Read r policy privacy iJ Can Windows connect to Windows Update to search for software Yes this time only Yes now and every time connect a device No not this time Click Next to continue This wizard helps you install software for eview USB 9 f your hardware came with an installation CD i SE or floppy disk insert it now What do you want the wizard to do Install the software automatically Recommended Install from a list or specific location Advanced Click Next to continue 71 Chapter 3 Description of the eV5000 Software D Program Files eV5000_UNICODE CHS driver Se Browse For Folder Cy eMule El 9 ev5000_UNICODE_ENU 1116 a H demo1112 5 ats 12 Chapter 3 Description of the eV5000 Software E Found New Hardware Wizard j Please choose your search and installation options Pia T Search forthe best driver in these locations Use the check boxes below to limit or expand the default search which includes local paths and removable media The best driver found will be installed i MW Search removable me
338. re above you can select a bottom layer window for the window in the Bottom Window option A bottom layer window is different from a common window During runtime the components of the bottom window are inserted into the general window but actually this bottom window is not displayed The display and control of components of the bottom window are the same as that of the general window The bottom window is something like transparent for the panel users The users operate the parts on the bottom window while they think they are touching the parts on the general window above the bottom window Relationship between screen and window A screen can include a common window a base window and a fast selection window while each common window or base window can include multiple pop up windows Their relationship is shown as follows 88 Chapter 4 Windows Screen Base window Fast selection Common window window When the window switchover command is executed the panel screen will clear all the current windows including the pop up windows attached to the current basic window and switch over to the window to be displayed However the common window will always be displayed on the screen A pop up window invoked by a direct or indirect window will not change the original contents of the base window and it is only attached to the base window In the window property setting dialog box each window can be configured with a
339. re to allow sufficient character length to accommodate all messages If the Format message and message text exceed the Character length the message is truncated As for the method for obtaining day and time refer to Section 11 3 Nonvolatile Local Word LW10000 10006 10005 RTC year Value range 0 9999 R W 10006 RTCweek Value range 0 6 R W Note on RTC E BIN code i A user can display system time with a corresponding component with its value writable However the user has to make sure its value must be within the value range otherwise the operation will be ignored and the current time value will not be modified 3 Click OK and adjust the position and size of the event display component Example of Event Display 1 Create a new project 2 Enter two event entries to the Event log object list as shown below 202 Chapter 6 Components PLCO 0 LB 10 LB10is on 1 PLCO 0 LW 30 gt 80 Temperature over 20 degree Where the first event corresponds to pop up window 4 and the second event corresponds to pop up window 5 3 Add an event display component to window 0 as shown in the figure below Event Display Component Attribution Basic Attribution Event Display Component Position Friority Normal input Address AMS a A Output Addres HMI HPMIO PLC Heal AMO PLC H Addr Type Ly Add 10 Addr Type Lw Addr O Code Type BIN Format COOCOO Code Type BIN Format OQOODD Wor
340. responding to the switch Use Address Tag Whether to use the address entered in the address tag library For details refer to Section 6 34 133 Chapter 6 Components Description A reference name not displayed that you assign to the switch component 2 Go to the Switch tab and set switch types Bit Control Component Attribution Basic Attribution Switch Tag Graphics Position Switch Type On Switch Types and Functions When the component is pressed touched on the panel the corresponding PLC bit register is turned ON The state will be kept i e remains ON even after being released Be the component is pressed touched on the panel the corresponding PLC bit register is turned OFF The state will be kept i e remains OFF even after being released Toggle Every time the component is pressed the corresponding PLC bit register eal its current state once ON gt OFF OFFSON Only while the component is held down pressed is the specified PLC bit register turned ON Likewise when the switch is released the specified bit 7 is turned OFF Go to the Tag tab Fill in text to denote states Go to the Graphics tab Select a vectogram or bitmap to indicate the bit register states and represent the touch area Go to the Position tab and adjust the position and size of the switch component if necessary Click OK key to complete the setting of the switch component 6 4 Word Setting il Multiple State
341. riority Mormal Input Address on Qutput Address ae HMI HMIO PLC 0 HMI HIO PLC 0 Add Type iyo Addr U Add Type Lyf Add l Code Type Bit Format OOOOo Code Type BIN Format DODDD WwordN o Use Ader Ta g wordo 7 _ Use Addr Tag Description oWwDO Word Setting Component Attribution Basic Attribution Multi State Setting Tag Graphics Position settingMode Set at window Open i Set Value 00 96 3 Chapter 4 Windows Create a Indicator lamp part with the Address Type set to LB and the Address to 0 to display the state of bit register LBO Bit Display Component Attribution Basic Attribution Bit Lamp Tag Graphics Position Priority Mormal input Address Stout Address HMI HMIO PLC HMI HMIO PLC Add Type LB Addr O Addr Type Addr U Code Type BIN FormatDDDDD Code Type BIN Format DDODD wodho Use Addr Tag wordo C Use Addr Tag Description BLO Bit Display Component Attribution Basic Attribution Eit Lamp Tag Graphics Position Function Hormal a 97 4 5 Chapter 4 Windows Create a number display part with the Address Type set to LW and the Address to 1 to display the state of LW1 Data Display Component Attribution Basic Attribution Wumeric Data Fant Priority Normal Input Address Output Address HMI HMIO 0 HMI HMIO 0 Addr Type
342. rocode Variable Window and the following menu appears Parameters Datatype Paramname PLC Station Reg Addre Address Noof Word OptMode Add Variable Delete Variable Modify Variable iiil Select Add Variable and the following dialog box appears Macro Code Variable Variable HMI Data Type bit PLC No R Read Address Type 0s Word Length 1 Address FormatDODo Coding Type BIN E o ae Cancel Firstly assign a name to the variable 291 Chapter 9 Macro Variables are divided into two types Reading variables and Writing variables They are distinguished from each other by read write attributes Reading variable means the macro code will obtain the value of the variable from a designated address while writing variable means writing an operating result from the execution of macrocode into a designated address Therefore read write variables are different variables for the same address Therefore it is recommended that _R and _W be used to distinguish them when naming a variable In this example LWO and LW1 are reading variables and LW2 is a writing variable Therefore we name them as follows LWO_R LW1_R LW2_W Please note that the variable name shall comply with the requirements of C language for variables Particular attention shall be paid to the following points 1 Variable name is case sensitive 2 Variable name cannot be a number or started with a digit
343. rotocols to connect different controllers at the same time The MT5000 completely supports the Ethernet communications function and multiple touch screens can be networked at will The function of image file support is added supporting the import of images in such formats as 24 bit bitmap JPEG and GIF Standard C language macrocodes can be triggered in multiple modes featuring powerful function high flexibility and easy operation Powerful timer function USB download greatly accelerates the download speed in user configuration The communication capability of the USB ports is increased so that programs can be downloaded through the USB ports SPC Stored Programmable Controlled contrast and brightness The contrast and brightness are adjusted through the Local Bit LB User defined start interface The user can customize a start LOGO interface Supporting all fonts of the Windows platform Supporting the drawing of any arcs and sector diagrams Supporting direct connection with most mainstream PLCs the MT5000 and MT4000 will have wider market and application prospect With the simple convenient and powerful EV5000 configuration software the user can master its design method and design first class works at the fastest speed Before using the MT5000 and MT4000 series touch screens please read this manual carefully to ensure correct operation of the equipment and the safety of the user and equipment so that the touch screens
344. rts 4 Vector Graph E state 1 state 123 vg Gas La MUB CTRL_BAROQ1 wg i NUM_DISP_BAROO1 yg Bit State Bit State Lamp NUM_KEVOOL vg Setting J E Bit ae Direct Window Project construct window Swit wite 6 1234 oi MNI j ta Multiple State Multiple State J HMIO Setting Display PLC ii PLC1 0 se g PLCO O i Fo Multiple State Scroll Bar Switch ee i Function Parts Mouselx F1 y 5 4 Return to the configuration window select a component and open the component attribution dialog box of it as shown in the following figure 113 Chapter 5 Basic Design of EV5000 WLU 5 Switch to the Shape tab in the dialog box check the selecting box use vector graphic and select the vector graph for the part in the list below All vg files imported into the project can be found in the list In this example select the vg you have just created Word tisplay Component Attribution Basic Attribution Multi State Display Tag Graphics Position Use Bitmap Import Graphics Graphics State 0 6 Close this dialog box and the component will be displayed in the screen in the mode of a vectogram All loaded vg files will be listed in the Project File Window under the directory of Shape Library 114 Chapter 5 Basic Design of EV5000 aa w HMI 5 _ vector Graph _d
345. rts PLC station No only when the connection is made through the communication module It is not required to set the PLC station No in other circumstances PLC software setting Please refer to related PLC programming software user manual of MITSUBISHI Reference website HT TP www mitsubishi automation com 353 Chapter 14 Connection of eView MT5000 4000 with Common PLCs Operable address range 3 ow T bit 0 255 Timer node External input node External output node Timer buffer C word 0 255 DDD TO E El TZ O 8000 9999 Note D indicates decimal notation O indicates octal notation and the value range is 0 7 Counter buffer Counter buffer double Data register Special data register E fo Le El ee ee eee Rood Eaa The operable range in the above table indicates the operable range of the MT5000 4000 touch screen The actual range of the PLC may be broader or narrower than this range Detailed wiring diagram Note MITSUBISHI FX series PLCs include such models as FXO FXOs FXOn FX1s FX1n FX2nc FX2n All of them can be connected with the eView touch screen either through the programming COM port in the CPU or through the communication interface board 232BD or 485BD When BD module is used select such PLC types as MITSUBISHI FXOn FX2 FX2n COM and pay attention to the settings of the communication format register D8120 Set the b9 and b8 of BFM 0 to O For detailed hardware description refer t
346. ructions for EVManager series support this function Enter an IP address like 192 168 0 255 It is usually not required to modify the port number Click Update and the Setting IP PORT Successful dialog box appears Click OK and the IP address of the target panel changes to 192 168 Ei EVManager Communication Set ay Download Operate CF Upload Operate Communi cation Type USB port IF HULL Serial HO NULL Get HMI IF PORT information IF gz 1 amp 8 O 54 i Refresh IF FORT l 165 0 255 FORT 200 Refresh Section Write Kernel Click Get and the IP address of the target screen is displayed as 192 168 0 255 It means the IP address is successfully modified kg k EEA Communication Set ES Download Operate Communi cation Type USE port Upload Operate IF HULL Get HMI IF FORT information Get Version TE 192 165 Refresh IF FORT IP 192 168 Return Section eat FORT 2006 Refresh Section Return User Application Status frite Kernel Return Set Application Status trite Roots Note To obtain IP update IP address the user can only select the communication mode of serial port or USB 428 Chapter 15 Operation Instructions for EVManager Jumping Selection Area Jump to User Program Status The target panel jumps to run the configuration program Jump to Setup Program Status The target panel changes to the SETUP interface
347. s ON the lamp will show the state 1 shape in static state Blinking on state 1 The lamp will Blink the shape corresponding to state 1 when the bit status is ON The blinking period is set in the Rate text box When the bit satus is ON the lamp will show the state 0 shape in static state 3 Go to the Label tab Fill in text to denote OFF or ON state 127 Chapter 6 Components Bit State Lamp Component Attribute Basic Attribute Bit State Lamp Tag Graphics Position W UseTag Language English USA amp Use Text Library Tag List Test Library MultiLine Align State in this example as the above figure shows the label for the lamp state 0 is OFF and turns to ON when the lamp state is 1 The user can enter any content for the specific state Alignment Three alignment modes are available Left Entered contents are placed to the left edge of the graphic Right Entered contents are placed to the right edge of the graphic Center Entered contents are placed in the middle of the graphic Bit State Lamp Component Attribute Basic Attribute Bit State Lamp Tag Graphics Position W Use Tag Language English USA Use Text Library Tag Lis Oo o Taw o O Font Size Select the font size for the entered label text including such options as 8 16 24 32 48 64 72 and 96 as shown in the following figure 128 Chapter 6 Components
348. s closed the corresponding PLC bit register is turned OFF This operation is only applicable for local bit LB or LW x When the window containing this bit setting component is maximized the window Max corresponding PLC bit register is turned ON When the window containing this bit setting component is maximized the window Max corresponding PLC bit register is turned OFF When the window containing this bit setting component is minimized the window Min corresponding PLC bit register s is turned ON When the window containing this bit setting component is minimized the window Min corresponding PLC bit register is turned OFF When the window containing this bit setting component is being displayed and back light OFF the back light is OFF the corresponding PLC bit register is turned ON When the window containing this bit setting component is being displayed and back light OFF the back light is OFF the corresponding PLC bit register is turned OFF Set ON at When a numeric input component has conducted a successful input operation successful input in the window containing this bit setting component the corresponding PLC bit register is turned ON Set OFF at When a numeric input component has conducted a successful input operation successful input in the window containing this bit setting component the corresponding PLC bit register is turned OFF 132 Chapter 6 Components 3 Go to the Tag tab Fill
349. s esses ssssssss sad saasessssseseaaadd F ecaccceaccccccnaceonacoceceeeeeeies ROR eA A A A OA To fill a shape select the shape to be filled then click one of the above fill style icons The method is the same as that for filling a window The only difference is that for a component the line color is the line color of the pattern while the fill color is the pattern background color as shown in the following figure Status bar Mouse x 256 y 42 The stats bar shows the current mouse position the width and height of the selected object edit state and other state information 3 1 4 Tools Menu As shown in the following figure for the contents of the Tools menu please refer to related descriptions in Sections 3 5 3 7 3 8 and 3 9 55 Chapter 3 Description of the eV5000 Software Libraryvil Window HelpiH Ctrl F Downloadi Et Ctrl D Offline Simulationi F F5 ShiFE F5S Indirect Online Simulation Direct Online Simulation Ckrl F5 Options O Olk F 3 1 5 Project Database As shown in the following figure the Library menu provides eight items For the details refer to related descriptions in Chapter 5 and Chapter 6 LibrarviD Window wd HelpfH Text Labrary T Address TagiB Alarm Information Log nto4 Event Information Log ntE PLE Control P New Graphicsta Import Graphics LabraryviTi E fm fe Eb cS Be al Macrocode fh 3 1 6
350. s port is used for MT4000 programming and debugging at the COMO same time PLC PLC Bie Signal RS 485 RS 485 PC RS 232 l RS 232 4 wire 2 wire E RS 485 Rx RS485A r n a E 474 Appendix Ill Hardware Overview opem pee ap per o sfo fsm O e ee se e O OO TxD_PC RS 232 Tx Laas o as oe S Pin assignment of the 9 pin female D SUB COM1 This port is used to Pin Designations g connect the MT4000 series touch screens and provides RS 232 port controller Pir na Pin assignment of this port is basically the same as COMO The only difference is that COMO is connected with the RS 232 interface of the PC to serve as the hardware flow control signal for PLC 232 connection Pin Signal PLC RS 485 PLC RS 485 PLC RS 232 4 wire 2 wire RS 485 Rx RS485A a 3 opor as 5 Signal ground COM1 8 Ree RsaapRe a 7 CTS PLC Clear to send i ee ee RTS PLC Ready to send ie ee eee a a 2 3 2 Connection with PC The COMO port on the back of the case can be used to connect PLC RS 232 485 422 devices and can also be used to connect with the programming interface and setting interface of a PC Connection The port can be connected to a PC through a dedicated cable P N MT4000 PC Port Function Due to the reason of communication rate the COMO port of a PC is only used for 475 Appendix Ill Hardware Overview configuration downloading and parameter setting and it will not be used
351. s than the time used for reading two packages thus communication time is saved LM note Set the ports according to the physical connection For example if the PLC is going to be connected to COM1 in real application field set the pramaters of COM1 in the HMI Attribution dialog box 270 Chapter 8 Recipe Data Task Bar Serial Port 0 Setting PLE Communication Time Out Baud Rate 9600 Protocol Time Out 1 Word Length amp Protocol Time Out 2 Parity none Mas interval of block packi ORDS Stop Bit 1 Mas interval of block pack BITS Slave Mo Max Block package size ORDS Max block package size BIT 5 A Note In general do not modify the parameters in the right column as shown below except that you are an advanced user and it is necessary to adjust them HMI Attribution Hl Task Bar HMI Extend Attribution Print Setting senal Port 0 Setting Serial Port 1 Setting PLE Communication Time Out Baud Fate 9600 Protocol Time Out 1 Word Length amp Protocol Time Out 2 Parity none Max interval of Block packi ORDS Stop Bit Max interval of block pack BITS Slave Ho Max block package szef ORDS Max block package size BlTS Not revise these parameters please 7 6 PLC Station No Double click the PLC icon in the project window the following window appears Where the user can set PLC station No The value here must be the same as the actual PLC station number set with the PLC programming software otherwise
352. s to perform periodic circulation for the data of LWO LW1 LW2 and LW3 respectively The corresponding minimum value is 0 and corresponding maximum values are 500 1000 1500 and 2000 respectively The step length is 10 and cycle time is 0 5 second Take data control of LWO for example as shown in the figure below for details about Timer Component refer to 6 30 Timer Component Attribution Timer Timer Function Basic Attribution Trigger Address Trigger Mode Mie Hbl Eve Cycle 100me 30 PLC Ho Response Mode Immediate Address Type Response State OFF Address Repeat Times 0 188 Chapter 6 Components Timer Component Attribution 15 SetMode Set value Set Address Hal HMIO Data Type Bit PLE No O WordLen 1 Addr Type LE Value Address V CodeStple BIN tH ly Save and compile it and then perform offline simulation The operation effect is shown in the figure below 189 Chapter 6 Components 38 Nenu Task B 6 20 2 Multi page Trend Curve Make the following modifications on the basis of the single page trend curve shown in the previous example In the Trend Graph tab select multiple pages in the Type drop down list box Select 15 in the No of Pages drop down list box Select the Save Time check box Set the Hold Scroll and Time register addresses respectively to LB100 LW100 and LW110 as shown in the figure below Trend Graph Component Attribution Basic Attribution Tre
353. s type of XY plot It is calculated by system not settable by the user Use Address Tag Whether to use the address entered in the address tag library For details refer to Section 6 34 Description A reference name not displayed that you assign to the XY graph component 2 Go to the XY Graphics tab and set related parameters 142 Chapter 6 Components XY Graph Component Attribute Basic Attribute i Graphics Channel Position Sam Time DrawType Standar is ah 10 Channel Type Single page Attr ls PageNum Control Address Htl FPLC Addr Type Address CodeType wordN o Note The next bit of the pause address ts the clean address For example If pause address ie LEO clean address is LET Type Single page or multiple pages If the user selects the single page mode it will only display the data change of the sampling points in the current page Points out of that page will not be saved or displayed If the user selects multiple page display mode each channel of the XY graph can save number of pages x number of sampling points In this way when the XY graph rolls forward the previous sampling data will not be lost Historical data will be saved to the memory for future reference Please note that a maximum of 31 pages of historical data are available which is determined by the No of pages parameter Attribute Start from left or Start from right In other words it determines whether
354. s window 21 Change Common Window If the function key is set as Change Common Window when the touch area is pressed the current common window will be replaced by the specified window as new common window Also the new common window is designated by selecting from the list Change Fast Selection Window This function changes the fast selection window The window specified in this function must be the exact same size as the original fast selection window window number 2 by default Pop up Window 224 Chapter 6 Components If the function key is set as Pop up Window when the touch area is pressed the window designated by window number selected from the list will be displayed over top of the current base Window 4 Window 4 Window 100 Pop up window 100 window The existing window s will not be terminated Close Window A Close Window function key terminates the pop up window where it is placed when pressed However it cannot close direct or indirect windows The open close of direct indirect windows are controlled by their corresponding bit word registers and the Close Window function key can only close pop up windows and cannot control the register data Popup Window Title Bar A function key defined as Popup Window Title Bar is used to move the position of a popup window on the screen A pop up window on the screen that has a function key inside the window with the popup window title barwindow bar
355. saved in the RW Recipe Word registers Record Count Indicates the maximum number of events to be saved 266 Chapter 8 Recipe Data Enable Buzzer Enables disables the buzzer If this check box is selected the system will give a buzz sound when the panel is touched About the storage of Event Library Initial Address The address of recipe card where the storage space for event library begins If the Save Event Log option is selected in the HMI Attribution dialog box is checked the system will automatically save the triggered event information in the recipe card The user doesn t need to care about the detail of saving event information The saving procedure is automatically done by the system The event library starts from the address specified in the Initial Address field The default value is 0 Data saved in the recipe card include Event Library Management Information and event entry information The event library management information has 30 words and is saved from the Initial Address The event entries are just saved after the management information The length of an event entry is 20 words The following example will show the arrangement of memory space for event entry storage Open the HMI Attribution dialog box and select the check box Save Event Log as the following figure shows HMI Attribution Print Setting Serial Port 0 Setting Seral Port 1 Setting Hbl Task Ear HMI Extend Attribution ScreenProtect
356. se C_ Enable TCPAIP Filtering All adapters F cle Permit Al Permit All Permit All Subne O Permit Only Permit Only C Permit Only Defau TCP Forts UDP Forts IF Protocols Irnztall Description Obit Use tr Freter wide area across dive Show ico Add Add Alters Remove Remove A Caution 1 Normally the port number does not need modification To change the port number the port number in the Setting Option in the Tools menu should not be the same as that in the Project Structure Window and HMI Properties as shown in the following figure HEI Attribute Serial Fort O Setting Serial Fort 1 Setting HMI Task Par HMI Extend Attribute Print Setting Hetwork Setting IF Address Idee ee yo 0 eas Port Number Subnet Mask 255 2 ee o 259 i Balewa 192 1768 O 1 Display Setting Screen Display Mode Horizontal Vertical Description 19 Chapter 3 Description of the eV5000 Software Compile amp Download Option Compile W Compress Bitmap Size gt 1024 Download Download Device Ethernet Serial Ho IF Address Port AES Screen Grid Space 2 This port can be connected to a HUB or a SWITCH via a standard Ethernet cable RJ45 straight through cable to access the LAN Local Area Network or can be directly connected to the Ethernet port of the PC via an interconnection cable RJ45 cross over cable
357. served addresses initialized to be ON after startup the component uses LB9000 as the default trigger address For details about system reserved registers see chapter 11 Data Input Component Attribution Basic Attribution Numeric Data Trigger Address Font Graphics Position HMI T PLU No i k Addr Type LB kg Address S000 Format DDDOD Data Input Component Attribution Basic Attribution Numeric Data Trigger Address Font Graphics Position Font Size 16 Align Fin gt iz Color Example H HHH Font Size Set font size including such options as 8 16 24 32 48 64 72 and 96 Align Applicable only to decimal format that is two data types of Signed integer and Unsigned integer For example set integer digit 5 decimal digit 0 and enter the number 123 The display format covers 154 Chapter 6 Components Align right T23 Left 123 Leading zero 00123 5 Go to the Graphics tab Select vectogram or bitmap to enhance display effect The graphic selected here can be used as the background of the digits Data Input Component Attribution Basic Attribution Numeric Data Trigger Address Font Graphics Position W Use Vector Graphics Import Graphics Graphics State 0 Click OK to complete the setting and place the numeric input component in an appropriate position Numeric Display Format 1 Signed integer and unsigned integer Data displa
358. setting Recommended Optional Setting Precaution Setting RS 232 RS232 RS485 Must be the same as the Data Bits 7or8 COM port settings of the controller 410 Chapter 14 Connection of eView MT5000 4000 with Common PLCs Must be the same as the Stop Bits 1 1 or 2 COM port settings of the controller Must be the same as the 9600 19200 38400 Bits per Second 9600 COM port settings of the 57600 115200 controller Must be the same as the Even parity odd Parity None COM port settings of the parity none controller Must be the same as the PLC Station No 1 COM port settings of the controller Controller software setting Operable Range rom Description Operable address range Refer to ABB 07KR51 user manuals 00 00 68 15 Input node 00 00 68 15 68 D 68 D Internal auxiliary O0 000 00 099 15 U 233 00 255 14 DDDH node 68 D 68 D Output node 000 00 125 15 DDDH Link relay node 00 00 68 15 Input register Indirect current 001 00 031 15 D register Internal double 000 00 007 15 word register Indirect double 000 01 007 15 D word register Note D indicates decimal notation H indicates hexadecimal notation and the value range is 0 F 000 00 099 15 U 230 00 255 15 DDDH Internal register DH DH 00 00 68 15 Output register DH DH H 411 Chapter 14 Connection of eView MT5000 4000 with Common PLCs 8 pin round Detailed wiring diagram ABB 07KR5
359. specific outdoor applications do consult your vendor NEMA rating The front panel of the MT4000 series touch screens conforms to the NEMA stands ae specifications of NEMA 4 When the product is correctly installed in a panel for National TRE cee in compliance with NEMA 4 specifications the panel still meets the ectrica protection requirements of NEMA 4 that is no liquid will seep through the Manufacturers Mee ss oe panel when the panel surface is sprayed with liquid Association It is proved by test that the MT4000 series touch screens meet CE standard In other words the circuit design of the product is able to Electrical withstand the interference of electrical noise but it cannot eliminate environment l l l electrical noise under all circumstances Correct cabling and correct grounding ensure normal operation of the product To ensure normal operation of the product do not install the MT4000 series touch screens in the environment where severe mechanical vibration or Mechanical shocks are present environment 2 Installation Instructions 2 1 Installation Instructions 2 1 1 Location Considerations Care should be taken when locating any equipment behind the MT4000 series of products to ensure AC power wiring PLC output modules contactors starters and relays and any other source of electrical interface are kept away from the back of these products Particular care should be taken to the position of var
360. splayed Therefore you can place some word setting components in the main interface to set the value of the LW9130 the tags of those word setting components indicate the language they stand for Touch the word setting component corresponding to the desired language after the HMI panel has just powered on so that the user can select appropriate interface language To change the language return to the main interface to select the language again e 6 35 Address Tag Address tag is a list for storing frequently used register addresses It also saves a lot of time for the user avoiding the trouble of reentering an address You can use the address in the list in any place that supports the application of Use Address Label Its usage is described as follows Create an address tag in the Tag Library 1 Click the ii icon or select Project Database gt Address Label on the toolbar the address label library appears 248 Chapter 6 Components Address Tag Library Address Type Delete Madity ext 2 eClick Add the following small dialog box titled Bulid Address Tag appears Address Tag Library Nene PLE Datatype Aatiows Type Build Address Tag Tag Name Tag noname OF HMI HMO Cance FLE No 0 Data Type Bit k Address Type Address 0 Code BIN Add Delte Mody Tag Name Enter the name you assign to the ad
361. ssage board like Brush Color Brush Width and Clear Screen are provided by function key component After placing the message board place a function key component on the window the Function Key tab of the Function key Component Attribution dialog box appears There is a function block titled Message Board Select this function block and designate the specific function for the function key component Function Key Component Attribution Function Key Trigger Addr Tag Graphics Position C Switch Window C Keyboard Func Mapping Kep i Message Board i Pen Color C Pen Width t Clear er C Map Keyboard i Print Color f Magnity Multiple Print Page fe 2 fie 219 Chapter 6 Components 1 The Tool drop down list box provides the following options Function Key Component Attribution Function Key Trigger Addr Tag Graphics Position C Switch Window Change O Frarme gt Escute Marco Keyboard Func Enter 4 Map Keyboard Mapping Key sl pi E Black ani Tat site A Message Board olor r i Tex i Tool Magnify Multiple 10 gt T Indicator Per l Trend Graphics Per Color Pririt Page E ii apn r Elea Block _ f Curent Horizontal Calas Pen Width Eal All VectorGraph Clear C Next Vertical Background Brush Select a brush and then you can write down messages or draw a picture on the message board Eraser Erase the contents on the
362. ssseeorrersssseeerrrens 65 3 6 COMPONENT LIST WINDOW cicisecsteaievascvniconadooheexnacaiscanScolSesnadsheesbGdaiiertndohuunubonlennadsbuuabboedPeehedvtaeahoaitess 66 3 7 OFFLINE SIMULATION ecann A E A E iinet 66 2 ONONE SINUA LOIN eana a a a E e n E sd asesnadateanets 67 2 DOWN EO ADe E E E E 69 CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURATION WINDOWS eeeeeeeeccccooosssssssssseececscsoosossssssssssseseccosossssssssssssssssee 87 A Ms 6 TB 3 6 al Ds Erea E A 87 A 2 VVINDOW ROPER TIE aenrike a a ios ceateac O enema N 90 AS CREATING A VVINDOW a otk Gen a a Sak and eek bee ene 93 A ACOPENING A VVINDOW aA 93 A DELETING A V IN DOW sc gape ketene Belen ease nee ane saas en eee 94 4 6 EXAMPLES F OR WINDOW Sreser aena en det e e NOA 94 4 7 WINDOW RELATED COMPONENTS sssseecccccccccsssscccccccecccssscccccccccccesssecccecceccesssceccccceseeaessesseeeees 104 CHAPTER 5 DESIGN WITH EV5000 SOME BASIC KNOWLEDGE cccsssssssssssssseees 105 SNCS ae aE esata ec oe fatoc es cats ciaa oa ese ase A iecdds ua eae A E deka coveaseateaes 105 5S2 ABOUT PARTID oraaa aaa Ma aa eaa aa aa a aa eae a a a a a aE 106 5 0 ADDITIONAL NOTE DESCRIP HON riisiin a REE EA E ere 107 5 4 INPUT OUTPUT ADDRESS OF PLC 2 setisiccscetncea cher otncisia wad voiwenweilncosndbon cored pnerne bebevauevbieradoaimeandvouss 108 SVE OTOR ORAP earn ater erie tre a tne nee ENE ere eG en ene Se een eee Ne eT en ne 109 i GRAPHICS aao a a E NO 116 SNA E EE E EE AE E E E A E E E A A
363. state switch gt Output Address Address of the PLC register controlled by the multi state switch Address The address of the word register corresponding to the multi state switch The address type must be properly set refer to PLC manual for detailed information Code Type BIN or BCD No of Words Select 1 or 2 for single word and double word respectively Use Address Tag Whether to use the address entered in the address tag library For details refer to Section 6 34 Description A reference name not displayed that you assign to the multi state switch 2 Go to the Multi State Switch tab and set the number of states and dada mapping list for the multi state switch component The user can set a maximum of 32 states Word Control Component Attribution Basic Attribution Multi State Switch Tag Graphics Position Control Hode bda B State Hum 2 Data Mapping Oo Functions of Multi State Switch Setting mode 140 Chapter 6 Components Description When the Multi State Switch is pressed the value in the designated output address register is increased by one If the result equals to one map value in the mapping list the corresponding state will be displayed When the Multi State Switch is pressed the value in the designated output address register is decreased by one If the result equals to one map value in the mapping list the corresponding state will be displayed Data mapping Every state
364. sted Note The data in this example is applicable to 5300L S T projects In case of 5400 or 5500 enlarge the size to 640x480 Firstly add a vectogram BALL VG and draw a bouncing ball with a round shape If you have a more vivid picture just import it Place a moving part in the upper left corner of the screen set the address to LWO and select move along X and Y axes with the maximum value of 320 and the minimum value of 0 select the vectogram BALL VG Place two value setting components and select to set them when the window is open set LW3 and LW4 to 5 Place four state setting components used to increase decrease the value of LW3 and LW4 The planned register space is as follows LWO State of the moving shape component always 1 LW1 Displacement of the moving shape along X axis LW2 Displacement of the moving shape along Y axis LW3 Moving speed along X axis LW4 Moving speed along Y axis Creating a macro Define the following variables as shown in the figure below Parameters Data type Param name PLC Station Reg ddre Address Ho oF Word OptMode signed short hul t 0 Livy i 1 Read signed short dy 0 Livy 1 1 write signed short We Y 0 Livy z 1 Read signed short Wie 0 Livy z 1 write bit direction x r OQ LB 0 1 Read bit direction x iw O LB 0 1 write bit direction wr OQ LB l 1 Read bit direction ww O LB l 1 write signed short speed x 0 Livy d 1 Read signed short speed 0 Livy 4 1 Read Compile
365. stlink Refer to related PLC programming software user manual of OMRON Reference website HT TP oeiweb omron com oei TechManuals PLC htm Operable address range PLC Address PLC Address Operable Range Format O R oss DDoe VOandmema 0 65535 DDD BB Link relay Note D indicates decimal notation B indicates bit code and the value range is 0 15 The operable range in the above table indicates the operable range of the MT5000 4000 touch 349 Chapter 14 Connection of eView MT5000 4000 with Common PLCs screen The actual range of the PLC may be broader or narrower than this range Detailed wiring diagram Note OMRON C200H series PLCs include C200H C200HS and ALPHA series Where ALPHA series consist of such models as C200HX HG HE C200H series PLCs can be connected with the touch screen through the HOSTLink protocol with the RS 232 interface on the CPU They can also be configured with various compatible HOSTLink communication modules provided by OMRON to connect with the touch screen Please pay attention to software and hardware settings For hardware description refer to manuals provided by OMRON 1 CPU C200H HS ALPHA series PLC OMRON PLC eView MT5000 4000 touch C200H CPU RS 232 screen interface COMO COM1 9 pin D SUB female connector Note The wiring method of SRM1 series PLCs is the same as that shown in the above figure In the CPUs of the C200H series PLCs there are Dial in line Package D
366. t can be added to a vectogram 115 Chapter 5 Basic Design of EV5000 5 6 Bitmap Graphics Like vector graphic a bitmap graphic can also have up to 32 states and represent different states of a multi state part with a single graphic The most significant difference between bitmap and vector graphic is that the user can import external images of various formats bmp jog and gif into the project and converted them to bg files The basic operations of a bg file are quite similar to those of a vg file with a few differences A Note Such operations as drawing a line and drawing are forbidden in a bitmap Only external shapes can be added The procedure of creating and editing a bg file is shown below 1 Select New Graphics in the Library menu or click the I icon on the toolbar the following dialog box appears State 1 Bitmap width 100 C Yeetor Graphics Height 100 File Hame ec itextitext_Oliv g Description 2 Select Bitmap for Type enter the number of states and name of the bg click Create x Mm 116 Chapter 5 Basic Design of EV5000 The user can add additional states to an existing bg file The procedure is decribed as follows Double click the bg file you want to add state to in the Projcet File Window After entering the editing mode click the editing area below the states preview window the icon for adding new states will be activated Click the icon a new state will
367. t cannot be used to connect with peripheral equipment such as a USB printer Connection USB Slave port can be connected with a PC through a general USB cable Port Function The port is only used to download user configuration program to the HMI and to set HMI system parameters Port Diagram 2 3 4 Connection with Ethernet The Ethernet port on the back of the case is a 10 100M adaptive Ethernet port It is can be used for HMI configuration downloading HMI system parameter setting and indirect online simulation of configurations In addition multiple HMIs can be connected through the Ethernet to create an HMI application Connection This port is connected with the HUB or Switch through a standard Ethernet cable RJ 45 straight through cable and then connected to a LAN It can also be directly connected with the Ethernet port of a PC through a dual system interconnection cable RJ 45 crossover cable Port Function This port can be used for HMI configuration downloading HMI system parameter setting and indirect online simulation of configurations In addition multiple HMIs can be connected through the Ethernet to create an HMI application 457 Appendix Ill Hardware Overview Port Diagram 2 3 5 Connection with Printer The parallel printer port on the back of the case can be used to connect with various parallel port printers on the market The full series of MT5000 products support printout function The printing port
368. t component with the Address Type set to LW Address to 0 Address Type in the Trigger Address tab set to LB and Address in the Trigger Address tab set to 9000 by default Data Input Component Attribution Basic Attribution Humeric Data Trigger Address Font Graphics Position Priority Input Address Output Address HMI HMIO PLC HMI PLC Addr Type Lw Addr 0 Addr Type Addr Code Type BIN Format DDDDD Code Type Format DODDDD wordo 1 E wordo a Description NID Data Input Component Attribution Basic Attribution Humeric Data Trigger Address Font Graphics Position HMI HMO g FPLC No O j ddr Type LB g Address Format ODDOD 101 2 3 Chapter 4 Windows Window 3 is built into the blank project wizard so after creating a new project user can find window 3 in the project construct window double click the icon of frame 3 will open it set the Width to 145 Height to 190 The Window Properties dialog box is shown in the following figure Window Attribution findow Safe Level Lowe Special Attribute E Position Use Background Color w O wD Width 145 Height 130 Transparence Bottom Windom 1 None k 3 Frame Pop Window Type W Tracking Monopoly i T F Color on Ba i Clipping Coherence eee Create a direct window part with the Address Type set to LB Address to 9069 and Window No to 3 Adjust the width and height of the component to
369. t list 0 LB 1 On water 1 LB 2 On chack Add Delete Modify Exit In order to improve the communication efficiency it is recommended that a block of continuous PLC bit registsers be used for the alarm list For example Use M100 199 to control the display of all messages In this case one read command reads M100 199 all at once instead of one bit at a time 6 19 Alarm Display So k l SEEE The Alarm Display component will display all triggered alarm messages in a designated area The content displayed is the same as that displayed on the alarm bar All alarm messages are related to specific bit registers When an alarm message is generated the alarm will be removed only after the corresponding bit register switches back to normal state otherwise the alarm message will always be displayed that is the alarm state remains ON This component is only used to display alarm message Messages must be entered with the Alarm Information Logon component before display gt Adding alarm display 1 Click the Alarm Display component icon and drag it to the window the basic attribution tab of the component attribution dialogbox appears 181 Chapter 6 Components Alarm Display Component Attribution Basic Attribution Alarm Display Position Friority Input Address Output Address HMI HMIO PLC HMI Addr Type Lw Add U Addr Type Addr Code Type BIN Foma DOODOO Code Type Format DDDDD Word U i wordo E wu
370. t settings of the PLC Must be the same as Bits per 9600 19200 38400 9600 the COM port settings Second 57600 115200 of the PLC 359 Chapter 14 Connection of eView MT5000 4000 with Common PLCs Must be the same as Parity Odd parity Even parity odd parity none the COM port settings of the PLC Must be the same as the COM port settings of the PLC PLC Station No PLC software setting Please refer to related PLC programming software user manual of MITSUBISHI Reference website HT TP www mitsubishi automation com Operable address range PLC Operable foe Address Description Range Type 0 77F External input node 0 77F External output node M Internal input auxiliary 0 8191 dddd node 0 2047 dddd Lock relay F 0 7FF Link relay 0 511 0 511 Holding timer node ddd Holding timer coil 0 511 Counter coil h s pr m emne s po aad reo x o m prenas wo oe ann est acres oupot ts est aad mee mo omn aad orne sx es aad caren vate of png 360 Chapter 14 Connection of eView MT5000 4000 with Common PLCs timer 0 511 ddd Current value of counter Ro 0 32767 ddddd File register 0 3FF hhhh File register Doo 0 3FF ddddd Data register Note D indicates decimal notation O indicates octal notation and the value range is 0 7 The operable range in the above table indicates the operable range of the MT5000 4000 touch screen The actual range of the PLC may be br
371. t the initial window in the project and compile the project then select the Logo File check box and download the file to the panel Once the logo file has been downloaded there is no need to download everytime if the user doesn t want to change it The logo will be displayed everytime the panel is powered on By default the checkbox for logo file downloading is unselected How to make your own logo Create a new project or open an existing one make sure there is an HMI icon in the Project Window Click the icon on the toolbar or right click HMI icon in the Project Window to enter the initial starting window edit window as shown in the following figure le ie Delete Exchange Serials Ports Replace HMI Type E Init Start Window Import Recipe Edit Attribute 83 Chapter 3 Description of the eV5000 Software Graph element window Connector Serial Ether Port By default there is a logo picture of Stepservo Ltd in the editing window The user can replace it with his own logo or other desired picture To import an user defined picture click the k icon on the toolbar and the following dialog box appears File name Files of type Graphics File bmp gif ipg Cancel Find your company s logo image and click Open The supported image format is bitmap JPEG image and GIF image and the image to be imported as t
372. t using address tag MUST BE CONSISTENT WITH the type of the tag For example when selecting a tag for a Bit component such as bit lamp or bit 250 Chapter 6 Components switch only the tags of Bit type can be seen in the Addr Type list When selecting a tag for a Word component such as word setting component or multiple state display only the Word tags can be seen in that list 6 36 PLC Control PLC Control is a list storing the PLC register events Registers in the list are linked to specific functions These functions are controlled by the value of corresponding registers Functions supported by PLC Control library is listed in the following table Once the Register Control pair is logged in the list it will automatically run like a background program Change window To change the current window Backlight control To Turn on off the backlight To print the content of the designated Report print window Backlight control with return value To implement data transmission between the PLC address and the LW RW To execute related macro instructions Execute macro Di when the conditions are satisfied gt The process for creating a PLC control component 1 Click the PLC control Library icon i the PLC Control Object List appears Universal PLC control data transmission PLC control object RE GiAddress Delete Modify 251 Chapter 6 Components 2 Clicke Add to create a new PLC co
373. ta from internal memory can be embedded in an event message To embed a value use the following format nnd Where is the starting delimiter nn is the internal register LW number 00 99 and d is the ending delimiter For example The content is set as Current temperature value 25d UPPER LIMIT ALARM If LW25 120 then the message will be printed out as Current temperature value 120 UPPER LIMIT ALARM To print out current value of PLC register data you should first assign a data transfer component to move data from the PLC to internal memory LW Click the OK key and the event message will be displayed in the Event List After entering event message you can edit existing message through the Delete and Modify button Press Exit to exit event entry PLCO 0 LB 10 LB10 is on PLCO 0 LW 30 gt 80 Temperature over 80 degree Note In order to improve communication efficiency it is recommended that a block of continuous PLC bit devices be used for the Event Entry component For example Use Bits100 to 199 to control the display of all event messages In this case one read command reads Bits100 to 199 all at once instead of one bit at a time 199 Chapter 6 Components 6 23 Event Display mt Event Display The Event Display component display messages in prioritized order in designated windows Various formatting features allow the display of event trigger acknowledge and return to nor
374. ta transmission component Code Type BCD or Binary Word No Depends on the number of data to be transferred later Use Address Tag Whether to use the established address tag for details refer to Section 6 35 Description Reference name assigned to the recipe data transmission component do not display 2 Click the Recipe Data tab and set the function and data length 273 Chapter 8 Recipe Data Recipe Component Attribution Basic Attribution Recipe Data Tag Graphics Function Upload Data Length Function Download Transferring data from the recipe memory of the touch screen to the PLC Upload Transferring data from the PLC to the recipe memory of the touch screen Data Length The data to be transferred in the unit of words In the Graphics tab Select vectograph or bitmap to display the component In the Tag tab Enter the words to be displayed Click OK place the component and adjust its size 8 2 Recipe Memory The recipe memory is the SRAM with backup batteries Therefore the contents in the memory can be saved for at least half a year after power failure When the system is powered on the batteries will be automatically charged The total size of the recipe memory is 64k words The recipe memory has two expressions RW indicates the absolute address while RWI indicates the index address LW9000 indicates the offset of the index address For example if the LW9000 is 50
375. ter 6 Components component 2 Goto the Moving Component tab and set moving type number of states and maximum and minimum values along XY axes Moving Component Attribution Basic Attribution Moving Component Tag Graphics Position Moving Type PARE Mas Value Min ale Scale Upper Limit Scale Lower Lirnit State Mum Type and Function Table Up to 32 different states can be assigned to the components in EV5000 software When the component has only one state the value of the register specified by the Read Address input address in the Basic Attribution tab must be held 0 otherwise the component may not be displayed The state numbers 1 32 correspond to internal register values O 31 respectively The position is controlled as shown in the table below Position is relative to the original location of shape X axis indicates the horizontal axis and Y axis indicates the vertical axis Lowest word Component State Component State Component State an integer between an integer between an integer between 0 and 31 0 and 31 0 and 31 2 word Read X displacement Y displacement X displacement pam T 3 word Read N A N A Y displacement Moving modes are as follows 146 Chapter 6 Components Moving Component Attribution Basic Attribution Moving Component Tag Graphics Position Moving Type Axis Only a Mas Value Min alue caling Reverse Scaling Scale Upper Lit
376. terference For example the bits for the character E during transmission are 0100 0101 45H However due to interference the bit may change to 1 In this case we call it a bit error The method used to check errors occurred during transmission is error detection the methods used to correct an error after detecting it is called error correction The simplest error detection method is parity check that is an additional odd even parity bit is transferred along with the bits of characters to be transferred Either odd parity or even parity may apply Odd parity Among all bits to be transferred including bits of characters and the parity bit the number of all 1 is an odd number for example 335 Chapter 13 Serial Communication In the 8 bit data 01100101 the number of 1 is an even number we append a 1 to change it to an odd number so the parity bit is 1 In the 8 bit data 01100001 the number of 1 is an odd number we append a 0 and it remains to be an odd number so the parity bit is O Even parity Among all bits to be transferred including bits of characters and the parity bit the number of all 1 is an even number for example In the 8 bit data 01100101 the number of 1 is an even number we append a 0 and it remains to be an even number so the parity bit is 0 In the 8 bit data 01100001 the number of 1 is an odd number we append a 1 to change it to
377. the security level 1 The registers LW9040 LW9041 reserved by the system are used to enter passwords for different security levels Add a numeric input component to window 0 as shown in the figure below Data Input Component Attribution Basic Attribution Numeric Data Trigger Address Font Graphics Position Priority Normal linpat ddess aa Qt tt ddess Htl HIO PLC Htl AMO PLE Addr Type Lw Add 5040 Addr Type Uw Addr 0 Code Type BIN Format DOODO Code Type EIN Format DOODO Word a Use Addr Tag WordNo Use Addr Tag Description MIO Select the Password in the Data Type drop down list box as shown below 325 Chapter 12 Security Level Data Input Component Attribution Digits Above Decimal Point Digits Below Decimal Point Min Value Mas Value 3993 Project Data Conversion Pro Min Yalue 0 Pro Max Value A Caution The user has to enter a security level password through the reserved registers LW9040 LW9041 of the system Therefore the Words must be set to 2 Save it to the disk make compilation and then run in offline simulation mode Nindow Current level Input Password Nenu wk Bar The current security level is 0 so the Change Window 4 button is unavailable Enter the password 1111 and the current security level changes to 1 as shown in the figure below 326 Chapter 12 Security Level ee C o Nindow Current level Input Passuord
378. the RWIO text box The operating state is shown as follows 280 Chapter 8 Recipe Data Click Download The text data will be transferred from RW300 to 4x100 ra ice In the above example we find that whether uploading PLC data to the recipe memory or downloading data from recipe memory to the PLC the starting position of the recipe memory data is the value corresponding to the LW9000 address This is important for implementing some complicated recipe data functions The section below gives a detailed description of the usage of the recipe memory data 8 3 Uploading Downloading of Recipe Data Between Touch Screen and PLC Recipe data is very important For example in an industrial production line the production equipment can fulfill different tasks according to different parameters We can store a group of 281 Chapter 8 Recipe Data data to the recipe memory in a defined format and revoke such data when necessary In this way we do not need to enter data temporarily which greatly enhances production efficiency The following example shows how to conveniently invoke multiple recipe data Suppose we have ten groups of recipe data in total each group consists of five words among which recipe name occupies four words and recipe data occupies one word We plan our recipes from RWO as follows Rep Grps Reg Addr Name of Rep 4 words Rcp Data 1 word Group 0 RWO0 RW4
379. the graph is displayed from the left to right or from the right to left when displaying sampling data Sampling Time Time interval between two pages of sampling points in seconds No of Sampling Points Number of sampling points displayed on the graph No of Pages When the Type is set to Multiple Pages this box is available Channel Number of tracks to be displayed corresponding to the number of word registers Two word registers correspond to one track Hold Keep The bit address that controls the start or stop of the XY graph in other words the sampling data stops when the Hold bit is turned ON and the sampling continues and XY graph will be dynamically displayed when the Hold bit is turned OFF again Scroll This address has to cooperate with the scrolling bar that is the user can view the XY graph by directly moving the scroll bar Set the scrolling address the same as the address of the scrolling bar component to be associated For details refer to Section 6 27 Scroll Bar Time When the Save Time check box is selected the Time box in the lower part of the window will be available It includes 12 words used to save the time of the latest sampling point The 12 words contain the second minute hour day month year of the start point and the second minute hour day month year of the end point in the current page Each word 143 Chapter 6 Components represents a time point 3 Goto the Chan
380. the index address RWI 0 will direct at the data of the address RW50 At this time if we change the data of LW9000 to 51 the index address RWI 0 will direct at the data of the address RW51 as shown in the figure below 274 Chapter 8 Recipe Data LW9000 51 Data RW50 SAEN RW51 0X2222 RWIO 0X1111 RW52 0X3333 RWI 0X2222 RW53 0X4444 RWI2 0X3333 RW54 0X5555 RWI3 0X4444 RW55 OX6666 RWI4 0X5555 RW56 OX7777 RWIS5 OX6666 Based on the above basic concepts the following is an example We designate a project and select the MODBUS RTU as the PLC type The following section describes how to upload 5 word text data beginning from the slave address 200 and with the slave address type of 4x to the OX2222 0X3333 0X4444 0X5555 OX6666 OX7777 RW300 address of the recipe memory The implementation process is shown as follows Before upload After upload Address 4x200 RW300 RW300 Create a new project and select MODBUS RTU for the PLC type Firstly create a component for uploading recipe data Set Address Type to 4x Address to 200 Function to Upload and Data Length to 5 Select the Use Address Tag check box The label content is Upload as shown in the figures below Recipe Component Attribution Basic Attribution Recipe Data Tag Graphics Friority Input Address Output Address Hbl PLC Hbl Holo PLC 0 Addr Type Addr ddd Type 4 Add 20g Format
381. ting component with the output address type set to LW the address to 3 the Setting Mode to Sub Value the Dec value to 8 the Lower Limit to 0 and the Tag to Chroma 12 Place a function key component and set it as a pop window title bar See 6 29 for details 13 Place a function key component and set it as a minimize window See 6 29 for details 14 Place a function key component and set it as a close window See 6 29 for details The completed window 4 is shown as follows Video Window Menu Rar ideo Window Install a camera properly download the project to the HMI click eChannel Channel to 243 Chapter 6 Components switch between channels 0 and 1 click eBrightness Brightness to adjust the brightness click Contrast Contrast to adjust the contrast and click Chroma Chroma to adjust the chroma so as to achieve the best camera effect Click the Window Bar and the entire window can be moved You may select to close or minimize the window Note 1 The video component window does not support offline simulation indirect online simulation and direct online simulation 2 The video window runs above the base window all the time 6 32 Bitmap Component Bitmap components are used static image as illustration or background With this component you can place images already imported into the bitmap library onto configuration window For details about im
382. tings of the controller Bits per I0 9600 19200 38400 Must be the same as the COM Second 57600 115200 port settings of the controller Even parity odd Must be the same as the COM Parity Even parity parity none port settings of the controller PLC Station i Must be the same as the COM No port settings of the controller Controller software setting 1 It is necessary to set the communication protocol of the communication port of the controller to 403 Chapter 14 Connection of eView MT5000 4000 with Common PLCs Modbus Slave mode Please refer to user manuals provided by EMERSON Reference website Http www emersonnetworkpower com cn Operable address range PLC Operable _ Bit Word Address Description Range Type System internal external 0 377 output node System internal external Y 0 377 input node Intermediate auxiliary 0 1999 DDDD register a 0 991 DDD Stepping status relay 02 000 we Tae S ooo ose Woe s oa o w z mw o woa twa os f oo ne a D double 0 3999 DDDD Data register Dword SD double 0 127 Note O indicates octal notation D indicates decimal notation The operable range in the above table indicates the operable range of the MT5000 4000 touch screen The actual address in the touch screen shall be 1 greater than the PLC address For example to read MO in the PLC write the address M1 in the touch screen configuration software 404 Chapter 14 Connection
383. tion The ball moves in the screen Adjust the speed at different directions and its moving track and speed change We can see from this example that to implement continuous change of a certain register the repeat revocation of macro instructions must be used and the input and write variables for the register to be operated must be defined Example 2 Domino In this example use a macro template to trigger the next macro template to implement a sequential operation In this way a sequence of dominoes will be fallen down or erected in 301 Chapter 9 Macro sequence Firstly draw a shape of a domino that is vectogram in two states one vertical rectangle and one horizontal rectangle and name the shape as BRICK VG as shown below stateD state Pe Make six lamp components with their addresses as LB1 6 respectively Use the vectogram BRICK VG The configuration is shown in the figure below AAAA Make six timer components to be triggered by registers with the triggering addresses as LB100 LB105 respectively Taking LB100 for example the timer setting is as follows Select Triggered by register state for rigger Mode ON for Response State and Execute immediately for Response Mode and 1 for Repeat Times Since it is triggered once and immediately it is not necessary to pay attention to execution cycle Timer Component Attribution Timer Timer Function Bazie Attribution r Trigge
384. tion offline simulation and indirect online simulation auxiliary functions as shown below HMI Attribution Hh Task Bar HMI Extend Attribution Print Setting Serial Port 0 Setting Serial Fort 1 Setting Frinter Epson Stylus CBS SPRT SP ON16FH By al CR e Epson Stylus oe iw EPSOM LO 305K i Print Extend Timefd h m i Print Date i Print Extend Date yyyy nm dd Check Window Errors MT5000 4000 supports the connection with EPSON ESC P2 printers or other compatible printers MT5000 4000 supports the following print modes Print text Print pointer Print trend graph Print all bitmaps Print all vectograms oo 2S YS Print background color The print function may be used in the following circumstances Function key screen printout and report output controlled by PLC and event print as detailed below 10 1 Function Key Click the Function Key and the following window appears In the window select the Print option 305 Chapter 10 Print Function Key Component Attribution Function Rey Trigger Addr Tag Graphics Position C Sitch window C Escute Marco C Kepboard Func C Map Keyboard Mapping Key i in _ Color Black and White C Message Board ees at Text Indicator Trend Graphics All Bitmap All WectorGraph C Next C Vertical Background Magnify Multiple 10 Print Page o ro w Curent Horizontal a Printer Color The user can select Mono
385. tion From Right To Left Picture Use Vector Dig Image NUM_DISP_BAF StateNo O Adjusting Knob Pic Use Vector Dig Image NUM _KEYOO1v StateNo Q Adjust the length of the scroll bar to the same as that of the trend graph The configuration after setting is shown as follows 217 Chapter 6 Components The operation effect is shown as follows i View Pe mz i When the display remains still click a position in the scroll bar to move the current display to the corresponding page in historical data It implements the browsing function similar to that in a Windows system and it is easy to use 6 28 Message Board Note Pad The message board is used as a canvas for users to save and transfer messages The user can write some notes on the HMI at will It is similar to the Paint but we can only user fingers or a stylus to write on the message board 218 Chapter 6 Components gt Procedure to add a message board Note Pad 7 1 Clickthe nn box appears icon and drag it to the window the Message Board Properties dialog Message Board Component Attribution Message Board Frame Width Frame Color Filled Background Frame Width The width of the message board frames Fill Background Select the frame background and foreground color or you can leave it empty 2 Click the OK key and adjust the position and size of the message board component Tools of the me
386. ts or 2 32 bits Address The word register address corresponding to the numeric display component Code Type BIN or BCD No of Words Select 1 or 2 for input address Use Address Tag Whether to use the address entered in the address tag library For details refer to Section 6 34 Description A reference name not displayed that you assign to the numeric display component Fill in the Numeric data tab by referring to related contents in the Numeric Input component Data Display Component Attribution Basic Attribution Numenc Data Font Data Type signed int Digits Above Decimal Point Digits Below Decimal Point Min Value 0 Max Value 99999994 Project Data Conversion Pro Min Yalue Pro Max Value 7 6 Data Type Control the display format of data including Signed integer Unsigned integer Hex Binary Password Single float and Double float Numeric Setting Set the position of the decimal point number of digits max value and min value Engineering Data conversion Applicable only to two data types of Signed integer and Unsigned integer 159 Chapter 6 Components 3 Goto the Font tab Set related parameters by referring to the Numeric Input component Data Display Component Attribution Basic Attribution Numeric Data Font Font Size 1 Align Right Example HHHHHHHH 4 Click OK to complete the setting and place the
387. ttribution Event Trigging Bits When Data Type is set to Bit the attribute can be set as follows ON Displays message when bit is ON OFF Displays message when bit is OFF Condition Words When Data Type is set to Word the condition can be set as follows Use lt to trigger when value in word register is less than preset value Use gt to trigger when value in word register is greater than preset value Print On Trigger Prints out message when event is triggered Return to Normal Prints out message when the event returns to normal state 3 Trigger Function Execute Macrocode If the corresponding event is triggered it will execute the macrocode set here Pop Window If a registered event is triggered the corresponding event information will be displayed on the event display area When the information is acknowledged pressed on the screen by the operator the designated window will pop up To close the pop up window 198 Chapter 6 Components place a function key component with the function of closing window Write Data If the corresponding event is triggered it will write O or 1 in the bit address set here or perform NOT operation on the current word value Note The Trigger Function is an optional function If there is no need to use those functions leave the checkbox unselected 4 Text Enter the content of the event message and select font color and size Note Da
388. u can also use the internal address type of the HMI panel For internal address types of HMI refer to Section 5 4 Please note that some internal addresses of the HMI are used by the system Do not use these addresses For details refer to Chapter 11 Address The initial address of the word registers corresponding to the meter Code Type BIN or BCD No of Words Select 1 or 2 for input address Use Address Tag Whether to use the address entered in the address tag library For details refer to Section 6 34 Description A reference name not displayed that you assign to the meter component 2 Goto the Meter Component tab Meter Component Attribution Basic Attribution Meter Component Position Dial Style Fie F B indicator Color Indicator Style 7 ha ae 1 Min 0 Dial Style Round Pointer up pointer down sector Pie Max Value Min Value Set the maximum value and minimum value to be displayed by the meter component Pointer Line shape or diamond shape The following figure shows the effect of the meter with a line pointer and a diamond pointer working with dial component 173 Chapter 6 Components Pointer Color Select the color of the pointer Dial style Sector round Pointer up round Pointer down The following figure shows three types of dials scale component must be used with meter A Note In general a point has to work with the scale component The scale can be used to strengthen t
389. u in the menu bar 196 2 Click the Add button to add message or click the Modify button to modify the existing message Event log object list Address HMI PLC No 0 Data Type Bit Add Type LB Address 10 Format DDDDD M Use Address Tag Attribution On C otf Event Trigging Cond E Print T On Trig l Return to Normal Open Text Library Open Address Tag Labrary J Text Trig Function Execute Macrocode V Pop Window 0 FrameO M WriteData 5 HMI HM PLCNo 0 Add Type LE Address M Use Addre Line ON Pleased inspect Font 16 Use Text Library hd 197 Chapter 6 Components Chapter 6 Components Address Trig Function HMI HMIO x iy PLC No 0 x V Pop Window 0 Frame0 X Data Type Word lv Write Data 0 Add Type LW x HMI HM PLCNo 0 y Address 30 Add Type LB Address Format DDDLE BIN Use Address Tag Text Attribution Line ON Pleased inspect Event Trigging r Cond lt 0 Print T On Trig Font 16 B TextColor Return to Normal Open Text Library Open Address Tag Labrary Ok Cancel 1 Address Data Type Select the node register corresponding to the event as bit or word address Address Type Select the address type of the register corresponding to the event Address type vairies with PLCs Address Designate the PLC bit or word register address to trigger the event Code Format BIN or BCD 2 A
390. uage tools or you can use the Nuage icon to move the component Every time when you click Tune the component will move by the distance of one pixel Its corresponding icons are ee respectively indicating Move Left by One Pixel Move Right by One Pixel Move Up by One Pixel and Move Down by One Pixel which correspond to the contents of the Nuage in the Edit menu one by one A simple method to use the Nuage function is to use the direction keys of the keypad to move the component conveniently Edit E Wiewt ToolsiT Library D wince UndotlZ Ctrl z Curie Chrl e Copi Chrl C Align Make Same Size Layer Align Horizontal Centert Ctrl I Align vertical Center 1 Ctrl g Select All Component Select Componett 4 Align It is used to implement the Justify the alignment of multiple parts With the Alignment tools users can Align right Align Top Align Bottom Vertical Center and Horizontal Center Their corresponding icons are IP slot uk wt Here we only conduct the Left operation The 35 Chapter 3 Description of the eV5000 Software effect after the Left operation is as follows Edit view Toolsi LibraryiD wWinc 9 Undotz Ctrl Z de CubiD Crk rae 3 Copic Ctrl C l gt Left Make Same Size t ol Right Laver P IIt Top ic Sroupt Ctrl 6 Jil Bottom He vertica
391. uch screen COMO0 COM1 14 7 SIEMENS PLC SI EM EN S Siemens Automation Connection of SIEMENS S7200 Series PLC with eView MT5000 4000 Touch Screen EV5000 software setting Recommended i i i i Optional Setting Precaution Setting COMO COM1 RS232 RS485 Data Bits 8B ee Data bits for this protocol 381 Chapter 14 Connection of eView MT5000 4000 with Common PLCs are set to 8 in a fixed ee ee ee ee Must be the same as the Stop Bits 1 1 or 2 COM port settings of the Must be the same as the 9600 19200 38400 Bits per Second COM port settings of the 57600 115200 PLC Must be the same as the Even parity odd Parity Even parity COM port serno of the parity none Must adopt the PLC Station No 0 255 recommended settings PLC software setting Set PLC address to 2 Please refer to related PLC programming software user manual of SIEMENS Reference website Http www siemens com s 200 Operable address range PLC Address Operable ee Description oe Range 0 4095 7 4095 7 DDDO External input node E Ea 0 4095 7 inl External output node Internal auxiliary 0 4095 7 DDDO node 0 5120 DDDD Data register Note D indicates decimal notation O indicates octal notation and the value range is 0 7 Note that the start bit of the VW address must be an even number If it is necessary to operate the double word variable select 2 in the corresponding component address properties dialog box The op
392. ult Lan Upload Key Init Macro 0 Level Key Oooo rit Addr Init indor Framel 1 Level Kep 1111 Record Public Window Frannie 2 Level Rey Oooo Use Buzzer Fast sel Win Framer Cursor Color The register LW9042 is reserved by the system to display the security level of the current base window We can only read the reserved register LW9042 but cannot write in the LW9042 Create a numeric display component and place it in window 0 to display the current security level as shown below Data Display Component Attribution Basic Attribution Nurneric Data Font Priority Input Address e Qutput Address HF HMIO Hbl PLC Addr Format DOODO Addr Type Ly Addr Type Format DOOD Code Type BIN Code Type Word ja wordo Description NOU The whole project is shown in the following figure Window 0 NDO Current level 322 Chapter 12 Security Level Save it to the disk make compilation and then run in offline simulation mode as shown in the figure below es i 9 Nindow Current level Nenu ik Bar Because no password is entered the current security level must be O when the project runs Switch to window 4 and set the Security Level to Medium that is 1 in the Window Properties window as shown below Window Attribution Winda Na Framed Safe Level EEM Special Attribute Print page Disable Map Keyboard Position Init Poz aa OO Width 32
393. urity Level E Dowmnload Select Section HMI Information Data File T Recipe File QO Loco File Click Download the software we designed or uploaded will be downloaded automaticlly to HMIs DownLoad 12 GUL FILE Downloading Ulta DownLoad 100 EVDownload Message Eg Flash Writing Please wait Download success cancel Powe on the HMI enjoy the work we did 334 Chapter 13 Serial Communication Chapter 13 Serial Communication 13 1 Serial Communication Serial communication means the bit by bit transfer between different equipment through two data signal cables sometimes a control line is required Each data bit occupies a fixed time length This communication mode uses less data cables and features low cost The following is the data frame of a byte in asynchronous communications mode consisting of start bit data parity bit and stop bit 15 V i Space 0 Yo aoh daea a ee ee 3 V 0 V 3 V a reer oe it a Mark GED o oo 7 x ee V ER gt BEAL AERA BUH CBA IEY In general logic 1 MARK 3V 15V logic 0 SPACE 3 15V and each data frame 7 or 8 bits consists of a high voltage start bit a low voltage stop bit and a parity bit The Bits Per Second of data usually consists of 9600 Bit S 19200 Bit S 38400 Bit S or 115200Bit S During transmission of serial data an error may occur due to in
394. ut address to LW100 set Setting Mode to addition Added Number to 5 and the upper limit to a considerable large value For the multi state setting component controlling the value decrease set output address to LW100 set Setting Mode to deduction Deducted Number to 5 and the lower limit Bottom to 0 191 Chapter 6 Components Add a bit state toggle switch to control LB100 so as to control the trend graph whether to pause reading data The settings are as follows Word Control Component Attribution Eg Basic Attribution Multi State Switch Tag Graphics Position Priority Mormal input Address A tph Addres Htl HMI PLC 0 HMI HMO PLO 0 bj Addr Type Lw Add Addr Type E 7 Addr T Code Type EIN Foma CODODD Code Type BIN FomatDOOOD Word UseAdd Tag WordNo 1 Use Addr Tag Description Mow Word Setting Component Attribution Basic Attribution Multi State Setting Tag Graphics Position Settinghlode Add value Z Word Setting Component Attribution Basic Attribution Multi State Setting Tag Graphics Position SettingMode Sub value yi 192 Chapter 6 Components Bit Control Component Attribution Basic Attribution Switch Tag Graphics Position Friority Input Address y Output Address AMI HMld PLC 0 HMI HIO PLC g Add Type LE Add 100 Add Type LB Addr Code Type Format DODOD Code Type Form
395. w Frame 2 Level Kep eeeeee Use Buzzer Fast sel tsin Frame Cursor Color Screen Saver Time Screen Protect Indicates the time period after which the touch screen will enter the screen saver state if no touch operation is conducted during the period The time here is counted in minutes Text Library Languages The number of languages included in the project for example English Germany French and Chinese or any other language For details refer to the description of text library in Chapter 6 Default Language The default language of the project when it is created Initial Macro The number of the macro to be firstly run after the panel finishes power on and enter the application project Initial Window No The number of the window to be displayed by the system firstly when the user power on the system and enters touch panel application program The default initial window Is window O 265 Chapter 8 Recipe Data Note The user can modify the Initial Window No whenever it is necessary open the project and change the initial window No here and re download the poject to the panel the change will take effect Another method for changing the initial window number is introduced in chapter 16 Print Setting Seral Port 0 Setting Serial Port 1 Setting HMI Task Bar HMI Extend Attribution ScreenProtect 10 Public Win Attribution Display below the basic windoy TestLab Lan 4 gt Pop Window Attribution Display on the top lay
396. will be transmitted to the data block of the recipe memory of the touch screen with the set start address If 4X10 is set to 3 the transmission direction is opposite Likewise the transmission operations in the other two directions are the same and the only difference is that the data memory of the touch screen is changed to the local data register LW Backlight Close This function can be used for closing panel backlight with a bit register When the specified Bit register state is ON the backlight of the panel will be shut off Even if the Bit register is set OFF the backlight will not resume To use a PLC Bit register to light up the backlight use the Backlight Open function Backlight Close return value This function is similar to the Backlight Close function we have just mentioned above The only difference is that when selecting this type of Backlight Close the control Bit will be automatically cleared after the backlight going off Backlight Open This function can be used for opening panel backlight with a bit register When the specified Bit register state is ON the backlight of the panel will be turned on Even if the Bit register is set OFF the backlight will not go OFF To use a PLC Bit register to shut off the backlight use the Backlight Close function Backlight Open return value This function is similar to the Backlight Open function we have just mentioned above The only difference is that when se
397. will export data when the printing component works The MT5000 series touch screens support multiple printers Printout with parallel ports and eView HMltek Ltd will continuously provide drivers for various brands of printers Note The length of the connection cable of a printer shall not exceed 5m Pin Designations Pin assignment of 25 pin D SUB female parallel printer port 13 1211109 6 Fb 545 2 1 25 242322 212019 1617 161514 DATAO Output DATA1 Output INT Output DATA2 Output 17 25 GND a ground ers eae DATA4 Output ar m m 8 DATAG Output omar oar A 2 3 6 DIP Switch Sw jsw2 Working Mode System Setting Mode E F OFF JON Touch Screen Calibrate Mode Lc ON OFF Firmware Update and Basic Parameter Setting Mode OFF JOFF Application Online Operation Mode 458 Appendix Ill Hardware Overview System Setting Mode In this mode the touch screen will start a built in system setting interface where the user can set such parameters as IP address brightness contrast and buzzer Touch Screen Calibrate Mode In this mode when you touch the screen the screen will display a sign through which you can calibrate the touch accuracy of the screen Firmware Update and Basic Parameter Setting Mode In this mode the user can update firmware set IP address and perform other lower level operations In general do not use this mode Application Online Operation M
398. witchover the system will not sample oscilloscope data and the data will get lost When a user switches back to the oscilloscope window it will resume data sampling from the very beginning The advantage of an oscilloscope is that a user can monitor multiple waveforms for which the long term monitoring is not necessary without adding extra background processing loads Meanwhile the oscilloscope provides variable rate sampling function which when cooperating with a PLC enables a user to obtain higher sampling frequency without being restricted to the frequency of 1 point per second gt Procedure to add an oscilloscope 1 Click the Oscilloscope component icon and drag it to the window the basic attribution tab of the component attribution dialogbox appears Oscillograph Component Attribution Basic Attribution Oscillograph Channel Position Priority Input Address Output Address HMI HiO FLE HHI PLC Add Type Lw Add Oo Addr Type Addr Code Type BIN FomatDO OOC Code Type Format DOODO word Uz Wardha Use Description 050 Input Address Specify the PLC word register address corresponding to the first curve the second curve data register is located at Read Address 1 and the third is located at read address 2 etc Address Type Select the address type of the register corresponding to the oscilloscope that is the monitored register s address type The address type varies with PLC type Altern
399. wnloaded In addition to this IP address the IP address of the PC should also be set The two IP addresses should be in the same network section that is to say the range of the IP address of your PC is 192 168 0 1 11 13 255 To implement normal download the IP address of the HMI should be different from that of the PC Port No A network is actually composed of seven layers of protocols One of the most important tasks of the Transport Layer is to provide a reliable end to end connection Where the end here means the port Of course there are many ports ranging from 0 to 65535 The TCP IP protocol has many ports All the ports less than 1024 have clear definitions You are recommended to use ports above 1024 Set such a port to a port used for the touch screen Anyway please make sure that your PC allows the use of this port The setting procedure for the PC port is as follows Network Connections right click gt Properties gt Local Area Connection right click gt Properties gt Internet Protocol TCP IP gt Properties gt Advanced gt Options gt Enable TCP IP Filtering gt Properties For details refer to the following figure 78 Chapter 3 Description of the eV5000 Software x 5 on F aeneral Advanced ICP IP Settings Tou can this capa the appre IF Settings DNS WINS Options int TCP IP Filtering Clie 2 File E 0s W Inter Obt U
400. wo PLCs For communication with PLC the two ports are identical So we only introduce the setting of Port 1 Setting of Port 0 is the same Type Select the communication mode of the touch panel and the PLC including such options as RS232 RS485 2W and RS485 4W Baud Rate Word Length Parity and Stop Bits Set the basic communication parameters matching the PLC Slave Station No In most cases the touch panel is the master station and the PLC serves as the slave station and this parameter is invalid then When the touch panel serves as the slave station while the PLC serves as the master station for example selecting the MODBUS SLAVE protocol set the slave station number for the panel here PLC Communication Timeout Time This parameter determines the time used by the touch screen for waiting for the response of the PLC When the delay for the communication between the PLC and the touch panel is longer than the timeout time the touch panel will 269 Chapter 8 Recipe Data display the message of PLC NO RESPONSE In general this parameter is set automatically when the user selects a PLC model so it is not necessary for the user to set it in most cases Protocol Timeout Time 1 2 Communication protocol timeout time in general this parameter is set automatically when the user selects a PLC so it is not necessary for the user to set it Max interval of block pack WORDS Max interval of block pack BITS Max block package si
401. y have been written back to the E7PROM Restart touch screen The panel will be restarted when this bit is set to ON W Low security level jlt is set to ON when the system switches from a lower security level to a higher one R Restore factory When the bit is set to ON the system will save the default settings global parameters in the downloaded data files to the LW10000 system parameter area Upon successful execution the system will automatically clear the bit CO oO Cc CO CO CO Cc CO CO CO CO CO CO O O O O O O O O1 j gt A A A gt A Q9 OO OO NO NO NO oO oO gt Q9 NO NO O N 312 Chapter 11 Reserved Register Addresses of the System 9051 Enable disable Set this bit ON will disable the touch function when the touch function when backlight is off R W backlight is disabled 9052 Disable the return To disable the value return function of the PLC set this bit value function of to ON but it is applicable only to the return value control in PLC Control gt PLC Control Change Base Window When the value of the LB9052 is OFF and the return value function is not disabled to switch from Base Window 10 to Base Window 12 with the PLC Control gt Change Base Window function read address is D20 this switchover can be implemented only when the value of D20 is 12 After the system switches to Base Window 12 the PLC will automatically return the number 12 to the word address
402. y one character If the cursor is on the end of a line it will move to the head of the next line If it is on the end of the Notebook it will remain in current position Line head move the cursor to the head of the current line If it is on the head of the current line it will stay there Line Tail move the cursor to the end of the current line If it is on the end of the current line it will stay there First position move the cursor to the first position of the Notebook component If it is on the first position now it will stay there Last position move the cursor to the last position of the Notebook component If it is on the last position now it will stay there Note 1 The Last position is the last position of the Notebook not the last character of the current text content in many cases they are different 2 To activate the cursor touch the Notebook component on the panel to pop up the keyboard for input The cursor will glitter to indicate the current position 258 Chapter 6 Components Function Eey Component Attribution X Function Key Trigger Addr Tag Graphics Position E Switch Window Change Framel E Escute Marco Keyboard Func Selectte Start selec C Map Keyboard Mapping Key sot Hite C Multicolor Magnify Multiple 10 Trend Graphics i adL i Euren Horizontal Pen Width 1 a All VectorGraph Clear E Hent E Wertical Background Ted Indicator
403. y understanding of the creation and use of the macro template In this section we will introduce the operating principles of the macro template and the precautions in the use of the macro template A macro template can be regarded as a black box with input and output Taking the example in the section 9 1 for example the model is as follows 295 Chapter 9 Macro Macro Module Read in int MacroEntry White out variable t en variable if LW1_R read only LW2_W double LW0 RYLW1 R Conly write LWO R return 0 LW2 W LW1 R 7 The execution principle is as follows Before the module executes the macro it obtains register values of LWO and LW1 and assigns them to the read variables LWO_R and LW1_R and then runs the macro template After the macro function is returned it will write the variable value of LW2_W to LW2 Therefore macro template inner variable is only a copy of the register Modification of the variable value does not mean modification of register value A Note 1 5 The macro template does not read register value in real time instead it reads the value at the beginning of the macro template operation Therefore during the operation of the macro template changing the register value externally does not affect the operation results of the macro template The value of the macro template is not written in real time Therefore the variable valu
404. yed in decimal format 0 9 Only when these two option is selected will the Engineering data conversion function enabled The reading value is displayed in its original value and mark decimal point in the position specified by the Digits below decimal point For example if the Digits below decimal point 2 a reading value 14561 is displayed as 145 61 Engineering Data Conversion The reading value is converted to its engineering unit before display Scaling is performed as follows Conversion value Engineering Min Reading value Input Min Engineering Max Engineering Min Input Max Input Min The conversion value will be displayed according to the setting of digits above decimal point and digits below decimal point For example if conversion value is 123 456 and the digits below decimal point 2 digits above decimal point 3 then the conversion value is displayed as 123 45 the last digit is truncated 2 Hex The number is displayed in hex O F format scaling and decimal point are disabled 155 Chapter 6 Components Data Input Component Attribution Basic Attribution Numeric Data Trigger Address Fort Graphics Fosition Data Type M Digits Above Decimal Foint 4 Digits Below Decimal Point j Min Value 0 Max Value 65535 T Project Data Conversion ProMin value Pro Mas Value 5995 3 Binary The number is displayed in binary O 1 format scal
405. ze WORDS Max block package size BITS The touch panel HMI will automatically collect the PLC data with consecutive addresses and will send a singal read command to read such multi addressed data which greatly enhances communication efficiency and shortens response time The parameters Max block package size WORDS and Max block package size BITS determine the maximum number of word and bit registers that can be read consecutively The values are usually automatically set when the user selects a PLC so it is not necessary for the user to set them If the addresses of such PLC data are not consecutive the touch panel will read such data by separate commands so a lot of read commands are required for reading such data Therefore we allow a user to modify the interval by modifying the parameters of Max interval of block pack WORDS and Max interval of block pack BITS When the interval between two addresses is longer than the set value they will be read as two packages otherwise they will be read as a package In this way it reduces communication packages and enhances communication speed An example As shown in the figure below to read data from D20 to D29 when the PLC package is set to 0 the system has to use 3 read commands to read such data When the Max interval of block pack WORDS is set to 1 the system can read such data with only one command In general the time used for reading additional two addresses D23 D25 is far les

EV5000 User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents